Supplier ledger /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger section By using the Supplier ledger workspace, you can maintain structured information about an unlimited number of suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger By using the Supplier ledger workspace, you can maintain structured information about an unlimited number of suppliers. By using the Supplier ledger workspace, you can maintain structured information about an unlimited number of suppliers. You can enter supplier documents, invoices, and adjustments, as well as track earlier payment discounts, apply payments to invoices, and print payments. ## Multi-currency support If you have activated the multi-currency support in Visma Net, you can assign a default foreign currency to each supplier account. The currency and its rate may be overridden on individual transactions if the settings of the supplier account allow currency overriding. The system automatically computes realised gains or losses upon payment of supplier invoices in foreign currencies. Outstanding foreign currency invoices can be revalued in the base currency as often as needed. ## Supplier defaults and overrides You can establish supplier classes that provide default values for creating other suppliers. You can also divide suppliers into classes based on the types of goods or services you purchase from them. On document entry, you specify a supplier, and most of the elements are populated with the supplier's default values. For more details, see: [About supplier defaults and overrides](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/about-supplier-defaults-and-overrides/). ## Rounding of invoice totals If the **Invoice rounding** functionality is activated in your system, you can set up the rules and the precision to be used to automatically round the amounts of the invoices that you enter or generate in the system. ## Expense reclassification If expense reclassification is performed as a separate stage of document processing in your organisation, you can configure support for expense reclassification for invoices. ## Configurable approval of invoices By using Visma Net, you can configure approval to match the approval procedures used in your company. + You can set up automatic pre-approval of all invoices and allow access to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window only to employees who are authorised to approve invoices and create payments. + Alternatively, you can configure the system in such a way that the invoices can be approved only by using the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window. ## Support for recurring invoices If you frequently have to create supplier invoices that contain the same information, you can assign such invoices to a schedule, so that the system will generate the documents at the frequency you specify: + once per financial period, on a specified day of each calendar month + on a specified day each week (or a user-specified number of weeks), or + on a user-specified number of days (such as daily or every other day) ## Supplier ledger inquiries Inquiries of the Supplier ledger workspace present suppliers' account information in a variety of ways. + You can view the total outstanding balances for a supplier or suppliers by a period and by a currency by using the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) inquiry window. + You can view all documents that are past due for a specific supplier, as well as the cash discount amounts taken or lost, in the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) inquiry window. + You can use extensive drill-down capabilities to quickly find any specific detail. ## Supplier ledger security options Visma Net implements a role-based, task-oriented approach to security. Users belong to roles, which are given appropriate rights to access only the resources the users need to perform their routine tasks. To restrict user access to some supplier accounts, you can include the supplier accounts and users authorised to work with them in restriction groups, which restrict other users' access to these sensitive supplier accounts. ## Sending documents electronically With Visma Net, you can define mailing settings for customers and suppliers to send documents to them electronically, by email. Also, you can configure sending such emails to employees who work with specific suppliers or customers. ## Payment terms You can define site-specific payment terms, which can be associated with specific suppliers (or supplier classes) and customers. The payment terms, which are applied to both outgoing and incoming payments, define the due dates and the available cash discounts. ## Other functionalities and options Depending on the chosen settings, you can perform various tasks related to supplier accounts, invoices, and payments: + Store any number of additional locations and contacts for each supplier + Attach scanned images or electronic versions of supplier documents to invoices, adjustments, and prepayments or to lines of the documents + Define three ageing periods for outstanding invoices + Pay each supplier's invoices by printing one payment or separate payments + Automatically calculate realised and unrealised gains and losses on foreign currency transactions + Process prepayments and multiple instalments. + Void payments + Track available and missed discounts Process purchase invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices section In Visma Net, a purchase invoice is created for each incoming invoice from a supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase invoices In Visma Net, a purchase invoice is created for each incoming invoice from a supplier. + You can enter an invoice by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. + Invoices can be automatically generated when receipts are released in the Purchases workspace if the **Create invoice on receipt release** check box is selected in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. + If the Inventory module is not enabled in your system, you can enter a invoice in the Supplier ledger workspace with only non-stock items. + If the Inventory module is enabled, an invoice may include lines with stock and non-stock items. ## Invoice data entry + An invoice must contain at least one detail line. It is recommended to include all available details from the original supplier document in the invoice. + To create an invoice, use the **Add purchase order receipt**, **Add purchase order receipt line**, and **Add purchase order** buttons in the table toolbar. These buttons are located in the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window and allow you to upload lines from receipts and purchase orders directly to the invoice. + When you click **Add purchase order**, a dialog box appears, displaying a list of uninvoiced purchase orders. These orders have lines with non-stock items that do not require a receipt, as indicated by the unchecked **Require receipt** box in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + Upon saving an invoice for the first time, the system automatically assigns it a unique ID for tracking purposes. This ID is generated based on the number series assigned to invoices in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. + The system automatically calculates due dates and cash discount dates for each invoice, based on the supplier payment terms specified in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + You can attach to each invoice an electronic version or a scanned image of the original supplier document. Also, you can attach a related document to each line of the document. > [!NOTE] > To easily match supplier ledger documents and avoid duplications, ensure that invoices include a reference to the supplier's original document number. You can make this reference mandatory by selecting the **Require supplier reference** check box in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. To prevent users from entering duplicate documents, select the **Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number** check box in the same window. The system will then display an error message each time a user attempts to enter a supplier reference number that already exists in the system. ## Invoice amount rounding When the **Invoice rounding** functionality is activated in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and rounding settings are configured in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, the system will automatically round the total invoice amount upon saving. For more information, refer to: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/). ## Expense reclassification If expense reclassification is a separate stage of document processing in your system, you can set up the workflow so that the users who enter invoices into the system will pre-release them, and later the authorised accountants will perform expense reclassification, or assign correct expense accounts (and subaccounts) and finally release them. For more information, see:[About support for expense reclassification.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/about-support-for-expense-reclassification/) ## Invoice statuses Each invoice has one of the following statuses, which tells you its stage in processing:
Option Description
On hold Generally, this status is used for an invoice that is a draft. This is the default status for new documents if the Hold documents on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. An invoice with the On hold status can be edited.
Balanced After editing is completed, you take the invoice off hold, thus changing its status to Balanced. If the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can take the invoice off hold only if you type the document control total.
Pre-released The status indicates that the invoice has been pre-released and requires expense reclassification. (This status is used only if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated.)
Open This status means that the document has been released (and approved, if required).
Closed This status reflects that the document has been paid.
Scheduled This status indicates that the document is assigned to a schedule, and a new document that is similar to the original one is generated periodically.
## Release of invoices To release invoices in bulk, use the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. For individual invoices, use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. A batch created upon release of the invoice is numbered in accordance with the number series assigned to the batches originating in supplier ledger. ## Invoice approval for payment If approval of invoices is not required in your system, all invoices, upon release, appear in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window and you can pay them. If approval of invoices is required before invoices may be paid, then upon release, the invoices appear in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window, from which you can approve them. Approved invoices appear in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window and you can pay them. ## Correcting errors on invoices Once released, a supplier ledger document cannot be edited or deleted; to correct it, you can issue an adjustment. Before you save the adjustment, type another **Supplier reference** value if the **Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number** option is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. ## Invoice payment You can pay invoices individually by using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window or in bulk in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. For details on payments, see: [About supplier ledger payment processing.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-supplier-ledger-payment-processing/)
Enter an invoice in the base currency /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-in-the-base-currency section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter an invoice in the base currency 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, in the **Type** field, select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, the default is set to the current date, but you have the option to modify it. The **Post period** field will be automatically populated based on the document date you have selected. 1. In the **Supplier** field, choose the supplier who issued the invoice. The supplier's default location appears in the **Location** field. You have the option to select a different location. 1. In the **Supplier** field, choose the supplier who issued the invoice. The supplier's default location appears in the **Location** field. You have the option to select a different location. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the reference number of the supplier invoice the invoice is based on. This setting is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Make sure the base currency is shown in the **Currency** text field. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the invoice. An invoice must include at least one line. To add each detail row to the invoice, follow the steps below: 1. In the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Item ID** column, specify the line item by its item ID. If you select a stock item, you need to link it to a purchase receipt line, see [Link stock item to a purchase receipt line on purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap301000-link-item-purchase-receipt-task/). 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction. 1. In the **Quantity** column, enter the quantity of the line item purchased from the supplier. 1. Optional: Enter the unit of measure for the item in the **UoM** column. The default is the UoM defined to the product. 1. In the **Unit cost** column, enter the cost per specified unit. The default is the unit cost defined to the product. 1. If necessary, in the **Cost** column, manually enter the total amount of the specified quantity of the line item. The column is filled in by the system if you have specified the quantity and the unit cost. 1. Make sure the account shown in the **Account** column is correct; by default, the system uses the expense account associated with the supplier location, but you can select another account. The invoice is automatically posted to this account. 1. Make sure the subaccount shown in the **Subaccount** column is correct; by default, it is generated in accordance with the rule in the **Combine expense sub. from** field in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. You can manually change it if necessary. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the purchased item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: Attach a scanned image of the supplier original document to this invoice. To do this, click **Files** on the window title bar. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, select the **Hold** check box. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Enter a foreign currency invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-a-foreign-currency-invoice section Visma Net saves invoices, displaying the amounts in both the base currency and the document's currency, using the exchange rate specified in the document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a foreign currency invoice Visma Net saves invoices, displaying the amounts in both the base currency and the document's currency, using the exchange rate specified in the document. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, in the **Type** field, select **Purchase invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, enter the date of the invoice. The **Post period** field is filled out automatically based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier the invoice is from. The default location of the supplier is displayed in **Location** field. Select another location if necessary. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the number of the purchase invoice that the invoice is based on. This setting is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Ensure the invoice currency matches the supplier document currency. If not, choose a different currency. Overriding the currency is only possible if the **Enable currency override** check box is selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Optional: Click **Exchange rate** to open the **Rate selection** dialog box, where you can view the effective exchange rate for the currency. If the supplier's account settings allow, you can override their default exchange rate type. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the invoice. An invoice must include at least one line. To add each detail line to the invoice, follow the steps below: 1. On the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, specify the line item by its item ID (if available) or leave it blank. Only a non-stock item or service may be selected. The Inventory workspace will not be updated. 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction. 1. Optional: In the **Quantity** column, enter the quantity of the line item purchased from the supplier. 1. Optional: Enter the unit of measure for the item in the **UoM** column. 1. Optional: In the **Unit cost** column, enter the cost per specified unit. 1. If necessary, in the **Ext. cost** column, manually enter the total cost of the line item. The column is filled in by the system if you have specified the quantity and the unit cost. 1. Make sure the account shown in the **Account** column is correct; by default, the system uses the expense account associated with the supplier location, but you can select another account. 1. Make sure the subaccount shown in the **Subaccount** column is correct; by default, it is generated in accordance with the rule in the **Combine expense sub. from** field in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. You can manually change it if necessary. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the purchased item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: Attach a scanned image of the original document to this invoice. To do this, click **Files** on the window title bar. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, follow one of these steps and ensure the **Hold** check box is unchecked: + If the **Amount** field is visible in the top section of the window, input the invoice's total amount in this text field. + If the **Amount** field is not visible in the window, verify that the invoice's total amount is accurately displayed in the **Balance** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Use the **Currency toggle** button to view the document amounts in the foreign currency or in the base currency. Enter an invoice based on purchase receipts or purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-based-on-purchase-receipts-or-purchase-orders section In Visma Net, you can create an invoice for stock items received at the company warehouses based on purchase receipts or their individual lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter an invoice based on purchase receipts or purchase orders In Visma Net, you can create an invoice for stock items received at the company warehouses based on purchase receipts or their individual lines. ## Introduction Additionally, you can generate an invoice for non-stock items or services using purchase orders. Invoices are automatically generated for receipts with the **Create invoice** check box selected. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, in the **Type** field, select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, select the date of the invoice. By default, the current date is selected. The **Post period** field is filled out automatically based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select a required supplier. The default location of the supplier is displayed in **Location** text field; select another location if necessary. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the number of the invoice the invoice is based on if it is required in your system. This setting is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Ensure the document's currency is accurate. If not, choose an appropriate currency. To override the currency, the **Enable currency override** check box must be selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. Add purchase receipts to the list on the **Document details** tab as follows: 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add purchase order receipt** to add a purchase receipt with all its lines to the invoice. The system opens the **Add purchase order receipt** dialog box, which displays the list of released receipts of the selected supplier that have not been fully invoiced. 1. Select particular purchase receipts by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the unlabelled column. 1. Click **Add and close** to add the selected receipts to the invoice and close the dialog box. Check the columns of the **Document details** tab, which have been filled in automatically in accordance with the selected document or documents. Compare the item quantity and cost copied from the receipt with the amounts in the purchase invoice, and correct them, if needed. Delete unnecessary lines. If the unit cost specified in the invoice differs from the unit cost taken from the receipt, the system posts the discrepancy to the purchase price variance account associated with the item. 1. To add selected purchase receipt lines to the invoice, perform the following steps: 1. In the table toolbar, click the **Add purchase order receipt line** button to add one line or multiple lines of a specific receipt to the invoice. The system opens the **Add receipt line dialog box**. 1. Optional: In the **Receipt no.** text field in the dialog box, select the receipt whose lines you want to add to the invoice. All the lines of the selected receipt are displayed in the dialog box. 1. Select receipt lines by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the unlabelled column. 1. Click **Add and close** to add the selected receipt lines to the invoice and close the dialog box. Notice that the columns of the table on the **Document details** tab have been filled in automatically with the selected lines. Compare the item quantity and cost copied from the receipt with the amounts in the purchase invoice, and correct them, if needed. 1. To add purchase orders to the invoice, perform the following steps: 1. In the **Document details** tab toolbar, click **Add purchase order** if the goods ordered were non-stock items or services. The system opens the **Add purchase order dialog box**, which displays the list of purchase orders of the selected supplier. 1. Select purchase orders by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the unlabelled column. 1. Click the **Add and close** button to add the selected orders to the invoice. Examine the columns in the **Document details** tab, which are automatically populated based on the selected document. Compare the item quantity and cost from the purchase order to the amounts in the purchase invoice, and make any necessary corrections. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice as **Balanced**, follow one of the steps below and ensure the **Hold** check box is unchecked: + If the **Amount** field is visible, enter the invoice's total amount in the text field. + If the **Amount** field is not visible, verify that the invoice's total amount is correctly displayed in the **Balance** text field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Find a particular invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/find-a-particular-invoice section You can use multiple windows to find a invoice that has been created with Visma Net, depending on the status of the invoice and other parameters: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Find a particular invoice You can use multiple windows to find a invoice that has been created with Visma Net, depending on the status of the invoice and other parameters: ## Introduction + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window: Use this window to find any invoice in the system. + [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window: Use this window to find invoices with the **Open** status that require approval or have been approved (if approval of invoices is required in your system). + [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window: Use this window to find outstanding invoices with the **Open** status. ## Find an invoice via the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window: 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Invoice**. 1. Select a specific invoice in one of the following ways: + Click the navigation buttons on the window toolbar until you see the invoice. + Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Invoice no.** field of the top part, and do the following: 1. Select the column you want to search by clicking its header. 1. Type a text in the **Search** field in the lower-left corner, and press Enter. The system highlights the items in the column that contain the text. 1. Double-click the invoice to display its details in the window. ## Find an invoice via the Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) window 1. Go to the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window: 1. Choose options in the top section that correspond to the known attributes of the desired invoice. The table will display documents that match the specified criteria. 1. To display the invoice you are looking for in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, select the line with the particular invoice and click **View document** on the table toolbar. ## Find an invoice via the Process payments (AP50301S) window 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window: 1. Filter the documents to be displayed in the table part using the options in the **Filters** section in the top part of the window. 1. Select the line with the invoice and click its reference number link to display the invoice in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Pay an individual purchase invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/pay-an-individual-purchase-invoice section You use the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window to start the process of paying an individual open purchase invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pay an individual purchase invoice You use the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window to start the process of paying an individual open purchase invoice. For more information: [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/). ## Introduction You use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window to start the process of paying an individual open purchase invoice. ## Before you proceed Ensure that purchase invoices that require approvals are processed in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window. ## Pay for an individual purchase invoice 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Purchase invoice**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the purchase invoice to be paid. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Actions** and then select **Manual payment**. The [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window opens with a new payment created for this purchase invoice. 1. Verify the document information: ensure the desired payment method is selected and the date is accurately specified. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the applicable charges or fees for processing this payment in the bank. For each applicable charge, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row to the table. 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type that designates the bank charge applicable to this payment. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount applicable to this payment. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box. If the **Hold** check box is disabled and displays a yellow warning mark to the left, print an invoice for this payment first. Afterwards, the document status will change to **Printed**. 1. Click **Release** in the window toolbar to release the payment. The document status will change to **Released**. Correct a purchase invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/correct-a-purchase-invoice section You correct a purchase invoice differently, depending on whether the invoice was released or not (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct a purchase invoice You correct a purchase invoice differently, depending on whether the invoice was released or not (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). ## Introduction You correct a purchase invoice differently, depending on whether the invoice was released or not (and has the **Balanced**, **On hold**, or **Scheduled** status). Use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window to correct or reverse an invoice. ## Correct an invoice that has not been released 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Find the invoice using the navigation buttons, or search for it by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Invoice no.** field at the top. This will open a list of documents. Alternatively, you can enter the invoice number directly into the **Invoice no.** field. 1. Make relevant corrections to the invoice. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, check whether the **Amount** field of the top part is displayed or not: + If the **Amount** field of the top part is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the invoice is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. Make sure that the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Correct an invoice that has been released Use one of the following ways to correct a released invoice: + Reverse the invoice to reverse the impact of the invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse a invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/) + Use the **Correct invoice** action in the **Actions** drop-down in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. + Correct the invoice to decrease the supplier ledger balance by creating a purchase credit note. + Correct the invoice to increase the supplier ledger balance by creating a credit adjustment.

Related pages

Tasks

Reverse an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/reverse-an-invoice page Reversing an invoice, which pertains to a purchase receipt, impacts the supplier ledger account instead of the associated expense account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse an invoice Reversing an invoice, which pertains to a purchase receipt, impacts the supplier ledger account instead of the associated expense account. ## Introduction Reversing an invoice, which pertains to a purchase receipt, impacts the supplier ledger account instead of the associated expense account. Upon releasing the resulting purchase credit note, the purchase receipt status will be updated to **Open**. In Visma Net, you cannot delete an invoice once it has been released; you can either correct or reverse it. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Locate the invoice to be reversed in one of the following ways: + In the **Reference no.** field of the top part, select the invoice by its reference number. + Click the navigation buttons in the window toolbar until you see the appropriate invoice on the screen. 1. Click **Actions** on the window toolbar and select **Reverse**. The system will display the created purchase credit note with the same details as the invoice and a status of **Balanced**. 1. Verify that the settings of the newly created adjustment are accurate, such as ensuring the total amount of the purchase credit note matches the total amount of the invoice. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a reference to the invoice the adjustment is based on. 1. Change the reference to the supplier document if required, since the system checks if it is unique. 1. Click **Release** to release the adjustment.

Related pages

Tasks

Release purchase invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/release-purchase-invoices page You can release invoices and adjustments by using one of the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release purchase invoices You can release invoices and adjustments by using one of the following windows: ## Introduction + To release a particular invoice or adjustment, use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Search the invoice or adjustment, and click **Release** in the window toolbar. + To release multiple invoices, adjustments, and other supplier ledger documents at a time, use the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) (AP501000) window, as described in the following section. 1. Go to the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. 1. Do one of the following: + To release all listed documents, click **Release all** in the window toolbar. + To release only selected documents, select each document you want to release by selecting the appropriate unlabelled check box, and in the window toolbar, click **Release**. You can use filtering to display a narrower range of documents when you get into this window. Approve purchase invoices for payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment section You can approve multiple invoices by using the Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) window if approval of invoices is required in your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve purchase invoices for payment You can approve multiple invoices by using the Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) window if approval of invoices is required in your system. For more information: [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/). ## Introduction You can approve multiple invoices by using the [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/) window if approval of invoices is required in your system. You can pay invoices without approval if the **Require approval of invoices prior to payment** check box is not selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Go to the [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/) window. 1. In the top part, make sure the **Show approved for payment** check box is cleared. 1. Specify the criteria to select the invoices you want to approve. Indicate whether you want to take cash discounts, pay for overdue invoices, or to pay invoices before their due dates as follows: + To select the invoices with cash discounts available, select the **Cash discount expires within** check box and specify the maximum number of days in the adjacent field. + To display overdue invoices, select the **Due date within** check box, type **0** in the adjacent field, and select the **Pay date within** check box, and type **0** in the adjacent field. 1. In the table, review the list of documents that meet the criteria you have specified. In the table toolbar, you can use filtering options to display documents with specific properties only. 1. To approve all listed invoices, select the unlabelled check box used as a column heading. 1. To approve only some of the invoices, select the appropriate unlabelled check boxes in the column with a check box as a heading. 1. Optional: If an invoice should be paid individually, select the **Pay separately** check box for it. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Windows

Create a purchase invoice in the general ledger /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-invoice-in-the-general-ledger section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase invoice in the general ledger 1. Go to the [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/) window. The [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/) window is available, if you check option **Journal voucher** in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new record. 1. Enter the correct **Transaction date**, **Currency**, and **Description**. 1. On the **Transactions** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a row. 1. In the **Trans. code** column, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select **Supplier ledger** workspace with **INV** as the transaction type. 1. Enter any other necessary values on the row. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. ## What is next? If you are using AutoPay to pay the invoice, follow these instructions: [Create outgoing payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-outgoing-payments/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Preview purchase invoice attachments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/preview-purchase-invoice-attachments page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preview purchase invoice attachments 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Choose an existing invoice with attachments or create a new purchase invoice and attach a file. A number will appear next to the **Files** element in the top right corner of the window when an invoice has attachments. 1. Click **Show files**. The split window displays the first attachment available. If there are multiple attachments, click the drop-down arrow beside the document icon in the top left corner of the split window to choose another attachment. + Use the page arrows to navigate between the pages of an attachment. + Use the rotation icons to rotate the attachment. + Use the cross-slide to zoom in and out on the attachment. + To adjust the width of the attachment display window, click and drag the vertical line between the invoice details and the displayed attachment. + When you navigate between different invoice records in the left part of the window, the display window shows the contents of the chosen invoice. + If there are no attachments, the display part is empty. 1. To close the attachment display window, click **Hide files**.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Register purchase invoices to projects /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/register-purchase-invoices-to-projects section In the Projects (PM301000) and Project tasks (PM302000) windows, on the General settings tab, in the Visibility settings section, make sure that you have selected the check box Supplier ledger, so that you can register purchase invoices to projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Register purchase invoices to projects In the Projects (PM301000) and Project tasks (PM302000) windows, on the General settings tab, in the Visibility settings section, make sure that you have selected the check box Supplier ledger, so that you can register purchase invoices to projects. For more information: [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/), [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/). 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Select the relevant supplier. 1. Add a **Supplier ref**. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a line and fill out the necessary information, making sure to add the correct project in the **Project** column. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. Create a purchase document /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-document section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase document 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** drop-down list, select one of the following [options](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap301000-purchase-invoices-document-types-pop-up-ref/): 1. **Purchase invoice**: If you want to create a new invoice. 1. **Credit adjustment**: If you want to adjust a sales invoice that has already been released. 1. **Purchase credit note**: If you want to adjust a purchase invoice that has already been released. 1. **Prepayment**: If you have a prepayment request from a supplier. 1. Fill in all mandatory fields (*). For outgoing payments, the CID is not mandatory. However, suppliers may require a CID for incoming payments. If an incoming payment lacks a CID, the bank will reject the payment for that supplier. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to enter document lines. The **Item ID** is optional. 1. Enter required details such as **Quantity**, **Unit cost**, and, if needed, choose the **Account** and **Subaccount**. 1. Enter any relevant information on the other tabs, for example, on the **Financial details** tab. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The document status is **Balanced**. 1. Click **Release** to post the document to the general ledger.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Create a purchase document with Approval /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-document-with-approval section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase document with Approval ## Before you start You must activate a license before you can approve documents in Approval: [Check activation of Approval license](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/check-activation-of-approval-license/) 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Under **Type**, select one of the following options: 1. **Purchase invoice**: To create a new invoice. 1. **Credit adjustment**: To adjust a sales invoice that is already released. 1. **Purchase credit note**: To adjust a purchase invoice that has already been released. 1. **Prepayment**: To have a prepayment request from a supplier. 1. Fill in all mandatory fields (*). > [!NOTE] > The CID is not mandatory on outgoing payments, but suppliers can require a CID on incoming payments. If there is no CID on an incoming payment, the bank rejects the payment for this supplier. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to enter document lines. The **Item ID** is optional. 1. Go to the **Approval details** tab. 1. In the **Default document** field, select the desired document. 1. Click **Add attachment**. 1. In the **Initial approver** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the approver. 1. Optional: In the **Comment** text box, enter a comment if necessary. 1. Save the invoice and click **Send to Approval**. > [!NOTE] > You can also set a preference that all invoices will automatically be released when they are approved in Approval: [Set Release document from Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/set-release-document-from-approval-as-the-default-action/) ## What is next? The payment request is now sent to Approval and the approvers will receive an email about a pending approving task [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/GB_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/SE_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/SE_sv/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/NO_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/NO_no/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/NL_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/Nl_nl/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/fi_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/fi_fi/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/DK_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/DK_da/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm). The **Approval status** field will show you the updated status, depending on the approvers actions in Approval : > [!NOTE] > You can click the status link for more information about the status in the reports [Approval document history (AP40104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-history-ap40104s/) and [Approval document line history (AP40105S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-line-history-ap40105s/).
Status Description
New The invoice is new.
Sent to Approval The invoice has been sent to Approval
Cancelled The status after you have clicked the Cancel button. (The Send to Approval button changes to Cancel after sending the document to Approval).
Received in Approval The invoice has been received by Approval.
Pending The invoice is on a valid approval flow and is pending approval.
Rejected The invoice has been rejected by Approval.
Approved The invoice has been approved and you can now release invoices that are ready to be paid. In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can set up automatic release of approved invoices.
> [!NOTE] > You must [release purchase invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/release-purchase-invoices/) before you can pay it, unless you have set that all approved invoices will automatically be released.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Create a purchase credit note for an existing purchase invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-credit-note-for-an-existing-purchase-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase credit note for an existing purchase invoice 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. Before you continue, ensure that the invoice has been released and has the status **Open** or **Closed**. If not, click **Release**. 1. Click **Actions - Reverse**. The invoice type will change to **Purchase credit note**. 1. If necessary, modify the details of the purchase credit note. For example, you can correct rounding differences in the **Rounding diff.** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. The status changes to **Open**. You have to close the credit note and the connected purchase invoice manually. ## Close the credit note and purchase invoice manually 1. You are here: In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, with your credit note in status **Open**. 1. Click **Actions** and choose **Manual payments**. The **Payments** window is displayed. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new invoice line. 1. The document type **Purchase invoice** is already selected. 1. Click in the **Reference no.** field and select the invoice you created the credit note from. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Ensure **Hold** is deselected, then click **Release** to match the credit note with the invoice. After matching and releasing the invoice and credit note, the status will change to **Closed** and display ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Create a purchase credit note /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-credit-note section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase credit note 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Purchase credit note**. 1. Fill in all required fields (*). 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the transactions. 1. Click **Release**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Create an invoice with landed costs /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-an-invoice-with-landed-costs section You usually enter landed costs when you create a purchase receipt in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an invoice with landed costs You usually enter landed costs when you create a purchase receipt in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. For more information: [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/). ## Introduction You usually enter landed costs when you create a purchase receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. However, in some cases, you may receive an invoice from a landed cost supplier after the goods have been received. To add landed costs incurred for goods specified on a purchase receipt that has been released, create an invoice in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. ## Before you proceed In Visma Net, landed cost codes are utilized to specify additional expenses incurred when delivering purchased goods to your company's warehouses or directly to customer locations. As per your company's policies, the following details about the specific landed cost code must be defined in the [Landed cost codes (PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window: the method of allocating landed cost amounts among the shipped goods, and the application of the landed cost — either to an invoice or adjustment in the Supplier ledger workspace only, to a purchase receipt in the Purchases workspace only, or to either of these documents. You can only associate suppliers with a landed cost code if the **Landed cost supplier** check box is selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. ## Create an invoice with landed costs 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part area, select **Invoice.** 1. In the **Date** field, enter the date from the supplier invoice. The **Post period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected date. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. The default location of the supplier is displayed in the **Location** field. You can select another location. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the invoice number that the current invoice is based on. This field is mandatory if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Make sure the document currency is correct. You can select another currency. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. On the **Landed cost** tab, add landed costs to the invoice, following the steps below for each line. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Landed cost code** column, select the code that describes the specific landed costs incurred. The landed cost codes associated with the supplier are listed. 1. In the **Amount** column, enter the amount incurred for the goods specified on the purchase receipt. 1. Select a **VAT category**. 1. In the **Purchase order receipt no.** column, select the number of the receipt the invoice is associated with. 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, select the identifier of the item in the **Purchase order receipt** column for which the landed costs are specified. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, take one of the steps below and then make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field of the top part area is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this text field. + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the invoice is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Windows

Recurring invoices and schedules /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/recurring-invoices-and-schedules page Some supplier ledger documents, such as monthly rent invoices or quarterly and annual insurance invoices, need to be entered regularly with the same amount and similar settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring invoices and schedules Some supplier ledger documents, such as monthly rent invoices or quarterly and annual insurance invoices, need to be entered regularly with the same amount and similar settings. ## Introduction To automate the process of adding these recurring documents to Visma Net, you can create schedules for them. ## Scheduling the generation of supplier ledger documents You can automate the process of creating recurring documents by doing either of the following: + By adding a particular document to an existing schedule in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. In this window, open the document to be scheduled and click **Actions - Add to schedule** in the window toolbar. + By creating a specific schedule and assigning one or multiple documents to that schedule in the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. You can only schedule documents with the **Balanced** status. A schedule determines the frequency and number of times specific documents are generated. In the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window, you can set a fixed number of repetitions for each schedule by entering a value in the **Execution limit (times)** field. Alternatively, you can allow unlimited schedule executions by selecting the **No limit** check box. You also define the frequency of the schedule executions by selecting one of the following option buttons in the window: Daily : The documents will be generated daily or every **x** days. Weekly : The documents will be generated once a week or once every **x** weeks. Monthly : The documents will be generated once per month or once every **x** months. By financial period : The documents will be generated once per financial period or once per **x** financial periods (or in every **xth** financial period). You can assign either a single document or multiple documents to a schedule. After a document has been assigned to a schedule, its status will change to **Scheduled**. ## Attaching relevant documents to schedules To simplify document tracking and streamline auditing, you can attach scanned or electronic versions of documents to each schedule. To do this, follow these steps in the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window: 1. In the **Schedule ID** field, select the schedule by its ID. 1. In the window title bar, click **Files**. This opens the **Files** dialog box. 1. In the dialog box, click **Add file** in the table title bar. This brings up the **Upload file** dialog box. 1. In the **Upload file** dialog box, click **Browse** to locate the file, and then click **Upload** to import the file and close the dialog box. When assigning multiple unrelated documents to the same schedule, go to the **Document list** tab and locate each document in the table. Click the staple icon at the beginning of each row to attach one or more files providing an explanation for the periodic invoice generation. ## Running schedules To generate documents in accordance with the schedule, run the schedule periodically by using the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window. When you run a schedule, the system uses the original document as a template to generate similar documents. The documents generated by a schedule differ from the template document as follows: Date : The date of each document is determined by the schedule you have configured. Reference number : A new reference number is generated for each document in accordance with the number series specified in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. VAT rate : The system calculates VAT and taxable amounts in a document using the VAT rates effective on the document creation date. As a result, VAT amounts may vary in documents generated with the same schedule. To view the VAT rate used in a specific document, go to the **VAT details** tab in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Currency rate : If a currency of a document differs from the base currency set in the system, the system uses for conversion the currency exchange rate effective on the date of the document creation. No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. No documents will be generated ahead of time, but missing documents for previous due dates can be generated by running the schedule once for each missed due date. The documents generated by the schedule will have the **Balanced** status, allowing you to release or post them like any other documents. To view and edit a specific document, access the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. If you make any adjustments, ensure that the invoice's status remains **Balanced** before releasing or approving it for payment. ## Editing template documents You can edit the template document with the **Scheduled** status at any time. To remove a scheduled document, navigate to the **Document list** tab in the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. Click **Delete row** in the table toolbar. The document's status will change to **Voided**, and it will no longer be used for generating documents. Generate a recurring invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-a-recurring-invoice page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate a recurring invoice 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window. 1. To select the schedules by a range of due dates, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Click the **On this date** button, and select the date that ends the range of due dates in the unlabelled field to the right. 1. To run a specific number of schedules, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Select the **After running this number of schedules** button, and type the number in the unlabelled field to the right. 1. In the table, select the unlabelled check box preceding each schedule to be run. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Run selected** to generate documents based on the chosen schedule. Documents will only be generated according to the schedule, and cannot be generated ahead of time. The generated document will have the same details as the scheduled document, with its transaction date set according to the schedule. ## View the generated documents 1. Once processing is successfully completed, click one of the processed schedules on the list to select it. 1. Click **View schedule** in the toolbar. This opens the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window as a dialog box with the selected schedule. 1. Click the reference number of any document to open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window as a pop-up. Make any needed modifications to the document. Generate recurring supplier transactions /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-recurring-supplier-transactions page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring supplier transactions ## Before you start You can use the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window to view all active schedules, and run all the listed schedules or just the ones you select. To create recurring transactions, go to: [Create a schedule for recurring invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-schedule-for-recurring-invoices/). 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window. 1. In the **Start on** field you can enter the start date of the date range for the selected schedules. If you leave this field blank, it will show all schedules that were due before the current date. 1. In the **Stop** section, select **On this date** if you want to enter an end date of the date range for the schedule selection. Or select **After running this number of schedules** to set the number of schedules where the process will stop running. 1. In the bottom part of this window you can view the details of a selected schedule by clicking **View schedule**. You can also create a new schedule if you click **New schedule**. This will open the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. Click **Run selected** to run only the schedules that you have selected in the list. Click **Run all** to run all the listed schedules. Create a schedule for recurring invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-schedule-for-recurring-invoices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a schedule for recurring invoices 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new record. A **schedule ID** will be generated automatically upon saving. Use the **Active** check box to activate or deactivate the schedule. 1. Select a **start date** for the schedule. 1. Complete the optional fields: **Expiration date**: Available when **Never expires** is unchecked. **Execution limit (times)**: Set the maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. Available when **No limit** is unchecked. **Description**: Provide a description for the schedule. The **Next execution** field displays the next execution date for the schedule and is read-only. 1. In the **Schedule type** section, choose the frequency for generating invoices. Pick a schedule type and enter the required parameters in the related section on the right side. 1. In the **Document list** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to assign one or more invoices to the schedule. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, click to activate the field and click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an invoice by its reference number. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the **Generated documents** tab you can see a list of the documents generated as a result of running this schedule. ## What is next? To run recurring transactions, go to [Generate recurring transactions.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-recurring-supplier-transactions/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Schedule a recurring invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/schedule-a-recurring-invoice section Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule a recurring invoice Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. For more information: [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/). ## Before you proceed Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Save each document with the **Balanced** status. Do not release the them. You can add supplier ledger documents of the following types to schedules: **Invoice**, **Credit adjustment**, **Purchase credit note**, and **Prepayment**. If you want to use a document that is already closed, copy, and paste it to a new document. ## Create a schedule 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. In the top part, in the **Description** field, add a description of the schedule. 1. In the **Start date** field, select the start date for the schedule. The default is the current date. 1. Define limitations on the schedule execution as follows: + Enter the date when this schedule expires in the **Expiration date** field, or select the **Never expires** check box. + Enter the maximum number of times the schedule should be executed in the **Execution limit** field, or select the **No limit** check box. 1. Specify how often the document should be generated: + To generate the document daily or every **x** days, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily**. 1. In the **Every day(s)** field, type an integer to specify the number of days between document generations. To generate a document every day, enter 1; to generate a document every other day, enter 2; and so on. + To generate the document weekly or every **x** weeks, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Weekly**. 1. In the **Every week(s)** field, type an integer to specify the number of weeks between document generation. 1. Select the check boxes to specify the days of the week when the documents should be generated. + To generate the document monthly or every **x** months, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Monthly**. 1. In the **Every month(s)** field, enter an integer to specify the number of months between document generation. 1. Select when the document should be generated: either the day of the month or the week in the month and day of the week (such as the third Friday of the month). + To generate the document every **x** financial periods, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **By financial period**. 1. In the **Every period(s)** field, type an integer to specify the frequency of document generation by financial period. 1. Specify whether the document should be generated on the first day of the financial period, the last day of the financial period, or a specific day of the period. 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected to indicate that the schedule is active. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: For user reference, attach a scanned copy or electronic version of the document on which this schedule is based. To do this, drag the file from the folder on your computer and drop it in the top part. ## Add documents to a schedule 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. In the **Schedule ID** field, select a schedule to which you want to add a document or documents. 1. On the **Document list** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Type** column, select the type of a document to be added. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document by its reference number. 1. Optional: To attach an electronic version of the related document or its scanned image, click the staple icon and select and upload the document. 1. Repeat steps 1- 4 for each document you want to add. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Post documents to the general ledger manually /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/post-documents-to-the-general-ledger-manually section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Post documents to the general ledger manually ## Before you start If your company uses combined releasing and posting, the general ledger is automatically updated when you release. Both the payment and the purchase invoice, or the credit note, will be closed and you do not need to do anything in the general ledger. If you do not use automatic post and release or if the default combined post and release setting for the Supplier ledger has been changed (the **Do not automatically release supplier payments** check box is selected), you can post invoices manually by following the instructions below. 1. Go to the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) if your document is not listed. 1. Select the document you want to post. 1. Click **Post**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Check activation of Approval license /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/check-activation-of-approval-license page To approve your invoices in Approval, you must activate a license. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check activation of Approval license To approve your invoices in Approval, you must activate a license. You can check if your licence is activated by following the steps below. 1. If you can see the **Approval details** tab in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, it means your license is active. 1. If you can see the **Send to Approval** button, it means that you can approve your purchase invoices in Approval.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Set Release document from Approval as the default action /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/set-release-document-from-approval-as-the-default-action section You can set as default action that all invoices will automatically be released when they are approved in Approval. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set Release document from Approval as the default action You can set as default action that all invoices will automatically be released when they are approved in Approval. 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. Find the **Approval settings** section. 1. Select the **Release document from Approval** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Override Send to Approval as the default action /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Override Send to Approval as the default action ## Before you start To handle large amounts of invoices more efficiently, you can send all invoices to Approval as a default action. If nothing is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window or in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, the system will use the Approval license to define the default action. + If Approval is activated, the default action is **Send to Approval**. For Sweden, if the pre-booking functionality is also activated in Approval, the default action is **Pre-book and Send to Approval**. + If Approval is not activated, the default action is **Release**. You can override these actions defined by the license, by following the instructions below. 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. Find the **Invoice inbox settings** section. 1. In the **Default action for invoice inbox** drop-down list, select **Send to Approval**. You can also set **Hold** or **Release** as a default actions here. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? You can also override this default action for one specific supplier: [Override Send to Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action-for-one-supplier/). Run ageing reports /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/run-ageing-reports page You can use multiple Supplier ledger ageing reports, depending on such factors as the currency in which you would like to view outstanding and past due balances in, and whether balances will be broken down by days outstanding or days past due. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run ageing reports You can use multiple Supplier ledger ageing reports, depending on such factors as the currency in which you would like to view outstanding and past due balances in, and whether balances will be broken down by days outstanding or days past due. ## Introduction You can use multiple Supplier ledger ageing reports, depending on such factors as the currency in which you would like to view outstanding and past due balances in, and whether balances will be broken down by days outstanding or days past due. This topic provides instructions for using the following reports: + [Aged past due (AP631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ap631000/) + [Aged past due MC (AP631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-mc-ap631100/) + [Aged outstanding (AP631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ap631500/) + [Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ap631600/) + [Aged period sensitive (AP630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ap630500/) ## Run Aged past due 1. Go to the [Aged past due (AP631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ap631000/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view the past due documents on the selected ageing date + **Summary**: To view the past due balances on the selected ageing date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all the suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with past due balances. Balances are broken down by days past due on the specified date, and all amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## Run Aged past due (MC) 1. Go to the [Aged past due MC (AP631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-mc-ap631100/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view the past due documents on the selected ageing date + **Summary**: To view the past due balances on the selected ageing date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with past due balances, which are broken down by days past due on the specified ageing date. The amounts are displayed in the documents' currencies and in the base currency. ## Run Aged outstanding 1. Go to the [Aged outstanding (AP631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ap631500/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view outstanding documents on the selected aging date + **Summary**: To view outstanding balances on the selected aging date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days outstanding with respect to the specified ageing date. The amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## Run Aged outstanding (currency) 1. Go to the [Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ap631600/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date + **Summary**: To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days outstanding with respect to the specified ageing date. The amounts are displayed in the documents currencies and in the base currency. ## Aged period sensitive 1. Go to the [Aged period sensitive (AP630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ap630500/) window. 1. Select the financial period. The system uses the selected period to calculate the ageing categories for the documents. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view past due documents on the last day of the selected financial period + **Summary**: To view past due balances on the last day of the selected financial period 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Click **Run report**. The report lists suppliers with past due balances, which are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. All the amounts are displayed in the base currency. About support for expense reclassification /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/about-support-for-expense-reclassification page Visma Net provides support for expense reclassification. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About support for expense reclassification Visma Net provides support for expense reclassification. ## Introduction If your company requires a separate step for expense reclassification during invoice processing, you can enable this feature. When activated in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the invoice release process consists of two stages: 1. **Pre-release**: A data entry worker enters an invoice and pre-releases it. All the expenses specified in the document are temporarily recorded to the reclassification account. 1. **Release**: An authorised accountant reviews a pre-released document, specifies the correct expense accounts and subaccounts (the system allows no other changes), and releases the document. ## Configuration of support for expense reclassification Once the functionality is activated, you can assign the account and subaccount for temporarily recording non-classified expenses for each supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. To quickly assign accounts to new suppliers, select the default account and subaccount for expenses that need reclassification for each supplier class. This can be done in the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. By doing this, every new supplier added to the class will automatically have the specified account and subaccount for that class. ## Possible workflows Pending expense reclassification is only allowed for invoices entered manually in the Supplier ledger workspace. You can use one of the following scenarios: Standard scenario : When the data entry worker is familiar with the appropriate expense accounts and subaccounts for an invoice, they can enter the document and release it. Two-step scenario : If you are uncertain about the correct expense accounts to select while entering an invoice, keep the default accounts and subaccounts on the document lines. Click **Pre-release** in the window toolbar to pre-release the document. An authorised accountant will review the document later, assign the appropriate expense account and subaccount to each line, and release the document. ## Reclassification of expenses An authorised accountant can reclassify expenses for documents pending reclassification using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. The accountant selects each document with the **Pre-released** status, reviews it, and assigns a specific expense account and subaccount to each document line, according to the expense classification used in your organisation. For a document with the **Pre-released** status, only the branch, expense account, and expense subaccount may be changed. ## Visibility of the pre-released documents The **pre-released** invoices appear on supplier ledger reports and inquiries as **Pre-released** documents. You can also view them in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. ## Rules for voiding the pre-released documents To void an invoice with a **Pre-released** status, make sure that it has not received any payments. If a payment has been made for a pre-released invoice you want to void, you must first void the payment and then void the invoice. Process payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About supplier ledger payment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-supplier-ledger-payment-processing page Supplier ledger payments are a type of internal payment document designed for settling invoices incurred through purchases from suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier ledger payment processing Supplier ledger payments are a type of internal payment document designed for settling invoices incurred through purchases from suppliers. ## Introduction ## Manual creation of supplier ledger payments You create a supplier ledger payment using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. First, choose the date, supplier, location, and how you want to pay them. On the **Details** tab, you can do two things: + You can add the invoices to pay and make changes. + You can let the system find all the invoices you owe automatically, including any money you need to pay back from returns, and then pick which ones you want to pay. The **Unapplied balance** field shows how much money you still owe. You cannot complete the payment until this balance reaches zero. If your bank adds extra charges to your payment, like interest fees, you can set those up on the **Finance charges** tab. ## Automatic creation of supplier ledger payments Initiate automatic invoice payments in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window using schedules. See [About the scheduler](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-scheduler/) and [Create a new schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule/). Select invoices for payment by date, cash account, method, supplier, and discount availability. Payments will be created for selected invoices, grouped by supplier. However, sometimes you might want to pay certain invoices separately. If you set the **Pay separately** option for a supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, each invoice or credit adjustment will have a separate payment. For specific invoices, you may need to select **Pay separately** for individual payments. If **Pay separately** is selected for a supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, each invoice or credit adjustment will get its own separate payment. ## Supplier ledger payment statuses Each supplier ledger payment has one of the following statuses, which tells you its stage in processing:
Status Description
On hold Typically used for drafts. This is the default status for new documents if the Hold documents on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. Payments with this status cannot have applied invoices or adjustments, and cannot be taken off hold if the payment method requires printing and has not been printed.
Printed Once editing is completed and the payment, if required, has been printed, the status of the supplier ledger payment will change to Printed. You can release a document in this status.
Closed The document has been released.
## Release of supplier ledger payments You can release supplier ledger payments that do not need to be printed whenever you want, regardless of when you plan to make the actual payment. When you release a payment, it generates a batch of transactions that decreases both the cash account and the supplier's ledger account balances. If you release the payment before the cash discount deadline, you can take advantage of a discount, which reduces the amount you need to pay. ## Voiding payments In the workspace, you have the option to void a supplier ledger payment that was previously released. When you void a payment, it effectively reverses all the transactions associated with that payment and undoes any entries made in the workspace. The voided payment for a supplier ledger payment contains the same summary and details as the original payment but with negative amounts, essentially cancelling out the previous transaction.
About credit adjustment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-credit-adjustment-processing page You use a supplier ledger credit adjustment to correct errors on an existing invoice or to account for a supplier's debit note. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit adjustment processing You use a supplier ledger credit adjustment to correct errors on an existing invoice or to account for a supplier's debit note. You use a supplier ledger credit adjustment to correct errors on an existing invoice or to account for a supplier's debit note. To enter a credit adjustment, use the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. ## Data entry in credit adjustments + A credit adjustment summary contains information about the supplier, their location, and the transaction currency. Each credit adjustment must have at least one line, which can be a summary line or any number of detail lines. + For auditing purposes, you can attach an electronic version or scanned image of the original supplier document to each adjustment. Additionally, you can attach a related document to each line of the document. + Upon initial save, a credit adjustment receives a unique identifier, allowing for easy tracking within the system. This identifier is generated based on the number series designated for credit adjustments in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > A credit adjustment doesn't directly mention the invoice it is connected to. However, you can add a reference to the initial document (like an invoice or prepayment) in the adjustment's description. You can also include a reference to the supplier's related document in the **Supplier reference** field. > > If you have not chosen the **Raise error on invoice number duplicates** option in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, you can use the same reference number from the original supplier document for both the invoice and the linked credit adjustment. This simplifies finding both documents because they share the same reference number. ## Credit adjustment statuses Each adjustment has one of the following statuses, which tells you its stage in processing: On hold : Generally, this status is used for an adjustment that is a draft. This is the default status for new documents if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. You can edit a credit adjustment with the **On hold** status. Balanced : After editing is completed, you can save a **Balanced** adjustment if it remains balanced. If the **Validate document totals on entry** option is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, you can take an adjustment off hold only if you correctly type the document control total. Open : The document has been released (and approved, if required). Closed : The document has been paid. ## Release credit adjustments + To release credit adjustments in bulk, use the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. To release them individually, use the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. + A cash discount can be applied to a credit adjustment based on the payment terms. + A batch created upon release of the adjustment is numbered in accordance with the number series assigned to the batches originating in Customer ledger. ## Approval for payment + If your system does not require approval for invoices and adjustments, all credit adjustments and invoices that have been released will appear with an **Open** status in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. This means you can proceed to pay them. The system will also automatically set a default payment date. It calculates this date by subtracting the payment lead days from the due date of the invoice or adjustment. + When documents require approval before payment, you will initially encounter credit adjustments in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window for approval. Once these adjustments are approved, they will then show up in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window, where you can pay them. ## Error correction + Once released, a credit adjustment cannot be edited or deleted; you only can reverse it. + If you reverse the adjustment, the system generates a purchase credit note with the same details. + Before obtaining the purchase credit note, enter a different **Supplier reference** value if the **Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number** option is enabled in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. ## Payment of credit adjustments + You can pay adjustments individually by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. + You can also pay adjustments in bulk in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. Notifications in processing of payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/notifications-in-processing-of-payments page In the process of handling outgoing payments ( Process payments (AP50301S) ), sending of payment requests to AutoPay sometimes fails. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Notifications in processing of payments In the process of handling outgoing payments ( Process payments (AP50301S) ), sending of payment requests to AutoPay sometimes fails. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). ## General on notifications Additionally, if you are scheduling payments, there might be deviations within the schedules, preventing their execution. To help you address these concerns promptly, you can utilise the notification system. This system sends an email when payment requests fail or when there are discrepancies in scheduled payments. + Only users with the **Payment processor** role can receive notifications. + Users will receive notifications based on their branch. If the user is restricted to one branch, the user will only get notifications from that branch. + Notifications are sent either daily at a specific time or weekly at a specific day and time. ## Receive notification emails To receive email notifications: + Ensure that you have at least one system email account set up in the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window. + Designate at least one email account in the **Default email account** field within the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. > [!NOTE] > The sender email ID used for notifications will correspond to the one selected in the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. ## More actions - Notification settings for Process payments
Detail Description
Branch This setting is global, which means that it works for all the different notifications described below. As default you will only get notifications related to the branch you are restricted to use.
Notify the status of the payment request (instantly)

The notifications will be sent instantly as they occur.

You can choose to get notifications of failed or successful and failed payment requests.

Notify when invoice deviates

You can choose when and how often notifications will be sent.

Choose the frequency (daily or weekly), day (every day or on weekdays), time of the day and time zone.

Prepare payment of supplier documents /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/prepare-payment-of-supplier-documents page By using this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) using the payment method linked to the specific cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare payment of supplier documents By using this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) using the payment method linked to the specific cash account. You can initiate the payment of supplier documents in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. You can select supplier documents for payment by their due date, cash account, payment method, and supplier. Supplier ledger payments will be created for the selected documents, and you can group them by supplier using the **Group documents from the same supplier** option in the **Table options (...)** drop-down. If you require separate payment for a specific document, select the **Pay separately** option for this document in the table. The system will also group the supplier documents into a single payment for each supplier unless the **Pay separately** option is selected for a supplier, in which case a separate payment will be generated for each document. 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window, to the **Prepare payments** tab, to see all supplier documents that are due until the current or selected date. 1. To filter the documents in the table, click **Filters**. 1. When you have selected your filters, click **Apply filters** or undo the selections by clicking **Reset filters**. The table is populated with the documents accordant with the filtering options. 1. The documents are grouped by supplier by default. If you prefer an ungrouped view, click the **Table options (...)** button on the top right of the table and select **Individual documents**. To return to the grouped view, select **Group documents from the same supplier**. 1. By default, all documents in the table are included in the payment request. To exclude all documents in the table from the payment file to be created, deselect unlabelled **Select invoices** check box next to the **Doc. type** column. To select or deselect individual documents, use the check box in front of each document row you wish to exclude or include. 1. In the **Balance** sidebar on the right, you can see the amount to be paid from each cash account used on the selected documents as you select them, and the available balance of the cash accounts. If the amount to be paid exceeds the balance of the cash account, you will see a warning. 1. Optional: If you want to change the payment date of all selected documents, click the **Options (...)** button on the top right of the table and select **Change payment date**. Select a new payment date for the documents. To change the payment date of only one document, move the cursor to the **Payment date** column of the document row and select a new date in the calendar. 1. When you have done all the selections, click **Confirm payout**. 1. In the dialog box that opens, you are asked to confirm the creation of the payment file. 1. Once the payment file has been confirmed, click **Open AutoPay** to open the AutoPay window and approve the applicable payments. 1. To follow up the progress of the payment process, go to the ****Payment status**** tab. Process payments with deviations /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-payments-with-deviations page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments with deviations 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. 1. To view only the deviating payments in the table, click the **View** link in the warning " **You have n deviations that need your attention** " on the top of the window, or click the **Filters** button and activate option **View only deviations**. 1. Each row displays an error message that explains the reason for the document payment failure. If no error message column is present, hover over the red exclamation mark on the left side of the row to view the error message. 1. Click the error message and fix the issue in the pop-up window that opens. 1. Click **Save and close** in the pop-up window. 1. Refresh the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window to verify that all issues have been resolved. 1. When everything is corrected, click **Confirm payout** to confirm the corrected payments. Fix a payment request with an error /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/fix-a-payment-request-with-an-error page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fix a payment request with an error 1. To view the details of a payment request, click the arrow in the **Details** column at the end of the row on the ****Payment status**** tab in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window for the failed request. This will open a window displaying all the payments included in the selected request. 1. Examine the error message to determine what information can be used to resolve the issue. 1. If necessary, use the search bar to locate the invoice with the error. You can search partially in all searchable fields. However, note that the bank account is encrypted, so you must copy the entire bank account number from the error message. 1. Click the invoice with the error to open it in a pop-up window. 1. Fix the error. 1. Save and close the pop up. 1. Click **Resend and close**. 1. Refresh the ****Payment status**** tab window. 1. The new request will appear in the request listing with the status **In progress**. If the error message indicates that the issue cannot be resolved and all invoices have returned to the **Prepare payments** tab, you can view the request details and click the **Archive and close** button to close the request. Remove failed payments or payment batches /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/remove-failed-payments-or-payment-batches page You can remove payments or payment batches that have failed to be sent to AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Remove failed payments or payment batches You can remove payments or payment batches that have failed to be sent to AutoPay. 1. In the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window on the **Payment status** tab, click the **Details** arrow icon next to the failed request you want modify. The **Details** view opens with a message on failed files on the top of the window with the reason of the failure. 1. To remove the entire batch, activate the check box next to the **Batch number** column. 1. To remove only selected payments, activate the check box in the beginning of their line. 1. Click the **Remove** button at the bottom right corner of the window. You see the number of the payments to be removed in the button. 1. Confirm the removal in the dialogue that opens. 1. To resend the remaining payments, click **Resend and close**. The number and amount of payments that are available for sending appear on the top part of the window. 1. When there are no remaining payments to send, click **Archive and close**. Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is zero /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-automatically-invoices-and-credit-notes-where-amount-to-pay-is-zero page The Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to release payments when the credit note + invoice amount = 0. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is zero The Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to release payments when the credit note + invoice amount = 0. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). For the payment request to be created when this happens, you need to take this into account: 1. Enable the option **Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is 0** in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Include only one credit note and one or more invoices in the document grouping and ensure that all documents use the same cash account, currency, and payment method. 1. Make sure that the grouping contains only credit notes with a payment date and/or document date in the past + invoices with a payment date in the future, provided that the payment date of the invoice is changed to the current date in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. Otherwise, a deviation will be displayed: "Invoice payment date is in the future. Please adjust the pay date to the current date in order to match the invoice with the credit note" Update payment document with document preview /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/update-payment-document-with-document-preview page You can make simultaneous updates to specific fields on the documents while viewing the scanned copy of the original document using the overlay edit panel with document preview in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update payment document with document preview You can make simultaneous updates to specific fields on the documents while viewing the scanned copy of the original document using the overlay edit panel with document preview in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). ## Overlay edit panel To access the overlay edit panel, click the link in the **Purchase invoice** field corresponding to the document you wish to edit or preview. You must have the **Payment processor** role to edit the details, or the **Payment viewer** role to view the details. You can update the following fields (the same as in the table): + Cash account + Account used for payment + Payment date + Amount to pay + Priority + Pay separately + Cash discount taken Editable fields are saved automatically. You can edit these fields even if there is no invoice document attached. + When a field contains a deviation, you will see a message that highlights the deviation, and a tooltip appears. For instance, if the deviation is due to a missing bank account, you can click on the message to open the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window and add a bank account. + If the invoice payment date falls within an ungenerated or inactive financial period, a deviation message will appear, providing a link to the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. + The fields **Account used for payment**, **Supplier name**, and **Supplier no** are linked to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, which opens as a pop-up. After saving your changes and closing the pop-up, refresh the window to see the updates. This also applies to the **Ref. no** and **Purchase invoice** fields, which open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window as a pop-up. ## Document preview To navigate between documents, use the **Preview documents** arrow buttons located at the bottom left of the overlay edit panel. You have several options for working with documents in the interface: + You can view, zoom in or out, download, and print documents. + You can also flip through document pages and copy text. + To switch between different documents, use the Preview Documents arrow buttons found at the bottom left of the overlay edit panel. Edit a supplier during payment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/edit-a-supplier-during-payment-processing page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit a supplier during payment processing 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. 1. In the table, click the supplier (link) you want to edit. 1. The [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window is opened as a pop-up. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click **Save and close**.

Related pages

Concepts

About the Payment status tab /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-payment-status-tab page The Payment status tab in the Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to view the progress and status of payment requests sent to AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the Payment status tab The Payment status tab in the Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to view the progress and status of payment requests sent to AutoPay. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). Use this tab to filter requests by date and status, and to fix and resend failed requests. + The **Payment status** tab displays the results of all requests, regardless of whether they are initiated manually by the user through the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window or automatically by the scheduler. + In most cases, payment requests are successfully submitted to AutoPay without any problems. However, there are some cases where requests may be rejected, for example, if an incorrect bank account is provided. Occasional technical errors can also prevent requests from being successfully submitted to AutoPay. + If sending a payment batch fails, you will see a red exclamation mark next to the tab name. Click on the **Details** arrow next to the failed batch you want to change. The **Details** view opens. You see a message telling the reason of failing. See [Remove failed payments or payments batches](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/remove-failed-payments-or-payment-batches/). + You can see how many documents are included in the payment request and also track the number of payments created. ## Statuses Requests are registered in the ****Payment status**** tab with one of the following statuses:
Status Request
In progress Requests in processing.
Failed All requests failed to be sent to AutoPay.
Error Payment request containing incomplete payments (release of the documents was not possible).
Sent to AutoPay At least one payment sent to AutoPay.
Partially sent to AutoPay Only for payment requests containing documents without payments or batches due to sequence number issues
Cancelled in AutoPay All payments are cancelled in AutoPay.
Sent to Bank At least one payment sent to bank.
Rejected by the Bank If the entire payment request is rejected/ all payments in the intent are rejected by the bank.
Completed in AutoPay At least one payment paid.
Archived
  • Empty payment requests
  • Scheduled requests with no invoices to send to AutoPay
  • Requests created for invoice + credit note amount = 0
## The Details view + To view the details of a request, click the arrow at the end of the row in the **Details** column. This will open a window showing all invoices associated with the selected request. + You can group payments from the same batch. + Each batch shows an **amount summary in the local currency**, providing you with a quick overview of financial information. + When you select a batch for deletion, all the payments included in that batch will be automatically deleted. + Any requests with a **Failed** status will appear at the top of the request list. These requests will come with an error message that will give you instructions on how to address and resolve the issue. You can remove failed payments here. You will see a red alert sign against all payments causing the payment requests to fail together with a tool tip message announcing the reason why AutoPay has rejected the payment + To correct an error in a claim, such as a missing bank account, first copy the invoice number. Then, using the copied number, search for the problematic invoice. Once found, correct the error and resend all invoices by creating a new request. + Click **View only incomplete transactions** to filter out transactions that have been completed and concentrate on incomplete transactions.
The Payment status tab /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/the-payment-status-tab page On the *Payment status* tab, you can view the status of each payment request after it has been submitted to AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The Payment status tab On the *Payment status* tab, you can view the status of each payment request after it has been submitted to AutoPay. This tab displays the results of all payment requests, regardless of whether they were initiated manually by the user or automatically by the scheduler. ## The filter options
Option Description
From date View the statuses of payment requests starting from this date.
To date View the statuses of payment requests until this date.
Status Select the status (or all) for the payment requests to be displayed.
## The table
Column Description
Branch The branch where the payment has been created.
Request ID The ID of the request for creating batches and payments.
Created on The date and time when the request was created.
Created by The user who has created the request.
No. of pay. The number of payments included in the request.
No. of docs The number of the documents in the request. In case of removing failed payments, the number of payments that are available for sending.
Amount The amount to be paid on the request. In case of removing failed payments, the amount of payments that are available for sending.
Payment status The status of the request. For more details on statuses, see About the Payment status tab.
Details Click Details to open a new tab with the details of each payment in the request. If there is an error message, it will tell you what to do. When you have fixed the error, resend all the invoices (and create a new request).
About the scheduler /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-scheduler page In the Process payments (AP50301S) window, you can utilise the scheduler feature to automate payment preparation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the scheduler In the Process payments (AP50301S) window, you can utilise the scheduler feature to automate payment preparation. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). By doing this, you can avoid manually creating payment requests each time you send payments to AutoPay. To open the scheduler, click **Schedule payments** at the top right of the window under **More actions**. For more information, see [Create a new schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule/). Consider the following points:
Point Description
Managing schedules You can modify your schedules at any time, with all adjustments being saved automatically. Additionally, you can remove a schedule during or after its creation.
Deviations When a schedule runs and generates a request, any invoices and documents with deviations, such as a missing bank account, will be excluded from the process.
Payment lead time

Payment lead times may vary for suppliers located in different countries. To account for this, you can set the lead time for each supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.

When an invoice is generated, the payment date will be adjusted according to the due date. This adjustment affects the Day column of a schedule when the chosen frequency is Daily.

Cash accounts and branches If your cash account has limited access to a particular branch, it will only be visible when you are logged in to that specific branch.
## Following a schedule execution After a schedule has been executed, the request will be displayed on the ****Payment status**** tab. If a schedule fails to run and does not even create a request, the failed attempt will also appear on the ****Payment status**** tab. ## The Schedule payments pop-up To create a new schedule, click **Add new schedule**. To delete a schedule, click the trash can icon on the far right of the line.
Column Description
Status The status of the schedule. Grey is inactive, green is active.
Name Type a name for the schedule.
Branch

The branch to which the schedule applies. The default is the current branch you are logged into. You can also schedule payments for all branches you have access to by selecting the All branches option.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Payment method You can use this column to restrict the documents to be included in the payment by their payment method. You can select a payment method or all payment methods. Note also the payment lead time that you define in the Suppliers (AP303000) window for each supplier.
Cash account

You can use this column to restrict the documents to be included in the request by their cash account. You can select a cash account or all cash accounts.

Note

You can use only the All cash accounts option if the All branches option is selected.

Frequency Select how often the documents will be sent to AutoPay, daily or weekly.
Day Select the day of the week on which documents will be sent to AutoPay, if the selected frequency is Weekly. If the selected option is Daily, the option you see here comes from the Payment terms (CS206500) window (see below).
Weekends To define whether payment requests will also be sent on weekends, go to the Payment terms (CS206500) window and select your preferred setting in the Move due date if on the weekend field. The options are: Keep the exact date Day before (Friday) Day after (Monday)
Payment date Select which invoices you want to include in the request you send to AutoPay. You can choose between All open documents, All open documents until current date, and All open documents until next run (current date + 6 days), depending on the selected frequency.
Time zone Select the time zone the schedule shall run in. As default, the current web browser time zone is selected.
Time Select at what time of the day the schedule will run. It is possible to run multiple schedules at the same time.
Status

Set the selector to On when you want the schedule to start running. The status of the schedule is also indicated to the very left. Grey is inactive, green is active.

Every time you make a change to the schedule, the status will be set to Off.

Create a new schedule /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule page You access the scheduler from the Process payments (AP50301S) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new schedule You access the scheduler from the Process payments (AP50301S) window. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). 1. Click **Schedule payments** under **More actions** on the top right. 1. To add a schedule, click **Add new schedule** in upper left corner. 1. In the **Name** column, enter a name for the new schedule. 1. In the **Branch** column, select a branch. The current branch is selected by default. 1. In the **Payment method** column, select a desired payment method or **All** payment methods. 1. In the **Cash account** column, you can select between a cash account or **All** cash accounts. You can select only the cash account connected to the chosen payment method. 1. Select the **frequency** of the schedule, **Daily** or **Weekly**. 1. If you select **Daily**, define in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window in the **Move due date if on the weekend** field whether weekends are included or ignored. You see the selected option in the **Day** column. 1. If you select **Weekly**, select in the **Day** column the day of the week on which the schedule will be run. 1. In the **Payment date** field, select which invoices will be included in the request you send to AutoPay. The options that are available depend on the selected option in the **Frequency** column. 1. For **Daily**, you can choose between **All open documents** and **All open documents until current date**. Also note the payment lead team, see [About the scheduler](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-scheduler/). 1. For **Weekly**, you can choose between **All open documents, All open documents until current date**, and **All open documents until next run** (current date + 6 days). 1. Select the **time zone** the schedule shall run in. As default, the current web browser time zone is selected. 1. In the **Time** column, select at what time of the day the schedule will run. 1. In the **Status** column, set the selector to **On** when you want the schedule to start running. Void a payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/void-a-payment page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a payment 1. Navigate to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Select **Payment** in the **Type** field located at the top of the window. 1. Choose the payment to be voided using one of these methods: + Select the payment by its voucher number in the **Voucher no.** field. + Use the navigation buttons in the window toolbar to find the payment you want to void. 1. Click **Void** in the window toolbar. The system fully reverses the payment application, changes the payment status to **Voided**, and creates a voided payment with the **Balanced** status. 1. Optional: Modify the date of the voided payment in the **Application date** field, if necessary. The specified date will be used as the voided payment release date ( **Payment date** ) and the related batch creation date ( **Transaction date** ). 1. Click **Release** in the window toolbar to change the status of the voided payment to **Closed**. Releasing the voided payment generates a batch. Make a non-active AutoPay agreement active /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/make-a-non-active-autopay-agreement-active section If you encounter an error message while processing a payment without an active AutoPay agreement, you have the option to activate the agreement. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make a non-active AutoPay agreement active If you encounter an error message while processing a payment without an active AutoPay agreement, you have the option to activate the agreement. Only users with the **AutoPay Administrator** role or the **AutoPay Approver** role are authorised to perform this task. 1. Close Visma Net. 1. Click AutoPay. 1. Click **Agreements**. 1. In the **Agreement - Main** window, click **Edit** for the relevant agreement. 1. In the **Agreements - Edit bank agreement** window, select the **Active** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Process one payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-one-payment section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process one payment ## Before you start To process manual payments in this window, a payment method is required. Please note that a payment method created using the **Create batch payment** option will not be visible in this window. You can also process payments without AutoPay in the [Manual payments (AP30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ap30200s/) window, see: [Process several payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-several-payments/). 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** drop-down list, select **Payment**. 1. In the **Date** field, select the date of the payment. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select a supplier. 1. In the **Payment method** field, select a payment method that you have created for manual payments. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select a cash account. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a description. This field is not mandatory, but the payment will be easier to locate if you have your own description for it. 1. Optional: In the **Payment ref.** field, enter a reference if you are prompted to and if the field is not filled in automatically. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, enter the paid amount. 1. In the **Financial period** field, select a financial period. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Document type** column, add the document type related to this payment. 1. Select **Voucher no.**. 1. Optional: If you need to add more documents to this payment, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat steps 10 - 12. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. Both the payment and the purchase invoice are now in status **Closed**. You can find the batch number and other information on the **Application history** tab. ## What is next? You do not have to do the other steps in this work process once you have followed these instructions and the payment has been released. The reason for this is that in Visma Net, the [default setting for the supplier ledger is a combined post and release action](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/activate-automatic-post-and-release-for-purchase-documents/). This means that when you release the payment, both the payment and the purchase invoice will be posted and closed in the general ledger. However, if the default settings for post and release have been changed (the **Do not automatically release supplier payments** check box is selected), you must post the payment transactions to the general ledger: [Update the general ledger with manual payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/post-documents-to-the-general-ledger-manually/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process several payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-several-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process several payments ## Before you start To handle manual payments, you need a payment method, see: [Create payment methods](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/create-payment-methods/). However, if you create a payment method with the option **Create batch payment**, it will not be displayed in this window. You can also process manual payments via the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window: [Process one payment.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-one-payment/) 1. Go to the [Manual payments (AP30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ap30200s/) window. 1. In the **Payment method** field, select a payment method. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select a cash account. 1. The default in the **Due date** field is today's date, but you can select a preferred due date. The system filters away the invoices after the selected date. 1. In the **Payment date** field, enter a payment date. 1. In the table you see invoices that are ready to be paid and you can select the invoices you want to process. 1. Click **Create payments**. if the processing is successful. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed If you need to change the date or the cash account to continue with other manual payments, click ![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) and repeat these steps. Create batch payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-batch-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create batch payments 1. Go to the [Create batch payments (AP505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000/) window. 1. Select **Payment method** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select a payment method. 1. Select **Cash account** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). In the **Next payment ref.** field, the system will automatically suggest the next available payment number. 1. In the table, select the check boxes next to the payments that you want to create a batch of. 1. Click **Process** to process the selected payments, or click **Process all** to process all the payments in the table. ## What is next? If you use advanced payment processing for AutoPay, you are now sent to the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window: [Send outgoing payments to AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Create a supplier ledger payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-supplier-ledger-payment section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier ledger payment 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Payment**. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date of the payment. The system fills in the **Application period** field automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. In the **Location** field, change the supplier location, if necessary. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need. You may override the default currency only if the **Enable currency override** check box is selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Payment method** field, make sure the payment method is specified correctly and select another if needed. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, type the payment reference number if required by your organisation's policy. The system automatically inserts a reference number here if for the payment method associated with the supplier, the **Supplier ledger - suggest next number** check box is in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window (the **Payment methods** tab). 1. Optional: Add a description of the check. 1. In the table toolbar of the **Documents to apply** tab, click **Load documents**. The open invoices and adjustments will be displayed on this tab. Open debit adjustments, if any, will be listed at the top. Remove any unnecessary items from the list as needed. 1. In the table toolbar of the **Documents to apply** tab, click **Load documents**. Open debit adjustments, if any, will be listed at the top. Remove any unnecessary items from the list as needed. 1. In the **Payment amount** field of the top part of the window, type the total amount, which should be equal to the application amount. 1. On the **Remittance information** tab, make sure the remittance contact and address information is correct. By default, the branch information is displayed. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the applicable charges or fees for processing this payment in the bank. For each applicable charge, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type which designates the bank charge applicable to this payment. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount applicable to this payment. 1. Prepare the payment for further processing in accordance with your organisation policies: + Leave the document with the **On hold** status if you plan to update or add information. For this, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To enable further processing, clear the **Hold** check box. If the selected payment method requires printing of a check, you cannot take a document off hold until it is printed. To print a payment, click **Actions**, and select **Print payment**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Export batch payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/export-batch-payments section Only users with the Financials Admin role can export batch payments from this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export batch payments Only users with the Financials Admin role can export batch payments from this window. 1. Go to the [Export batch payments (AP50560S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/export-batch-payments-ap50560s/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select your desired cash account. 1. Optional: In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select your desired batch number. 1. In the table, select the batches you want to export. 1. Click **Export payment** to export the selected batches. ## What is next? If you are using the advanced payment processing for AutoPay, you are now taken to AutoPay: [Approve payments in AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay/)

Related pages

Windows

Create outgoing payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-outgoing-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create outgoing payments ## Before you start You can [create a purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-invoice-in-the-general-ledger/) in the General ledger workspace, and pay it via AutoPay as follows: 1. Go to the [Create batch payments (AP505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000/) window. 1. In the **Payment method** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and choose a payment method. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and choose a cash account. 1. In the table, select the check box next to the payment you want to create. You can also select several payments to create a batch. 1. Click **Process**. ## What is next? The [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window is now displayed, and you can [send outgoing payments to AutoPay.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay/) This is available, if **Use basic payment process** is **not** checked in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window for the current branch. Match a credit note before payment with AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/match-a-credit-note-before-payment-with-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match a credit note before payment with AutoPay 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** drop-down list, select **Purchase credit note**. 1. In the **Voucher no.** field, choose the purchase credit note to match with a purchase invoice. Ensure the selected adjustment has the **Open** status. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add the purchase invoice related to this purchase credit note. In the **Reference no.** column, add an open invoice to your purchase credit note. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, check if the payment amount is lower or higher than the purchase invoice amount: 1. If it is lower, it is still an amount left to pay on the invoice. 1. If it is higher, you can use that amount to match another invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. The purchase credit note is now closed and if there is still a balance on the purchase invoice, you can now pay it. ## What is next? You do not have to do the other steps in this work process once you have followed these instructions and the payment has been released. The reason for this is that in Visma Net, the [default setting for the supplier ledger is a combined post and release action](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/activate-automatic-post-and-release-for-purchase-documents/). This means that when you release the payment, both the payment and the purchase invoice will be posted and closed in the general ledger. However, if the default settings for post and release have been changed (the **Do not automatically release supplier payments** check box is selected), you must post the payment transactions to the general ledger: [Update the general ledger with manual payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/post-documents-to-the-general-ledger-manually/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Approve payments in AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve payments in AutoPay 1. Go to the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window. 1. Click **Approve** **in AutoPay** for the relevant payment. 1. In the **Payment details** window, check your payment. 1. Click **Approve**. 1. Enter your password. This is the same password you use to log in to Visma Net. 1. Click **OK**. In the **Approve** window, click **OK** to close the window. On the **Outgoing** tab, the batch status changes to **Approved** in the **Status** column.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Send outgoing payments to AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send outgoing payments to AutoPay 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. 1. In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), and select the batch you want to send to AutoPay. 1. If the **AutoPay status** of the selected batch is **Not exported**, click the **Send payments** button. 1. Click **Approve in AutoPay**. Keep in mind that the AutoPay status in the upper part of the window shows the status of the whole batch, while the AutoPay status column in the table shows the status of individual payments. ## What is next? You will be redirected out of Visma Net to AutoPay that is displayed in a pop-up window, see: [Approve payments in AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Send outgoing refunds to AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-refunds-to-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send outgoing refunds to AutoPay ## Before you start ## Statuses in the Batch payments window + The refunds will be displayed in the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window with the status **In progress** and **AutoPay status**: **Not exported**. + The **AutoPay status** field in the top part of the window shows the status of the whole batch. + The **AutoPay status** column in the table shows the status of each refund. + After you click the **Re-sign payment** button, the **AutoPay status** of every refund will change to **Exported**. + As long as a refund has a status other than **Paid**, it will be visible in the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window. 1. Go to the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window. 1. In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), and select the batch you want to send to AutoPay. 1. If the **AutoPay status** of the selected batch is **Not exported**, click the **Send payments** button. The status changes to **Exported**. 1. Click **Approve in AutoPay**. AutoPay is displayed in a pop-up window. For further steps, see step 3-5 in [The basic outgoing payment process for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-outgoing-payment-process-for-autopay/). Process prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process prepayments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About prepayment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/about-prepayment-processing page A prepayment is a type of supplier ledger document that you create to record advance payments or down payments to suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About prepayment processing A prepayment is a type of supplier ledger document that you create to record advance payments or down payments to suppliers. ## Introduction You can create a prepayment in one of the following methods: Standard method : Begin by entering the supplier's prepayment request in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window as an internal supplier ledger document of the **Prepayment** type. Next, create a payment for this prepayment request in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Once the payment is released, you can apply the prepayment against invoices. Simplified method : Create and release a prepayment directly using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Note that this method has some limitations. ## Creating prepayments in the standard way The standard method of creating prepayments involves the following stages: 1. In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, create a supplier prepayment request by selecting the **Prepayment** document type. If the prepayment is for stock items, include this information in the description. Upon saving the prepayment, the system assigns a reference number based on the number series for invoices in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. A prepayment can have one summary line or multiple detail lines. VAT cannot be applied or withheld on prepayments, but VAT amounts can be added to the prepayment amount for simpler calculations. 1. You can release the prepayment requests one by one by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, or along with other supplier ledger documents by using the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. A prepayment request, when released, does not generate any transactions. 1. If approval is required in your system, the prepayment request must be approved in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window before it can be actually paid. 1. Pay the prepayment by creating an supplier ledger payment in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Cash discounts do not apply to prepayments. 1. Release the supplier ledger payment. The system changes its status to **Closed** and changes the status of the original prepayment to **Open**, so that you can apply this prepayment to invoices and credit adjustments. ## Creating prepayments in the simplified way Alternatively, you can create a prepayment more simply, by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Even if approval of documents is required in your system, prepayments created in this way are not subject to approval. Also, you cannot pay prepayments created in this way by a payment method that requires printing of payments. ## Choosing general ledger accounts for prepayments If you do not designate a distinct account for prepayments, supplier prepayments will be debited to the supplier's ledger account. When determining the number and type of prepayment accounts to use for easier tracking in the system, you can choose one or any combination of the following options: + Use a single prepayment account for all prepayments (to all suppliers) + Specify prepayment accounts for specific supplier classes + Designate separate prepayment accounts for individual suppliers Assign the prepayment accounts as follows: 1. In the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window, specify the prepayment account and subaccount for the default supplier class and for each of the other supplier classes. This will make it easy to create new supplier classes and new suppliers with the proper prepayment account specified. 1. Use the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window to specify the prepayment account and subaccount for each supplier. ## Applying the prepayments You can apply the **Open** prepayment to invoices and adjustments. If a prepayment still has a balance after being applied to invoices and credit adjustments, it can be released with that balance. If a prepayment was incorrectly applied to invoices and adjustments and released, you can reverse the application if needed. To do this, click the **Reverse application** action on the **Application history** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You can then apply the prepayment to other invoices and adjustments. ## Viewing prepayments and their balances To view information about prepayments, you use the following windows: + [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/): Shows prepayment balances. + [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/): Displays the prepayment balance and particular prepayments by supplier. + [Balance by GL account (AP63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s/): Shows all prepayments collected on the prepayment account. ## Correcting errors Correcting errors on prepayments depends on how you entered them. To void a **prepayment created in the standard way**, you have the following options: + If the prepayment has not been paid, void it by clicking **Void** in the window toolbar of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window for the selected prepayment. + If errors are detected for a paid prepayment, create an adjustment instead of voiding the prepayment. + If the prepayment has been paid, you void the associated supplier ledger payment. To void a **prepayment created using the simplified method**: + First locate the prepayment in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Then, click **Void** on the window toolbar. + If the prepayment has already been applied, you must first unapply it before voiding. + If a supplier did not use the prepayment or used it only partially, you can enter a refund and apply it against the prepayment.

Related pages

Tasks

Enter a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/enter-a-prepayment section In Visma Net, you can enter prepayments to suppliers in one of the following ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a prepayment In Visma Net, you can enter prepayments to suppliers in one of the following ways: ## Introduction Standard way : To enter the supplier's prepayment request, use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window and create an internal supplier ledger document of the **Prepayment** type. Next, create a payment for this prepayment request in the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. Simplified method : Create a prepayment directly using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. Note that this method has some limitations. ## Enter a prepayment in the standard way 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. Check the date of the document, and change it if necessary. The system populates the **Post period** field automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. 1. In the **Location** field, change the supplier location, if necessary. 1. Ensure the document's currency is accurate. If not, choose an appropriate currency. You can only override the currency if the **Enable currency override** check box is selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the reference number or ID assigned to the document by the supplier. This number is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Optional: Add a description of the prepayment request. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the prepayment request, following the steps below for each line (transaction): The prepayment request should include at least one line. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the ID of the particular non-stock item or service to be delivered by the supplier; you can instead leave it blank. 1. Optional: Type the description of the transaction in the **Transaction descr.** field. 1. Optional: Enter the needed quantity of the item. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, type the unit of measure for the item. 1. Optional: In the **Unit cost** column, type the cost per unit. 1. Type the total amount in the **Amount** column. 1. Make sure that the **Account** column has the account you want to be specified. By default, the system uses the expense account associated with the supplier location. 1. Make sure that the **Subaccount** column has the subaccount you want to be specified. By default, the system fills in the **Subaccount** column in accordance with the rule selected in the **Combine expense sub. from** field of the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Make sure that the **Branch** column has the branch you want to be specified. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select the deferral code defined in the system if the expenses related to the purchased item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Do one of the following steps to prepare the document for releasing: + If the **Amount** field in the top part is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the prepayment in the **Balance** field is correct. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment request, following your company's workflow. 1. Pay the prepayment request in full with a supplier ledger payment. Create a supplier ledger payment and apply it to the prepayment request. Upon releasing the supplier ledger payment for the prepayment, the payment status changes to **Closed**. Additionally, a **Prepayment** type payment is created, using the reference number from the original prepayment request. ## Enter a prepayment in the simplified way 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. Check the date of the document, and change it if necessary. The system populates the **Post period** field automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. Select the supplier. 1. In the **Location** field, change the supplier location, if necessary. 1. Ensure the document's currency is accurate. If not, choose an appropriate currency. You can only override the currency if the **Allow currency override** option is enabled for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the reference number or ID provided by the supplier for the document. This number is mandatory if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Optional: Add a description of the prepayment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, specify the total amount of the prepayment. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment, following your company's workflow. Void a prepayment request /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/void-a-prepayment-request section Entering a prepayment involves two stages. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a prepayment request Entering a prepayment involves two stages. ## Introduction First, input the supplier's prepayment request using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Next, create an invoice to pay for this prepayment request using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. The prepayment will then be released. In certain situations, you may need to void an unpaid prepayment request, such as when it was mistakenly entered into the system. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the prepayment to be voided. 1. Click **Actions** in the window toolbar, and select **Void prepayment**. The status of the prepayment changes to **Voided**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). When you void a prepayment request, because no actual prepayment had been made, no batch is created and the voided prepayment may not be applied to a supplier ledger payment. Void a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/void-a-prepayment section You can void a prepayment if it has not been paid or applied to invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a prepayment You can void a prepayment if it has not been paid or applied to invoices. ## Introduction You can void a prepayment if it has not been paid or applied to invoices. To cancel an applied prepayment, you first need to unapply the prepayment, as described in [Unapply a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/unapply-a-prepayment/). ## Void a prepayment paid with a payment Upon creating a prepayment request and paying it using a supplier ledger payment, the system automatically generates a prepayment. If you try to void this prepayment, you get a notification advising you to void the supplier ledger payment used to create the prepayment. 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Payment**. 1. In the **Voucher no.** field, select the supplier ledger payment to be voided. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system changes the status of the original supplier ledger payment to **Voided** and creates a voided payment with the same reference number as the prepayment used. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Release the document following your company workflow. ## Void a prepayment 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. In the **Voucher no.** field, select the supplier ledger payment to be voided. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system changes the status of the prepayment to **Voided** and creates a voided check with the same reference number as the prepayment used. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Release the prepayment following your company workflow.

Related pages

Tasks

Enter a refund for a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/enter-a-refund-for-a-prepayment section When a supplier returns an unused prepayment or a part of it, you must record a refund for that prepayment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a refund for a prepayment When a supplier returns an unused prepayment or a part of it, you must record a refund for that prepayment. 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Supplier refund**. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date when the supplier refund was applied. The **Application period** field is filled out automatically based on the selected application date. 1. Select the supplier. 1. In the **Location** field, check the supplier location and change it if necessary. 1. In the **Cash account** field, check the default cash account of the supplier. You can change the value, but the currency of the account should be the same as the **currency** specified. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the reference number of the supplier refund. 1. Optional: Add a description of the supplier refund document. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, enter the prepayment or prepayments on which the supplier refund is based. Do the following: + To add a document to the list: 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Document type** column, select the document type. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document from the list of applicable documents. 1. Check that all the other columns of the **Documents to apply** tab are correct. + To add all applicable documents to the list, click **Load documents** on the table toolbar. + To remove a document from the list, select the document and click **Delete row** in the table toolbar. 1. Prepare the document for further processing in accordance with the policies of your company: + To save the supplier refund with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the supplier refund with the **Balanced** status, do the following: + In the **Payment amount** field of the top part, enter the total amount of the purchase credit note applied to the document. + Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the document following your company workflow. The supplier refund now has the **Closed** status. > [!NOTE] > If you recorded the prepayment using the standard method, you can verify the refund application by opening the prepayment request in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

Track prepayments to suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/track-prepayments-to-suppliers page To track prepayments, you use a special account, the prepayment account, to record prepayments to suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track prepayments to suppliers To track prepayments, you use a special account, the prepayment account, to record prepayments to suppliers. ## Introduction + If you want to set a default prepayment account to be used for each new supplier a user creates, in the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window, specify the prepayment account and subaccount for each of the supplier classes that might be used when a user creates a new supplier. + You can change the prepayment account and subaccount for a particular supplier by using the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. The system debits this account by default when a user enters a new prepayment to the supplier. To view information about prepayments, you use the following windows: + [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/): Shows prepayment balances + [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/): Displays prepayments from an individual supplier + [Balance by GL account (AP63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s/): Shows all prepayments collected on the prepayment account ## View prepayment balances 1. Go to the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Period** field, select the financial period, or leave the field blank to view all open prepayments. 1. In the **Supplier account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of suppliers with the prepayment balances calculated for the selected criteria. The **Total prepayments** field in the top part displays the total amount of prepayments to suppliers calculated for the selected criteria. You can adjust the list by changing the selection criteria. ## View prepayments by supplier 1. Go to the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. 1. In the **Supplier account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of prepayments that match the selected criteria. The **Prepayments balance** field of the top part displays the total amount of prepayments to the supplier, based on the selected criteria. ## View all prepayments 1. Go to the [Balance by GL account (AP63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s/). 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, specify the report parameters that meet your needs for information. If you leave the **Branch** field blank, you will get information on all branches. 1. On the window toolbar, click **Run report**. 1. Find the prepayment account in the report to view all prepayments that fit the specified criteria. Additionally, you can use filtering to display only specific documents in the report. For example: After you set the report parameters and before you run the report, you could add one of the following filter condition lines to the **Additional filtering conditions** table on the **Additional sort and filters** tab: + To view only documents collected on a prepayment account with account ID 140000: |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |Account.AccountCD|Equals|140000| + To view only prepayments: |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |Document.Type|Equals|Prepayment|

Related pages

Tasks

Apply a prepayment to invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/apply-a-prepayment-to-invoices section To apply a prepayment (created using the standard or simplified method) to one or multiple invoices, use the Supplier payments (AP302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply a prepayment to invoices To apply a prepayment (created using the standard or simplified method) to one or multiple invoices, use the Supplier payments (AP302000) window. For more information: [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/). Once the prepayment application is released, it generates a batch. 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. By using the **Voucher no.** field, select the prepayment you want to apply. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, select the documents to which you want to apply the prepayment. Do the following: + To add a document to the list: 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Document type** column, select the document type. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document from the list of applicable documents. 1. Check that all the other columns of the **Documents to apply** tab are correct. + To add all applicable documents to the list, click **Load documents** on the table toolbar. + To remove a document from the list, select the document and click **Delete row** in the table toolbar. 1. For each document, check the applied amount in the **Amount paid** field and change the amount if needed. 1. Prepare the prepayment for further processing in accordance with the policies of your company: + To save the prepayment application with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the prepayment application with the **Open** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment, following your company's workflow.

Related pages

Tasks

Unapply a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/unapply-a-prepayment section If you have mistakenly applied a prepayment to the incorrect documents (invoices or credit adjustments), you can unapply it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unapply a prepayment If you have mistakenly applied a prepayment to the incorrect documents (invoices or credit adjustments), you can unapply it. ## Introduction Unapplying a prepayment varies depending on whether the prepayment has been released (and has a status of **Open** or **Closed**) or has not been released (and has a status of **Balanced** or **On hold**). ## Correct a prepayment application that has not been released 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. By using the **Voucher no.** field, select the prepayment. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, for each document you do not want to apply, do the following: 1. Select the document you do not want to apply. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Delete row**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Reverse a prepayment application that has been released 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. By using the **Voucher no.** field, select the prepayment. 1. Go to the **Application history** tab, choose the document you want to reverse the application for, and click **Reverse application** in the table toolbar. The system will generate a batch that undoes the payment application to an invoice or credit adjustment, and sets the prepayment status to **Open**. 1. Repeat Step 4 for each application you want to reverse. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment following your company's workflow. Invoice inbox /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice inbox Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. View invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoices ## Before you start The [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) displays invoices with the statuses **New**, **Blocked**, or **Error** from AutoInvoice. A separate status box shows you the number of invoices with these statuses. If you want to see all invoices, regardless of status, click the **Inquiries** button and select Invoice inbox - overview. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. The framed status box shows the number of invoices you have received from AutoInvoice, which have the status **New, Blocked,** or **Error**. 1. In the **Inbox status** drop-down list, the default status is **New**. Select the document status you want to see invoices for. 1. To filter by a specific supplier or invoice date, enter the desired information in the **Supplier** field or the **Invoice date** field. You can use both fields together for a more refined search. The filtered results will be instantly shown in the table. 1. To see details for a specific invoice, select the line in the table and click **View details**. The **Invoice details** window is displayed. For more information, see [View invoice details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details/). ## What is next? [Process new invoices from AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/process-new-invoices-from-autoinvoice/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

View invoice details /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details section This window is displayed when you have selected an invoice in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) window and clicked the View details button. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoice details This window is displayed when you have selected an invoice in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) window and clicked the View details button. For more information: [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). + The bottom section shows the invoice lines. Click the **Hide lines** button to hide or display the lines. By default, the lines are visible. Hiding the lines allows you to view more of the PDF invoice. + On the right side, the **Document details** panel is visible. This panel shows information about the invoice, including the different amounts. + In the **Approval - information and process area**, the **Action** drop-down list offers the following options: **Hold**, **Release**, **Exclude from processing**, and **Send to approval**. If you have a license for Approval, the default action is **Send to approval**; otherwise, the default is **Release**. For instance, you can hold the invoice to verify something and add a comment in the **Comment** field until the issue is resolved. + In the **Initial approver** drop-down list, you can select your preferred initial approver. + You can create an invoice from this location by clicking the **Create invoice** button. This will open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. This feature is helpful when splitting an invoice to post amounts on different subaccounts or when invoice lines require approval from multiple approvers. To view the original document details, such as VAT information, click the **Inbox details** tab in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. + Remember to click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) to save any changes made in the **Invoice details** window or any related windows before clicking **Back** to close the window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Correct invoices with errors /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/correct-invoices-with-errors section If the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) displays invoices with the Error status, it may be due to discrepancies in the amounts, such as rounding errors. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct invoices with errors If the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) displays invoices with the Error status, it may be due to discrepancies in the amounts, such as rounding errors. For more information: [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/). These errors are common when dealing with scanned invoices and usually result in minor differences. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. Select **Error** in the **Inbox status** field. This will display invoices with errors in the table. 1. To correct an invoice with a reference number and a minor error, such as a rounding difference, select the line and click the **Validate manually** button. This will change the invoice's status from **Error** to **Manually validated**. You can then manage it like other invoices in the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). 1. To make corrections to the invoice before validating it, click on the invoice's reference number. This will open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Make your changes and click **Release**. -- or --- click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) and then **Send to approval**.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process new invoices from AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/process-new-invoices-from-autoinvoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process new invoices from AutoInvoice ## Before you start You can set a default action for the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/). For more information, see [Change the default action for the Invoice inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/change-the-default-action-for-the-invoice-inbox/). 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, the default status is **New** and you see all invoices that have come in from AutoInvoice. If you have just worked on invoices with other statuses, select **New**. 1. If you want to process all the new invoices in the inbox, click **Process all**. -- or -- If you want to process selected invoices, select the check boxes for the invoices you want to process, and click **Process**. 1. The invoices are processed according to the action defined in the **Action** column. After processing, you see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) and your invoices are assigned a reference number. To see all invoices, regardless of status, click the **Inquiries** button and select **Invoice inbox - overview.** > [!NOTE] > **Conversion of attachments**: To be able to send invoices on flow, Visma Net converts all attachments to the PNG file format. If the attachment is not an image file, (for example a PDF, Word, Excel, or.txt file) the original document will be attached.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Update supplier details /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/update-supplier-details section Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update supplier details Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. For more information: [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). The following procedure demonstrates an example of updating supplier details: 1. You have received an invoice in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) where the supplier is recognised, but some information has changed or is missing, such as the bank account or the address. 1. On the invoice line, a warning symbol appears ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and the **Supplier difference status** column displays the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. To update supplier information, click **Update supplier**. A dialog box will appear, displaying both old and new values for you to review before confirming or cancelling the update. 1. Click **Yes** to update all fields with the new values. Click **No** not to update and continue processing the invoice as usual. Upon updating one line for multiple invoices from the same supplier, the warning symbol will be removed from the remaining lines. If the supplier is not recognised, you have to rematch the supplier, see: [Rematch invoice with unrecognised supplier details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/rematch-invoices-with-unrecognised-supplier-details/) You can choose not to use the supplier validation both in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) and the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) windows.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Rematch invoices with unrecognised supplier details /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/rematch-invoices-with-unrecognised-supplier-details section Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in either the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Rematch invoices with unrecognised supplier details Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in either the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. For more information: [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). Below are examples of situations where updating supplier details may be necessary: ## Rematch one invoice with an unrecognised supplier 1. You have received an invoice in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) where the supplier is not recognised, and the invoice line has the status **Blocked**. This issue may be due to a missing organisation number or an incorrect bank account number. Since you know that the supplier exists in the system, you need to rematch the invoice with the correct supplier information. 1. In the **Supplier no.** column for the line, select the ID for the supplier that matches the supplier on the invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The invoice line gets the status **New** and a warning is displayed. 1. On the invoice line, you see the warning symbol ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and in the **Supplier difference status** column, you see the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. To update the supplier information, click **Update supplier**. A dialog box is displayed, with the old and the new value, so that you can check them before you confirm or cancel. 1. Click **Yes** if you want to update all fields with the new values. Click **No** if you do not want update and go back to processing the invoice normally. You can choose not to make the supplier validation both in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) and the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) windows. ## Rematch several invoices form the same supplier with unrecognised details 1. Imagine you have received 10 invoices from the same supplier in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), but the supplier is not recognised, and the invoice lines are marked as **Blocked**. This could be due to a missing organisation number or an incorrect bank account number. Since you know the supplier exists in the system, you need to re-associate the invoice with the correct supplier. 1. On the invoice lines, you see the warning symbol ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and in the **Supplier difference status** column, you see the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. In the **Supplier no.** column of the **first** line, choose the supplier's ID that corresponds to the one on the invoice. The system will automatically populate other lines with the same imported supplier reference number if the **Supplier no.** field is empty. Note that you can assign different supplier numbers to each line. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The invoice lines get the status **New** and a warning is displayed. 1. To update supplier information, click **Update supplier**. A dialog box will appear, showing both old and new values for you to review before confirming or cancelling the update. 1. Click **Yes** to update all fields with the new values. Click **No** to cancel the update and continue processing the invoice as usual. You can choose to disable supplier validation in both the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) and the [Invoice Inbox - Overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) windows.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Ignore supplier validation /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/ignore-supplier-validation section If you have selected supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can update or ignore the supplier details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) and Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Ignore supplier validation If you have selected supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can update or ignore the supplier details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) and Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. For more information: [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). The steps below provide an example of a situation where the system suggests an update, but you want to ignore it. 1. You have received an invoice in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) with the status **New**. The supplier is either recognised or unrecognised, and some information has changed or is missing, for example, the bank account or the address. 1. On the invoice line, you see the warning symbol ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and in the **Supplier difference status** column, you see the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. To avoid updating data according to the supplier validation, click **Ignore supplier validation**. If you have selected **Ignore supplier validation** in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) or [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) window, you can undo your selection in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window later: On the **General settings** tab, go to the **Invoice import settings** section and select **Ignore validation during import of invoices.**

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Create a new supplier for a blocked invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/create-a-new-supplier-for-a-blocked-invoice section To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new supplier for a blocked invoice To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window to create a new supplier for a blocked invoice. 1. Click the **Create supplier** button. The [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window is displayed and the information from the supplier's invoice is automatically filled in. 1. Add information about the supplier. For details, see [Create a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) before closing the window or click **Save and close**. If you add or modify details in step 2, the table in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window will display a check mark in the **Edited** column, indicating that changes have been made to the invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Connect a supplier to a blocked invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/connect-a-supplier-to-a-blocked-invoice section To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Connect a supplier to a blocked invoice To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. In the **Inbox status** drop-down list, select **Blocked** from the drop-down list. The system displays all blocked invoices. 1. Select the invoice line you wish to correct by clicking on it. 1. If you are aware that the supplier is registered in your system, activate the **Supplier no.** column by double-clicking on it and click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the supplier. The **Imported supplier reference** column provides information from the supplier's invoice, such as their name, to help you identify the supplier. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Change the default action for the Invoice inbox /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/change-the-default-action-for-the-invoice-inbox section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the default action for the Invoice inbox 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. On the **General information** tab, find the **Invoice inbox settings** section. 1. In the **Default action for invoice inbox** drop-down list, select one of these actions: **Hold**, **Release**, **Send to Approval**, or **Exclude from processing**. For a description of each alternative, click [/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap101000-inbox-actions-pop-up-reference/](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap101000-inbox-actions-pop-up-reference/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window, you will now see that the default action for invoices has been changed. View invoices in the Invoice inbox - overview /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices-in-the-invoice-inbox-overview page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoices in the Invoice inbox - overview ## Before you start The [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) window displays invoices from AutoInvoice with all statuses: **New**, **Blocked, Sent for Approval, Validated, Manually validated**, **Deleted**, and **Error**. If you want to see only the invoices that have the statuses **New**, **Blocked**, or **Error**, go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/). 1. Go to the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) window. 1. In the **Inbox status** drop-down list, the default status is **New.** Select **View all** to see all, or select the document status you want to see invoices for. 1. To filter on a specific supplier or on a specific invoice date, use the **Supplier** field or the **From date** and **To date** fields. You can also combine them. Visma Net immediately displays your results in the table. 1. Optional: To see details for a specific invoice, select the line in the table and click **View details**. The **Invoice details** window is displayed. For more information, see [View invoice details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details/). 1. Optional: If you click **Update supplier** for a specific invoice in the table, you can [update the supplier's details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/update-supplier-details/). A dialog box is displayed, where you can make your changes. 1. Optional: If the supplier is either recognised or unrecognised, and some information has changed or is missing, for example, the bank account or the address, you can click **Ignore supplier validation** to avoid updating the data. For more information, see [Ignore supplier validation](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/ignore-supplier-validation/). Suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Suppliers Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About supplier defaults and overrides /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/about-supplier-defaults-and-overrides page With Visma Net, you can easily create suppliers by using the default values provided by supplier classes and then effectively use supplier default values to fill in appropriate supplier information on purchase orders and payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier defaults and overrides With Visma Net, you can easily create suppliers by using the default values provided by supplier classes and then effectively use supplier default values to fill in appropriate supplier information on purchase orders and payments. ## Introduction ## Supplier classes and the default supplier class Supplier classes streamline data entry by automatically providing default values when creating suppliers within a specific class. Organise suppliers into classes based on the goods or services they provide or other characteristics. Initially, create a supplier class containing the largest number of suppliers with the most common values. Designate this class as the default supplier class in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. This will save time when generating new supplier classes, as they will automatically populate with values from the default supplier class, reducing manual data entry. When you create a new supplier, it is automatically assigned to the **Default** supplier class. In most cases, you won't need to select a different supplier class. + A supplier class requires only a class ID and description. You can choose additional elements for each class as needed. + Payment terms, currency, rate type, country, VAT zone, specific general ledger accounts and subaccounts, a default cash account,and payment method can be set for the class. + Choose a foreign currency as the default currency for a supplier class only if most suppliers in that class use it. + If all suppliers in a class use the same currency, disable currency overriding on supplier documents to reduce input errors. + If some suppliers may use a non-default currency and rate type on individual documents, allow currency overriding for suppliers in the class. + When creating a new supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, the default values are those specified for the default supplier class. + If a new supplier should be assigned to a more specific class, select the appropriate class to change the default values. + Any value can be overridden to make it specific to the supplier. However, if many values need to be overridden similarly for multiple suppliers, consider creating a new supplier class. ## Supplier locations A supplier may have multiple locations, each with unique settings. You can add, edit, and view these locations in the [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) window. These locations provide essential supplier information that can be utilised as defaults for purchase orders and supplier payments: + Supplier ledger and expense accounts and appropriate subaccounts + Payment settings and remittance information + Purchasing and shipping-related information + VAT-related information The **main** location is automatically created when you enter the supplier's primary address and contact information in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. The main location always has **MAIN** as its ID, which cannot be modified. Once the main location is created, it is automatically listed and marked as the default location on the **Locations** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. If additional locations have been added to the supplier, you can set another location as the default location: select the location, and click **Set as default** in the table toolbar. The purchase and payment settings specified for the default location are also displayed, respectively, on the **Purchase settings** and **Payment settings** tabs of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. Updating the elements on those tabs also updates appropriate information for the default location in the [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) window. The default location settings are used to populate elements when creating a new location. For a new location, you can make the following selections: + To use the same address and contact information as were specified for the main location, or to enter new information. + To use the purchase and payment settings and general ledger accounts of the default location, or to specify different ones. ## Use of location defaults When creating a new purchase order, invoice, or payment, you need to first select the supplier. + After choosing the supplier, some fields in the window will automatically populate with the supplier's default values, such as the default location and its related purchase or payment settings. + A supplier location's settings contain information like payment method, cash account, VAT zone, VAT registration, shipping settings, and supplier ledger and expense accounts along with their respective subaccounts. + If you pick a location other than the default, the values will update to match the chosen location, and you can modify these values if needed. + When printing payments, the system utilises remittance information and payment settings from the document. + By using supplier defaults to populate elements, data entry becomes more efficient and time-saving due to the automatic application of these default settings.

Related pages

Tasks

Create a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier ## Before you start To make it easier to create suppliers, you can first create supplier classes and select one as your default. This way the suppliers you create afterwards will already have some default information filled in. See [Create a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class/). To set a supplier class as default, see [Set a supplier class as default](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-a-supplier-class-as-default/). If you do not want to use the default supplier class for the supplier you are creating, you can select a different one on the **General settings** tab, in the section **Financial settings. Visma Net immediately changes the related information.** 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to create a new supplier, and enter the **supplier name**. The next available **supplier number** is automatically added to the new supplier when you save. The default **status** for the new supplier is **active**. 1. [Add information](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier/) on the **General settings** tab. 1. [Add information](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier/) on the **Payment settings** tab. 1. On the **Purchase settings** tab, in the **Default location settings** section, check that the **VAT zone** is correct. 1. Fill in the **corporate ID**. 1. Fill in the **VAT registration ID**. Some countries may use only one of the above, either the corporate ID or the VAT registration ID. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, check or select the GL accounts / subaccounts you want to use for the general ledger transactions for the customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Create a customer from a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-customer-from-a-supplier page You can create a customer from supplier with just a few steps. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer from a supplier You can create a customer from supplier with just a few steps. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Open the supplier you want to copy to a customer. 1. Click **Actions** - **Extend to customer**. The system will take you to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window in the customer ledger with appropriate elements filled in. 1. Check the values and click **Save**. Add general information for a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add general information for a supplier ## Before you start [Create a supplier (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the supplier you are creating. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Click the **General settings** tab. 1. In the **Financial settings** section, select the **supplier class**. 1. In the **Main contact** section, fill in the **Attention**, **Email**, and **Phone** fields. 1. In the **Main address** section, add the address information. 1. Select the **terms** for the supplier class. 1. Select the **currency ID** and the other currency settings. 1. Optional: You can set a default action for this supplier in the Invoice inbox. Select one of the following actions: 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Add payment settings for a supplier (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier/) Add payment settings for a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add payment settings for a supplier ## Before you start [Create a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/) [Add general information for a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the supplier you are creating. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. Click the **Payment settings** tab. 1. In the **Payment method** field, select a payment method. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select a bank account. This is the general ledger account you will use to pay the supplier. 1. In the field **Account used for payments**, select the account type. Use the right payment settings for suppliers, whether it is a domestic or an international supplier, together with the correct payment method. If you select **BBAN**, you just need to fill out the bank account number. If you select **IBAN**, fill out the whole IBAN number. In Swedish versions, you can also select **Bankgiro** and **Postgiro**. 1. In the **Default payment ref. no**. field, you can register a payment reference number per customer, to be used on all supplier invoices. This is handy, for example, if you have recurring invoices. If you enter a number in this field, you can see the same reference number in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, in the field **Payment. ref. no**. 1. In the **Payment instructions** box, double-click in the **Value** column to enter the supplier's account number. For some payment methods, the **Payment instructions** box is not active. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Override Send to Approval as the default action for one supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action-for-one-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Override Send to Approval as the default action for one supplier ## Before you start To handle large amounts of invoices more efficiently, you can send all invoices to Approval as a default action. If nothing is selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, the system will use the Approval license to define the default action for this specific supplier. + If Approval is activated, the default action is **Send to Approval**. For Sweden, if also the pre-booking functionality is activated in Approval, the default action is **Pre-book and Send to Approval**. + If Approval is not activated, the default action is **Release**. You can override these actions defined by the license for one specific supplier, by following the instructions below. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. Find the **Invoice import settings** section. 1. In the **Default action for invoice inbox** drop-down list, select **Send to Approval**. You can also set **Hold** or **Release** as a default actions here. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? You can also override this default action for all suppliers: [Override Send to Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action/). Create a supplier class /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier class 1. Go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter the next available **class ID**. If you are unsure of the next available ID, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Class ID** window. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the name or description of your new supplier class. 1. Add all additional information for this specific supplier class. Start on the **General settings** tab, and continue. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Set a supplier class as default /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-a-supplier-class-as-default section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set a supplier class as default 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Under the **Data entry settings** section in the **Default supplier class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the supplier class you want to set as default. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you want to make changes to the default supplier class, go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window, select the default class, make your changes, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Change the VAT zone for a supplier class /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/change-the-vat-zone-for-a-supplier-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the VAT zone for a supplier class 1. Go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. 1. Select the **Class ID** for the class you want to change the VAT zone for. 1. On the **General settings** tab, locate the **Default general settings** section. 1. In the **VAT zone ID** field, select the VAT zone you want to use for the current supplier class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can override the VAT zone for a specific supplier at any time, even if you have already set a zone for an entire class. To do this, go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window and click on the **Purchase settings** tab. From there, select the desired VAT zone for the specific supplier. Enable supplementary VAT reports /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/enable-supplementary-vat-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable supplementary VAT reports 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a tax agency. 1. Click the **Tax agency settings** tab that is now activated. 1. Under the **VAT report settings** section, select the **Update closed VAT periods** check box. For Dutch users, this check box is selected by default. 1. In the **Supplementary VAT amount** field, enter an amount. For Dutch users, this field is set up with 1000 as default value. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Prepare a supplementary VAT report](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-a-supplementary-year-based-vat-report/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Activate RF-1301 reporting for a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/activate-rf-1301-reporting-for-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate RF-1301 reporting for a supplier 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Select a supplier or enter a new one. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Supplier properties** area, select the **RF-1301** check box. If this is a new supplier, a reminder is displayed, to tell you that you have to enter a corporate ID or national insurance number for the supplier. You will also see that the tab **RF-1301 filter** is added to the **[Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/)** window. 1. Click the **Purchase settings** tab and enter a corporate ID or national insurance number for the supplier. If you enter both, Corporate ID will be the default value. 1. Click the **RF-1301 filters** tab. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add one or more date filters. If you enter a filter, Visma Net includes the suppliers with purchase invoices dated within the dates you have given. You can also have open start or open end filters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > You can also make a supplier class for the RF-1301 suppliers that you have. See [Create a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class/). View supplier balances /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/view-supplier-balances page In this topic 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View supplier balances In this topic ## In this topic You can use multiple reports to view supplier balances. This topic describes how to use the following reports and windows: + [Balance by supplier (AP63250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-ap63250s/) report + [Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-currency-ap63300s/) report + [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) window ## Run the Balance by supplier report 1. Go to the [Balance by supplier (AP63250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-ap63250s/). 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, in the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Account summary** To display the balance by supplier account. + **Open documents**: To view all documents with the **Open** status. + **Open + Current period**: To view all documents with the **Open** status, as well as documents of the current period regardless of their status. + **All documents (supplier required)**: To view all the documents of a specific supplier. If you select this option, you must specify a supplier. 1. Select the branch for which you want to view supplier balances. 1. Select the financial period whose date you want to view. 1. To view applied documents, select the **Include applications** check box. 1. Optional: Select a supplier by its ID, or leave the **Supplier no.** field blank to display information on all suppliers. For the **All documents** report format, you must select a supplier. 1. Click **Run report**. The report lists the supplier balance for each account related to the supplier. All the amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## Run the Balance by supplier (currency) report 1. Go to the [Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-currency-ap63300s/) report. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Account summary** To display the balance by supplier account. + **Open documents**: To view all documents with the **Open** status. + **Open + Current period**: To view all documents with the **Open** status, as well as documents of the current period regardless of their status. + **All documents (supplier required)**: To view all the documents of a specific supplier. If you select this option, you must select a supplier. 1. Select the financial period you want to run the report for. 1. To view applied documents, select the **Include applications** check box. 1. Optional: Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to display information on all suppliers. For the **All documents** report format, you must select a supplier. 1. Click **Run report**. The report lists the supplier balances in each of the currencies used (including the base currency) for each account related to the supplier. ## Use the Supplier summary window 1. Go to the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch for which you want to view the data. 1. Optional: In the **Period** field, select a financial period. If do not select any period, information about all open periods is displayed in the table. 1. Optional: Select a supplier class. If you leave the **Supplier class** field blank, information about suppliers of all classes is displayed in the table. 1. Optional: Select a currency. If the **Currency** field is blank, the data is displayed for all currencies. 1. Optional: If you left the **Currency** field blank, select the **Split by currency** check box to view balances in each currency separately. 1. Optional: Select a supplier account. If you leave the **Supplier account** field left, information on all accounts is displayed. 1. Optional: Select the corresponding supplier subaccount for the Supplier ledger account. 1. Select the **Suppliers with balance only** check box to view suppliers with non-zero balances, or clear the check box to view all suppliers. 1. In the table, view suppliers' outstanding balances and other information that matches the criteria you specified in the top part. Set up mailings for suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-up-mailings-for-suppliers section In Visma Net, the functionality that enables the sending of documents of a specific type by email or by postal mail is referred to as a mailing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up mailings for suppliers In Visma Net, the functionality that enables the sending of documents of a specific type by email or by postal mail is referred to as a mailing. In Visma Net, the functionality that enables the sending of documents of a specific type by email or by postal mail is referred to as a **mailing**. You can configure mailing of documents to suppliers willing to receive paper documents or sending by email to those who are willing to receive electronic versions of documents. To set up such mailings, follow the steps outlined in the following sections. ## Before you begin As a first step, navigate to the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, and click the **Mailing settings** tab. In the **Default sources** area, make sure that the **Active** check box for the PURCHASE ORDER mailing is selected. ## Define mailing settings for a supplier class You can facilitate the process of setting up sending of electronic purchase orders to suppliers by using the mailing settings of supplier classes as the default settings for suppliers of the respective classes. If suppliers of the class are shared among multiple branches of your company, you can set up the mailing of orders differently for different branches. Also, you can configure emails to be sent to authorised employees of your company branches about orders of particular supplier classes. To set up the mailing for a supplier class, perform the following steps: 1. Go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. 1. On the **General settings** tab, select the **Send orders by email** check box. 1. On the **Mailing settings** tab, in the **Mailings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Active** check boxes for the mailings you want to use. 1. For this mailing, specify a default report or template. If needed, select a custom report or another email template to be used for email generation. 1. In the **Recipients** area, take the following steps in defining the types of recipients for the supplier class: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Contact type** field, specify the default contact type for suppliers of the class. Make sure this contact type, too, is active. Mailing settings for the supplier class serve as the default settings for suppliers of the class but can be overridden by the settings for particular suppliers. 1. Optional: If an employee in your company should receive the emails that will be sent to suppliers of this class, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. In the **Contact type** field, select **Employee**. In the **Contact ID** field, select the particular employee. Make sure this contact is active by selecting the **Active** check box for this row. ## Define mailing settings for a particular supplier You can set up sending specific documents by email to particular suppliers and employees who work with these suppliers. To do this, perform the following steps: 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. On the **Purchase settings** tab, make sure the **Send orders by email** check box is selected. 1. On the **Mailing settings** tab, in the **Mailings** area, do the following: 1. Make sure the mailings which you want to use are active. 1. Specify the default report or the default template. If needed, select a custom report or another template. 1. In the **Recipients** area, review the list of default contact types to receive emails, and add more contacts if needed, taking the following steps for each contact: 1. In the **Contact type** field, specify the type of contact to receive the mailing. (This can be an employee of your company or a supplier contact.) 1. In the **Contact ID** field, select the particular contact of the type. 1. Choose the format of the email (if a report is used) for this particular recipient. 1. Make sure the contact for mailing is active. 1. Specify whether the contact should receive a blind copy (bcc) of the emails that will be generated for this mailing. Track payments to suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/track-payments-to-suppliers page To easily view a supplier's payment history, use the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track payments to suppliers To easily view a supplier's payment history, use the following windows: ## Introduction + [Purchase Invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/): To verify if the invoice is paid and see the payment documents + [Supplier details (AP402000):](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) To view all payments to a supplier + [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) To see whether an invoice has been approved for payment ## Check whether an invoice has been paid 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Purchase invoice**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the invoice whose payments you want to check. 1. Check whether the invoice has been paid as follows: + In the **Balance** field, look at the amount to be paid for the invoice. If the amount is zero, the invoice has been paid in full. + On the **Applications** tab, view all payments that have been applied to the invoice. ## View all payments to a supplier 1. Go to the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. 1. In the **Period** field, select the financial period for which the payments will be displayed, or leave the field blank to view all payments. 1. Optional: Select the **Include unreleased documents** check box to include the unreleased documents. 1. Optional: Select the **Show all documents** check box to show all documents regardless of their status. 1. Check the payments to the supplier as follows: + In the table, view the list of payments that match the selected criteria. + In the **Balance by documents** field of the top part,check the total amount of payments to the supplier, based on the criteria you have selected. + In the **Current balance** field, look at the total amount of payments to the supplier, as retrieved from the supplier ledger account history records stored in the database. ## See whether an invoice has been approved for payment 1. Go to the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window. 1. In the **Selection date** field of the top part, specify the approval date. By default, the system uses the current business date. 1. Select the supplier whose invoices you want to check. 1. Optional: In the top part, specify other filtering criteria to narrow the search results. 1. In the table, look for invoices with the **Open** status that meet the selected criteria. If an invoice is approved for payment, the check box in the unlabelled column will be selected, and the payment's payment date will be visible in the **Payment date** field. Set the financial period end date for the VAT period /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-the-financial-period-end-date-for-the-vat-period section With this setting, the end date of the period of the document will be used for VAT calculation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set the financial period end date for the VAT period With this setting, the end date of the period of the document will be used for VAT calculation. ## Introduction With this setting, the end date of the period of the document will be used for VAT calculation. Then the VAT will always follow the posted period end date, and the document date will not affect the VAT reporting period. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier no.** field, select a tax agency. The **Tax agency settings** tab appears. 1. On the **Tax agency settings** tab under the **VAT report settings** section, select the **Use the financial period's end date as VAT period, and not the document date** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). **Note**: If you do not select this check box, the document date will be used for VAT calculation. Close a financial period in Supplier ledger /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/close-a-financial-period-in-supplier-ledger page You can only close a financial period if there are no open documents (that is, documents with the On hold or Balanced status) to be posted to it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close a financial period in Supplier ledger You can only close a financial period if there are no open documents (that is, documents with the On hold or Balanced status) to be posted to it. ## Introduction In Visma Net, transactions cannot be posted to closed financial periods unless the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window is selected. ## Before you proceed You might need to take the following steps before you close a financial period in the Supplier ledger: 1. Make sure all the appropriate recurring documents are generated and recurring transactions are posted in the period to be closed. 1. Make sure there are no open documents in the period to be closed. Use the following steps to review open documents in the Supplier ledger workspace: 1. Go to the [Close financial periods (AP506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ap506000/) window. 1. In the table, select the unlabelled check boxes to specify the financial periods for which you want to review open documents. To select all the displayed active periods for closing, click the unlabelled check box in the header row. 1. Click **Unreleased documents**. The system displays the **Unreleased supplier ledger documents** report. 1. Review the report to find open documents to be posted in the specified period. ## Close a financial period in Supplier ledger 1. Go to the [Close financial periods (AP506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ap506000/) window. 1. In the table, select the unlabelled check boxes to specify the financial periods you want to close. To select all the displayed active periods for closing, click the unlabelled check box in the header row. 1. Click **Close periods**.

Related pages

Windows

Supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discounts Maintain supplier discounts - overview /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview section You can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain supplier discounts - overview You can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts offered by your suppliers by maintaining discounts in Visma Net. > [!NOTE] > This functionality is available only if the **Supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. About supplier discounts in Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-in-visma-net page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier discounts in Visma Net To go back to the main process, click outside this pop-up window. || |---| |## [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/)| || |## Examples| |[Calculate document-level supplier discounts with tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-document-level-supplier-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts/)| |[Calculate line-level customer discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/)| |[Calculate prorated supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-prorated-supplier-discounts/)| || |## [About Supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/)| |## [About Supplier discounts and series for discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/)| About Supplier discounts and series for discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts page You use this window to define the series for the supplier discount codes that you have set up. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Supplier discounts and series for discounts You use this window to define the series for the supplier discount codes that you have set up. ## Introduction + A **discount series** defines the method used by the system to calculate supplier discounts, depending on the line item's amount or quantity, or the document's total amount. + The discount series consists of a list of break points, where each break point indicates the range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts eligible for a specific discount amount or percentage. + Many suppliers offer discounts that depend on the quantities of items, on the inclusion of specific items, on the document total amounts, or on specific line amounts. ## The stages of defining supplier discounts In Visma Net, you create supplier discounts in the following two stages: 1. In the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, define discount codes for all types of supplier discounts offered by your suppliers. A supplier discount code defines the following characteristics for a discount: + Whether it is unconditional + What types of conditions should be met when you apply it + Whether it is automatic or manual + At which level the discount is applicable (to documents, groups, or lines). For more information, see [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/). 1. In the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, create a discount series for each supplier discount code. Each series should have an effective date and specify a discount type, such as promotional, updatable, simple, or tiered. Multiple series with the same discount can be active simultaneously, provided they apply to non-overlapping conditions. For example, a line-level discount is a conditional discount for items. You can set up series with the same start date but applying to different items. ## About the different discount series Each discount code can have multiple discount series associated with it. Assign a unique identifier to each series. When automatic numbering is enabled for a discount code, the system will automatically generate a series ID for each new series created under that code. By default, the discount code serves as a prefix for the series IDs. You can also choose a different string as a prefix for automatic numbering. For every discount series, provide the following details: + How the discount is tiered: **by amount** (for discount codes of all types) or **by quantity** (only for the line and group discount code types). + How the discount is expressed: as a percentage or as an amount. + Whether the discount is a promotional discount and has an expiration date. + Which conditions apply. The types of conditions are defined by the discount code. For example, if you have decided that the discount code should apply discounts to specific items, you can see the **Items** tab in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. On this tab, you can create a list of items to which each series is applicable. Each discount series has an effective (start) date and will apply only on and after this date. ## Simple and tiered discounts In a series, you can apply a simple discount to any amount or quantity, or use a tiered discount based on item quantities or amounts. To set up tiers for a discount, define break points that establish ranges of amounts or quantities with different applicable discount percentages or amounts. This section provides examples of supplier discount series. For more information on discount amount calculations, see [Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-document-level-supplier-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts/) and [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/). ## Discounts that can be updated and promotional discounts A discount series includes either an adjustable discount or a promotional discount. Promotional discounts are temporary price reductions with specified start and end dates. Once the end date passes, the promotional discount is no longer valid. To create a promotional series, select the **Promotional** check box in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. When you **do not** select the **Promotional** check box, it means that series can be updated. They only have the start (effective) date. However, for each series that can be updated, you can have multiple versions: + The active version — the discount that is currently in effect. + The pending version — the discount that will be in effect starting on the pending date. + The last version — the discount that was in effect before the current discount. When updating supplier discounts for a series, you cannot create all versions simultaneously. Instead, input new break amounts (or quantities) as pending amounts (or quantities) and set a pending date as the new effective date. Once the new start date arrives, you can update the current series with these pending values. After updating the series in the **Update discounts** pop-up window found in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, the previously active series version becomes the last version, and the pending version takes its place as the active one.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

About types of supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-types-of-supplier-discounts page In Visma Net, you can input and regularly update supplier discounts based on the information provided by each supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of supplier discounts In Visma Net, you can input and regularly update supplier discounts based on the information provided by each supplier. ## Introduction Having this information allows you to strategically plan your orders. For example, you can order larger quantities less frequently if the supplier offers tiered discounts, place orders earlier to take advantage of promotional discounts, or include specific items in your orders to receive a substantial group discount. ## Prerequisites Make sure the **Supplier discounts** functionality is included in your license and enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The system automatically applies supplier discounts to each purchase invoice when the document is saved. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, the system applies discounts to purchase orders. ## Types of discounts In Visma Net , there are the following general types of supplier discounts:
Option Description
Line A discount applied to a single document line. This discount can be based on the line amount or quantity and may be expressed as a percentage or a fixed amount. These discounts can be unconditional or apply to specific items, supplier locations, combinations of items and locations, or particular item price classes. Be cautious when using conditions based on item price classes, as suppliers may have different price classes.
Group A discount applicable to multiple lines within the same document. This discount can be unconditional or apply to specific items, supplier locations, item price classes, or a combination of items and locations. Group discounts are applied when the document properties meet the application conditions.
Document A discount that unconditionally applies to the document total.
In the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, you can specify whether for each discount code the discount is unconditional or is based on specific conditions. For conditional discounts, you can select the type of conditions affecting the application of the discount. Then, when you create discount series in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. ## Application of line discounts ## Automatic and manual discounts + The discounts with the **Manual** check box selected in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window will not be applied automatically or selected as the best-available when a user saves the document. + While automatic discounts of all levels are applied when the document is being saved, you can apply a manual discount to a particular document by using the appropriate window, [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) or [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/). + You can apply line-level discounts on the **Document details** tab of the appropriate window once you select the **Manual discount** check box for a particular line and select the discount code of one of the applicable manual discounts. + You can apply manual group discounts and document discounts on the **Discount details** tab. ## Discount series Particular details and particular conditions of application for each discount code are defined by discount series, which you can create by using the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. For each supplier discount code, you can decide whether to use automatic numbering for the series associated with this discount code to be used as a prefix for automatic numbering.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About the order of supplier discount application /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-the-order-of-supplier-discount-application page When a document is saved, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically except for the discounts marked as manual (those for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the order of supplier discount application When a document is saved, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically except for the discounts marked as manual (those for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window). For more information: [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/). ## Introduction When a document is saved, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically except for the discounts marked as manual (those for which the **Manual discount** check box is selected in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window). This topic provides the details on the order of discount application. ## Order of application for automatic discounts For the automatic discounts, you do not have to specify the order of their application in any way and discounts are always applied in the following order: + Discounts of the **Line** type: When applying discounts to a sales order or invoice, the system checks the discounts for all document lines, and for each line it picks the best discount applicable. + Discounts of the **Group** type: The system checks applicable group discounts and applies all of them. + Discounts of the **Document** type: There can be only one best **Document** discount; that is why **Group** discounts (that apply to multiple lines of the document) are often used as **Document** discounts. The following options (available in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window) affect the order of discount application and the calculation of the discounts: Exclude from discountable amount : By using this option (available for the **Line** discounts), you can exclude the discountable amount of the **Line** discount from the discountable amount for higher-level discounts (group and document). For example: By using this option, you can exclude items with a special 75% clearance discount defined at the line level from the basis for the usual 5% document discount the supplier offers on orders exceeding 2000€. Skip document discount : This option is available for the **Group** discounts. If you design a **Group** discount to be applicable to multiple lines and significantly reduce the document total, select this option to not apply a **Document** discount. ## Interaction between supplier discounts and supplier prices If a particular supplier company informs you about their prices intended for all their customers and their discounts, you can maintain the supplier's prices along with supplier discounts, and you will calculate supplier discounts based on discountable amounts calculated from the prices. If you maintain the prices offered by the supplier specifically to your company, maintain supplier prices by using the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) and the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) windows and do not configure supplier discounts. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in your system, the supplier prices available in the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window will be automatically updated once the supplier prices specified for the "zero" tier (with 0 quantity) have been changed through the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. ## Application of auxiliary manual discounts Manual discounts (discounts with the **Manual** check box selected in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window) are applied when all automatic discounts have been applied. You can specify the manual discount for particular document lines by using the **Document details** tab of the appropriate data entry windows: + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) + [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, and the system will recalculate other related values automatically. ## Automatic and manual discounts The manual discounts are not applied automatically or selected as the best-available on saving the document. You apply such discounts manually to documents in the document entry windows (either the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) or the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window), while automatic discounts of all levels are applied when the document is being saved.In a document, you can apply the manual **Line** discount by selecting the discount code in the **Discount code** column of a particular line on the **Document details** tab. After the code has been selected and the discount has been applied, other discounts are recalculated.To apply the manual **Group** or **Document** discounts, select each manual discount by its code on the **Document details** tab of the appropriate document entry window. If the discount matches by conditions, it is applied. If when adding manual discounts, you change the line quantities, manual discounts are recalculated; they will not be replaced by automatic discounts even if the latter result in greater discount amount. ## Ability to view discount details You can view the details of all the discounts, automatic or manual that were applied to the document (purchase order or invoice) on the **Discount details** tab of the respective data entry windows (listed in the section above). ## Possibility to refresh discounts and prices for existing documents For documents that were **On hold** for some time, you can update the discounts for the document if you know that the prices or discounts were updated or new discounts have been defined in the system. To update the prices and discounts, use the **Recalculate prices and discounts** action in the window toolbars of the respective windows. You also can choose whether to replace manual discounts by automatic discounts to check whether this change results currently in a larger total discount. If you are not satisfied with the result, you can apply the manual discounts. The principles of supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts page In Visma Net, you can maintain supplier discounts so that you can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts offered by your suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The principles of supplier discounts In Visma Net, you can maintain supplier discounts so that you can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts offered by your suppliers. ## Overview of discounts ### Types of supplier discounts Enter and regularly update supplier discounts using the information provided by each supplier to better plan your orders. For instance, order larger quantities less often if the supplier offers tiered discounts, place orders earlier to take advantage of promotional discounts, or include specific items in your orders to receive substantial group discounts, rather than placing separate orders for those items. ## Prerequisites Ensure that your license includes the **Supplier discounts** functionality and that it is activated (refer to [Enable or disable supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts/) ). Configure supplier discounts in the **Supplier ledger** workspace. The system will automatically apply the relevant discounts to each purchase order and invoice upon saving. If your company uses the Inventory module, the system applies discounts to purchase orders. ## Stages of configuring supplier discounts 1. For each supplier, define supplier discount codes in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window. Here, you can specify the discount types and their conditions. To minimise errors on purchase orders and invoices, create and use discount codes that closely resemble the ones used by the supplier. 1. In the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, you create discount series for each discount code. ## Types of discounts on the line, group, or document level There are three general types of supplier discounts in Visma Net:
Discount Description
Line-level discounts Line-level discounts apply to individual document lines: These discounts can be calculated based on the line amount or quantity, and can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. They can be unconditional, or apply to specific items, certain supplier locations, both particular items and locations, or specific item price classes. Keep in mind that suppliers may use different price classes when setting conditions based on item price classes.
Group-level discounts Group-level discounts are applicable to multiple lines within the same order. These discounts can be unconditional or conditional, based on specific items, supplier locations, a combination of items and locations, or particular item price classes. Group-level discounts are applied when the document properties meet the specified conditions.
Document-level discounts Document-level discounts are applied to the entire document without any restrictions.
In the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, you can define each discount code as either unconditional or conditional. For conditional discounts, you can choose the conditions that determine how the discount is applied. Then, when you create discount series in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. ## Application methods for line discounts Choose whether to apply line discounts to item prices or item extended prices based on each supplier's preferences. To apply line discounts to item extended prices, refer to [Define supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes/). When creating discount tiers, set the **break amounts** for either line amounts or prices. For examples, see [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/). ## Automatic and manual discounts When creating discount codes in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) windowa and you select the **Manual** check box, the system will not automatically apply the manual discount or choose it as the best available option upon saving the document. Although automatic discounts of all levels are applied when saving the document, you can apply a manual discount to a specific document in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) or [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) windows. On the **Document details** tab within any of these windows, you have the option to apply line-level discounts. To do this, simply select the **Manual discount** check box for a specific line and choose the discount code. Additionally, on the **Discount details** tab, you can apply manual group and document-level discounts. ## Discount series Discount series specify the application details and conditions for each discount code. You can create these series in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. For more information about discount series, see [Series for supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/).
Calculate document-level supplier discounts with tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-document-level-supplier-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts page In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate supplier discounts let you receive the best discount amount on your orders (or purchase invoices, if you do not use the Inventory module), according to the information your system contains about supplier discounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate document-level supplier discounts with tiers defined by amounts In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate supplier discounts let you receive the best discount amount on your orders (or purchase invoices, if you do not use the Inventory module), according to the information your system contains about supplier discounts. You enter discount series based on information you get from specific suppliers. When you enter a discount series for a particular supplier discount code, you can specify the same discount for all amounts (quantities), or you can create tiers by specifying break points, and the particular discounts for these tiers. For more information, see [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/), [About supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/), and [Series for supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/). The system calculates discounts as if the quantities of items are specified in their base units. Make sure that you convert discount break quantities and quantities of free items correctly for each supplier, if the supplier uses units of measure for these items that differ from the base UoMs in your system. ## Calculation principles **Supplier document-level** discounts are unconditional. You create tiers for them only by break points defined as amounts, while the discount can be defined as a percentage of the document amount or as a fixed amount. When the system processes a purchase order or a purchase invoice, for each discount series, it compares the discountable amount to the break points in the discount series, like this: 1. The document amount is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. 1. The document amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to any break point but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the system deducts the fixed amount specified as the discount for this tier from the document amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the system calculates and deducts the percent (specified for this tier) of the document amount from the document amount. + The system does not perform any further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare, and repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. ### Example 1 If a series for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount corresponding to the appropriate tier from the document total. Suppose that you have specified a series with the following breakpoints: + 1000€: 5% + 2000€: 7% + 5000€: 10% For a document with 900€ total, the discount is zero, while for a document with 2500€, it is 175€, and for a document with total of 9000€, the discount is 900€ ### Example 2 Next, suppose that a series for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts, with the discounts expressed as fixed amounts that the system subtracts from the total amount. Furthermore, suppose that you have specified the series with the following break points: + 1000€: 100€ + 2000€: 225€ + 3000€: 350€ For purchase orders with amounts less than 1000€, your company will receive a discount of zero. The discount for an order with a total between 1000€ and 1999.99€ is 100€, the discount on an order between 2000€ and 2999.99€ is 225€, and the discount for an order of 3000€ or more is 350€. ## What is next? [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/) Calculate line-level customer discounts for tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts page You can define tiers for a line-level discount by amounts or by quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate line-level customer discounts for tiers defined by amounts You can define tiers for a line-level discount by amounts or by quantities. ## Introduction The calculation method for line-level discounts depends on whether you want to apply the discount to item costs or to item extended costs. See [Apply discounts to Extended cost or Unit cost](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/apply-discounts-to-extended-cost-or-unit-cost/). ## Apply line discount to extended cost If you want to apply the discounts to the extended cost for a particular supplier, and the tiers are defined by amounts, the line amount is compared to the first break amount. If the amount is less than the first break amount in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. Otherwise, the system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line amount (that is, the extended cost of the item) is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. 1. The line amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the line amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the line amount is calculated and deducted from the line amount. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it has calculated all discount or checked the last break point. ### Example Your company buys an item for 95€. If a series for a line-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount calculated as a percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the extended cost of the item, from the extended price. Let us say that the series is specified with the following break points: + 1000€: 5% + 2000€: 10% + 5000€: 20% For a line with 10 items (the extended cost is 950€), the discount is zero. For a line with 20 items, the discount is 190€. And for a line with a total of 60 items (the extended cost is 5700€), the discount is 1140€. ## Apply line discount to item cost If you, for a specific supplier, want to apply the discounts to item costs, check that the break points defined as amounts can be compared to costs (not to extended costs). The system compares the cost of the line item to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount is zero, and the system does no further comparison. Otherwise, the system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line item's cost is compared to the first break point. If the item cost is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. 1. The item cost is compared to the next break point. If the cost is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the item cost, and the system recalculates the extended cost. + If the discount is a percentage, the system calculates and deducts the percent (specified for this tier) of the item cost from the item cost. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. If, for a specific supplier, the discounts should be applied to item costs and a series is broken down by the quantity of the item, the line quantity of the item is compared to the quantities selected as break points, and the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is defined as a percentage, the specified percent is deducted from the item cost and then the discounted price is multiplied by the line quantity. + If the discount is defined as a fixed amount, the specified fixed amount is deducted from the item cost and then the discounted price is multiplied by the line quantity. ### Example Your company buys different items that cost 95€, 210€, and 600€. If a series for a line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount is calculated as the percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the item price and the system subtracts it from the cost. Suppose that you have specified the series with the following break points: + 1000€: 5% + 2000€: 10% + 5000€: 20% For a line with 10 units of the item priced at 95€, the discount will be zero. For a line with 20 units of the item priced at 210€, the discount will be 2.10€ per unit with the discount for the line at 42€. And for a line with 600€ item, the discount will be 120€ per unit. If you need information on discount calculation for prorated discounts, see [Calculate prorated discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-prorated-supplier-discounts/). Calculate prorated supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-prorated-supplier-discounts page This example concerns a prorated group-level discount defined for quantity tiers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate prorated supplier discounts This example concerns a prorated group-level discount defined for quantity tiers. ## Introduction It is possible to prorate discount series if you select the **Prorate discounts** check box in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. For prorated discount series, the discount amount (or the quantity of items) is calculated so that your company does not need to split a purchase order to get a greater discount amount or a larger quantity of items. The **Prorate discounts** option is applicable to discount series with discountable quantities as well as with discountable amounts. ### Example The series defines the discount with the following tiers: + 10 units: 1 unit of the item + 20 units: 2 units of the item + 40 units: 3 units of the item To determine the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, using the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount according to the breakpoints used. With prorated discounts, a purchase order for 50 units would yield 4 units of the item, computed as 3 (for 40 units) plus 1 (for 10 units). For an order of 70 units, the discount is calculated as 6 units of the item: 3 as the discount for 40 units, plus 2 as the discount for 20 units, plus 1 as the discount for 10 units. Supplier discount series /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discount series Create discount series (AP205000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series/create-discount-series-ap205000 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create discount series (AP205000) ## Before you start The [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window is only available if you have selected the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. See: [Enable or disable supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts/). You also need to [define supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes/) before you start. 1. Go to the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier you want to set up discount series for. 1. In the **Discount code** field, select the discount code you want to use. 1. In the **Series** field, the default value is NEW. This field is for the ID of the series associated with the supplier discount code. If you've enabled automatic numbering for the discount in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, the system will generate an ID. Otherwise, you need to create and input the first number of the number series manually. 1. Optional: Select the **Active** check box if the series is active. You should not have overlapping time intervals for the same discounts or, if you have, they should apply to different entities. 1. Optional: Select the **Promotional** check box if the series is the supplier's promotional discount. For promotional discount series, you must specify the effective date and the expiration date (the field **Effective date** is displayed if you select **Promotional** ). 1. In the **Description** field, you see the description for the discount code if it was given. You can change this description here. 1. In the **Discount by** field, select the way the discount should be specified for this discount series. Select one of the following options: + **Percent**: The supplier discount is specified by a percentage. + **Amount**: The supplier discount is specified by a fixed amount. + **Free item**: The supplier discount is defined by a specific quantity of certain free items added to an order. You can only use this option for group-level discounts. 1. In the **Break by** field, decide how you want the system to set the break points: + **Quantity**: The range is set by specified quantities. + **Amount**: The range is set by specified amounts. 1. Optional: Select the **Prorate discount** check box if you want the discount to be prorated. > ## More information > > When using **prorated discounts**, the discount amount or the number of free items is calculated by dividing the order into multiple smaller orders, ensuring you receive the maximum possible discount. > > To calculate the discount amount or the number of free items for a quantity that falls between two break points, the system considers the quantity as a combination of the largest possible break point quantities. > > It then calculates the discount amount (or the number of free items) according to the break points used. 1. Based on your selections in steps 7 and 8, as well as any checked boxes in this window, various tabs will appear. You may need to provide additional information within these tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About Supplier discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes section You use the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window to add, edit, view, and delete the supplier discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Supplier discount codes You use the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window to add, edit, view, and delete the supplier discount codes defined in your company. For more information: [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/). ## Introduction You use the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window to add, edit, view, and delete the supplier discount codes defined in your company. To complete the configuration of supplier discounts, you specify discount series for each discount code in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. See: [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/). ## The order in which Visma Net applies supplier discounts When you save a document, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts marked as manual. ## Automatic discount application order Automatic discounts are applied in the following order, without needing to specify: Line-level : Applied to each line of the document. The system selects the best applicable discount for each line when processing purchase orders or invoices. Group-level : Applied to multiple lines of the document. The system identifies and applies all applicable group discounts. Document-level : Applied to the document's total amount. Only one best document-level discount is applied, which is why group-level discounts are often used as document-level discounts. Several options affect the discount application order and calculation: Exclude from discountable amount : This option, available for line-level discounts, allows you to exclude the line-level discount amount from higher-level discounts (group and document). For example, you can exclude items with a 75% clearance discount from the basis for a 5% document discount on orders over 2000€. Skip document discount : This option, available for group-level discounts, prevents the application of a document-level discount when a group-level discount significantly reduces the document total. ## Understanding the interaction between supplier discounts and prices When a supplier provides prices for all customers along with discounts, you can manage both supplier prices and discounts, calculating the discounts based on the discountable amounts derived from the prices. For prices offered specifically to your company, use the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) and [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) windows to manage supplier prices, without configuring supplier discounts. With volume pricing enabled, the supplier prices in the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window will automatically update when the "zero" tier prices (with 0 quantity) are changed in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. ## About applying extra manual discounts You can apply manual discounts (without discount codes) when all automatic discounts have been applied. You can specify a manual discount for specific document lines on the **Document details** tab in these windows: + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) + [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either a discount percent or a discount amount. The system automatically recalculates other related values. ## About automatic and manual discounts If you have chosen the **Manual** option in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, the discount will not be automatically applied or considered the best available when saving the document. You can use manual discounts for purposes such as rebates or coupons. While automatic discounts at all levels are applied upon saving the document, you can apply a manual discount to documents in one of the following windows: + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) + [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) To apply a manual line-level discount to a document, go to the **Document details** tab and select the discount code for the specific line. Once the code is selected and the discount is applied, the system will recalculate any other discounts accordingly. For manual group-level or document-level discounts, navigate to the **Discount details** tab and select each discount code from the table. The system will apply the discount if the conditions match. Note that if you modify line quantities while adding manual discounts, the system will recalculate them, but they will not be replaced by automatic discounts even if those offer a greater discount amount. You can always view the details of all discounts that were applied to a document on the **Discount details** tab in the window mentioned above. ## About refreshing discounts and prices for existing documents If you are aware of updated prices, discounts, or newly defined discounts in the system for documents that have been on hold, you can update the discounts accordingly. To update prices and discounts, select the **Recalculate prices** action in the appropriate windows. Additionally, you can choose to replace manual discounts with automatic discounts to see if this change increases the total discount. If the result is unsatisfactory, you can revert to using manual discounts.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Define supplier discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define supplier discount codes ## Before you start To complete the configuration of supplier discounts, you specify discount series for each discount code in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. See: [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/). This window is only available if you have selected the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. See: [Enable or disable supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts/). 1. Go to the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier you want define discount codes for. 1. On the **Discount codes** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Discount code** field, enter a unique code for the supplier discount. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a brief description of the supplier discount. 1. In the **Discount type** field, choose what the discount will apply to: + **Line** + **Document** + **Group** 1. In the **Applicable to** field, the default is that all options are check-marked, but you can remove or add an option by clicking to the left of it. The available choices are: + **Item**: The system applies the discount if the document includes specific items. + **Item price class**: The discount is applied if the document includes items from a specific item price class. + **Location**: The system applies the discount if the document is associated with a specific supplier location. + **Item and location**: The system applies the discount if the document includes specific items purchased from specific supplier location. + **Unconditional**: The system applies the discount to all documents unconditionally. For a document-level discount, there is only one option: + **Unconditional**: The system applies the discount to all documents without any conditions. 1. Optional: If you want to exclude the supplier discount from automatic searches for the best available discount, select the **Manual** check box. 1. Optional: Select the check box **Exclude from discountable amount** if you want to exclude the line amount from the base amount for any applicable group or document discount. This option is only available for line-level discounts. 1. Optional: If you want to prevent the application of any additional discounts after the supplier discount, select the **Skip document discounts** check box. Note: This option is only available for group discounts. 1. Optional: Select the **Auto numbering** check box if you want to use automatic numbering to generate IDs for series based on this discount code. The discount code will be used as a prefix for generating series IDs by default, but you can specify a string to be used as a template for automatic numbering in the **Last number** column instead. When series IDs are auto-numbered, the **Last number** column displays the last series ID in the series. If you enter a string before creating any series, the system uses it as a template for automatic numbering. You can have up to 10 characters, including digits at the end. The final letter separates the string into a prefix and an auto-incrementing integer. If you do not provide a value, the system uses the discount code as a prefix. 1. Click the **Calculation** tab. 1. In the **Apply line discounts to** drop-down list, choose between: + **Extended cost**: The system applies the discount to the line amount (to the item's extended cost). + **Unit cost**: The system applies the discount to the item's unit cost. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Create discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series/create-discount-series-ap205000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Apply discounts to extended cost or unit cost /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/apply-discounts-to-extended-cost-or-unit-cost section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply discounts to extended cost or unit cost 1. Go to the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window. 1. Go to the **Calculation** tab. 1. In the **Apply line discounts to** drop-down list, select **Extended cost** or **Unit cost**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Supplier price lists /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists section Supplier price lists are configured in the Supplier ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier price lists Supplier price lists are configured in the Supplier ledger workspace. ## Introduction When saving a document, the system automatically applies the prices to non-stock items on an invoice. If the Inventory module is enabled, supplier prices are applied to both stock and non-stock items on purchase orders. ## Import of supplier prices In Visma Net, you can import the price lists shared by your suppliers (or enter them manually) for each supplier separately using the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in your system, you can enter or import tiered prices based on the quantities of items purchased from a supplier. ## Promotional supplier prices In Visma Net, you can enter promotional or temporary prices for suppliers with promotions. To enter promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box for each price record in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. Import a promotional price list using the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window and mark all prices as promotional by selecting the **Promotional** check box of the worksheet. ## Volume-dependent supplier prices With **Volume pricing** enabled, enter supplier price tiers in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window by specifying break quantity, price, and effective date for each tier. ## Price recalculation on documents Before removing a document from **Hold** status, refresh prices by selecting **Recalculate prices** in the **Actions** menu of the respective window toolbar. Manage supplier prices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/manage-supplier-prices page Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for supplier price management: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage supplier prices Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for supplier price management:
Option Description
Default prices Define and maintain the default supplier price for each individual item in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) windows. You can use discounts with these prices.
Supplier prices Implement different pricing strategies. You can create price lists that apply to a supplier class or a particular supplier, promotional price lists, and prices that depend on the quantity of the product.
Supplier price worksheets Use the record list created in the Supplier prices (AP202000) window to modify and mass-calculate prices using supplier price worksheets. You can update the records individually or apply changes to multiple records simultaneously. Additionally, you can compute pending prices for both stock and non-stock items.
> [!NOTE] > If you are using supplier prices and / or supplier price worksheets to maintain your supplier prices, do not use the default prices, and vice versa.
Maintain and review supplier prices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/maintain-and-review-supplier-prices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain and review supplier prices 1. Go to the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the supplier for which you want to review purchase price information. 1. In the **Item ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the item you want to review purchase price information for. By selecting only a supplier, you can add new items for this supplier. By selecting only an item, you can add new suppliers for this item. By selecting both a supplier and an item, you can add various prices for the specific supplier and item combination. 1. Optional: In the **Item class** field, select the item class you wish to review supplier price information for. Additionally, click **Me** to filter prices entered by you as a product manager, or **My** to filter based on the product work groups you are a member of. 1. Manually define new prices for the items you wish to edit. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar to add a new row to the price list. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a supplier and/or an item, and fill in other information. 1. Optional: To define promotional prices, select the **Promotion** check box for the desired suppliers and items. Enter the promotional price in the **Price** field, and specify the promotion period using the **Effective date** and **Expiration date** fields. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > To add the items and their prices to a price list, click **Create price worksheets**. This will open the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Create a supplier price worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/create-a-supplier-price-worksheet section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier price worksheet 1. Go to the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Fill in the **Description** field for the new supplier price worksheet. 1. To add items to the worksheet, you can: + Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar and select the **item ID** you want to add to the worksheet. + Click **Add item** in the table toolbar. In the **Add item to worksheet** pop-up window, select the desired item IDs and click **Add** or **Add and close**. + Click **Copy prices** in the table toolbar. In the pop-up window, you can select the source and destination price type of the items you want to copy to the new price worksheet, and define the effective date of the prices. Click **Copy** to copy. + Click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) to open the [**File upload**](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/import-data-from-file-to-table-task/) dialog box. You can locate and import local files, Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx), and.csv files. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**. Calculate pending supplier prices for items /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/calculate-pending-supplier-prices-for-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate pending supplier prices for items 1. Go to the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the price list for which you want to calculate pending prices. 1. In the **Effective date** field, enter a date from which the pending prices will be effective. The date is automatically set to today's date. **Optional**: Select the **Overwrite overlapping prices** option to overwrite any prices with effective dates that overlap with the worksheet's effective dates. 1. Click **Calculate pending prices**. 1. In the pop-up window, select the percentage of the price adjustment in the **% of original price** field. For example: if you want to raise the prices by 10%, enter 110. 1. Select the **price basis** of the adjustment. 1. Click **Update**. 1. Deselect the **Hold** check box. 1. Click **Release**. The pending prices will become effective on the date you entered in the **Effective date** field. > [!NOTE] > If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**. Supplier ledger windows /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger windows Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000 page In this window, you can configure the Supplier ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) In this window, you can configure the Supplier ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction Please note that certain settings, like the number series, cannot be modified once you begin using the workspace. ## What to do from this window + [Override Send to Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action/) + [Set Release document from Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/set-release-document-from-approval-as-the-default-action/) + [Change the default action for the Invoice inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/change-the-default-action-for-the-invoice-inbox/) + [Set up supplier document amount rounding](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap101000-setup-document-rounding-task/) + [Set a supplier class as default](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-a-supplier-class-as-default/) ## The General information tab The general settings for the Supplier ledger workspace consist of posting and retention settings, ageing settings, and additional options for new documents. Furthermore, you can define the number series used for generating identifiers of supplier ledger documents and payments issued in response to supplier documents. You can use different number series for each document type or the same number series for multiple document types. In the latter case, the system gives all documents the same series numbers (identifiers), based on the order in which they were entered or generated, and two successive identifiers may refer to documents of different types. ### The Number series section
Element Description
Batch number series The number series used for batches generated by the Supplier ledger workspace.
Purchase invoice number series The number series used for purchase invoices.
Purchase credit note number series The number series used for purchase credit notes.
Credit adjustment number series The number series used for credit adjustments.
Payment number series The number series used for supplier ledger payments.
Price worksheet number series The number series used for price worksheets.
Inbox rule number series The number series used for Invoice inbox rules.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Post summary when updating the general ledger

When this check box is selected, supplier ledger documents will be posted to the General ledger with summarised row amounts if particular criteria are met.

That is, if multiple rows in a supplier ledger document specify the same account (and subaccount, if any) and branch, then in the general ledger batch, these rows will be combined into one row with the summarised amount.

You can post the summarised transaction amounts to an account (and subaccount) only if both the Post summary when updating the general ledger check box is selected in this window and the Summary option is specified for the account in the Post option column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.

The general ledger batch can contain multiple documents if the General ledger consolidation functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Automatically post on release When this check box is selected, transactions will be automatically posted to the general ledger once they are released in the Supplier ledger workspace.
Activate migration mode

When this check box is selected, you can release documents in Customer ledger and Supplier ledger (both invoices and payments) without creating a general ledger batch in General ledger. The balance will still be added to the customer or supplier.

The Sales and Purchases workspaces cannot be used.

### The Ageing section You use this section to set up a Supplier ledger ageing schedule. By setting up three ageing periods (each of which is defined by the number of days outstanding or days past due), you can improve cash flow projections, because you can view outstanding supplier ledger documents and payments by ageing categories.
Element Description
Ageing period 1 The maximum number of days outstanding or past due for the document to be included in the first category.
Ageing period 2 The maximum number of days outstanding or past due for the document to be included in the second category. If the value here is greater than the Ageing period 1 value, documents from the first category are not included in the second category.
Ageing period 3 The maximum number of days outstanding or past due for the document to be included in the third category. If the value here is greater than the Ageing period 2 value, documents from the second category are not included in the third category.
### The Invoice inbox settings section
Element Description
Default action for invoice inbox

Here you can select the action that is by default taken when an invoice comes to the Invoice inbox.

The available actions are:

Hold - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Hold.

Release - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Open, if Automatically post on release is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) (this is the default action in Visma Net ).

Send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Balanced which is sent to Approval.

Pre-book - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released and requires an expense reclassification. This status is only used if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated.

Pre-book and send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released, which requires expense reclassification (this status is used only if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated), and which is then sent to Approval.

Exclude from processing - No purchase document is created or processed, it remains in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Move invoice into the next open/active period

Select this check box to stop all posting into Customer ledger and Supplier ledger at a specific date in each month. From this date there should not be any postings in the previous period in these workspaces. If you for some reason receive an invoice late so that the invoice date is in a period that is closed/inactive, it is not possible to process it from the Invoice inbox. In these cases, you can keep the invoice date and change the period to the next open/active period.

It will not be possible to move invoices from one year to another, only within periods in the same accounting year.

Use external item ID When this option is selected, the column External item ID is available in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window as well as option Match item during invoice import in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. It allows the system to do matching of items during invoice import to the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) if the Match item during invoice import option is active on the supplier as well as use external item ID.
Use due date from terms settings Select this check box to set the due date for purchase invoices coming into the Invoice inbox based on the credit term on the supplier, instead of the due date from the XML file.
Override payment date with invoice date for credit notes

When this option is selected and a credit note is received from AutoInvoice, the due/payment date of the credit note will be set to the due date of the invoice.

When this option is not selected, the imported credit notes will have their payment date according to the imported XML file.

When you create a credit note manually, the payment date is always the same as the invoice date.

Supplier validation

When receiving invoices from AutoInvoice in Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), you can select here the details based on which the supplier information can be easily updated, if the invoice includes changed/different information than now registered on the supplier. The options are:

  • Supplier name
  • Org.no and VAT no.
  • Payment information
  • Address
  • Email and web
  • Telephone no.
### The Data entry section
Element Description
Default supplier class ID The supplier class to be used as the default supplier class. When you create a new supplier class by using the Supplier classes (AP201000) window, the settings defined for the class specified here will be inserted in to the appropriate fields. You can change any of these settings.
Combine expense sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the expense subaccount to be used for non-stock items in data entry windows in the Supplier ledger workspace.

To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

C
The subaccount associated with the company branch
E
The subaccount associated with the employee
I
The subaccount associated with the non-stock item
L
The subaccount associated with the supplier location
P
The subaccount associated with the project. This option is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
T
The subaccount associated with the project task. This option is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For a segment, the characters designating each option are repeated as many times there are characters in the segment.

Hold documents on entry When this check box is selected, new documents will have the On hold status by default.
Use orig. invoice date on payment terms When this check box is selected and the original invoice date of the purchase invoice is changed, the dates in the Due date, Cash discount date, and Pay date fields of the purchase invoice will be calculated based on the original invoice date.
Activate Pay separately from Purchase invoices and Suppliers

When the check box is not selected (the default):

When the check box is selected:

Require approval of invoices before paying

When this check box is selected, approval of invoices is required before invoices can be paid.

This option is available if the Manual approval of purchase invoices is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Enable early payments, no check on invoice date When this check box is selected, you can create payments for the invoices posted to future periods and dates.
Validate document totals on entry When this check box is selected, the Amount field is displayed in the top part of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window (if selected). To save a document with the Balanced status, you must enter the document total in this field after reviewing the document.
Validate VAT totals on entry When this check box is selected, the VAT amount field is displayed in the top part of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window, where you enter the total VAT amount manually in the document.
If the amount is zero, use the application amount When this check box is selected and you save a supplier ledger payment with no payment amount specified in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window, the system automatically specifies a payment amount that is equal to the application amount. If this check box is cleared (the default value), the system will save the payment with zero payment amount if the Hold check box is selected, or report that the document is out of balance if the Hold check box is cleared.
Require supplier reference When this check box is selected, you must fill in the Supplier ref. field in data entry windows in the Supplier ledger, VAT, and Purchases workspaces. This check box also controls the Ext. ref. number field in the Journal vouchers (GL304000) window of the General ledger workspace.
Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number When this check box is selected, it indicates to the system that an error should be generated when a new document is created with a value in the Supplier ref. field that has already been used in the system.
Suggest applications for purchase invoices before release With this setting you can define that the system suggests the automatic application of credit notes and prepayments for purchase invoices.
### The Retainage settings section This functionality is available if the **Retainage support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Mass release of retainage invoices When this check box is selected, all retainage invoices will be automatically released.
Create and release retainage invoices individually When this check box is selected, retainage invoices will be individually created and released, not as an automatic mass operation.
Copy supplier ref. from original invoice to retainage invoice When this check box is selected, the supplier reference of the original invoice will be copied as a reference to the retainage invoice.
Require one project per document When this check box is selected, each document needs to be connected to a project.
### The Write-off section
Element Description
Write-off limit The maximum balance of a document that may be a subject to the selected write-off operation.
Reason code A reason code that defines an account, subaccount and description to be used for writing off balances for supplier invoices. If the reason code has assigned a cash account, you need to change it to a different account in the Reason codes (CS211000) window to allow you to post write-off transactions.
### The VAT recalculation settings section
Element Description
Purchase debit note description The default description to be used for purchase debit notes that are generated for documents that were paid early and that adjust the VAT and taxable amounts.
### The Expense Inbox section This section is shown only if the Expense integration has been activated.
Element Description
VAT category ID A VAT category for the suspense line. This should be a category that does not affect the VAT report.
Suspense account

An account on which the suspense line is registered.

The description of the suspense line shown on the invoice is built up from the external claim ID from Expense, the internal claim ID from Visma Net, and the claim description (example: 12345,75642: Travel to Helsinki).

Suspense subaccount A subaccount to which the suspense line will be registered.
Paid by company account

An account on which the suspense line is registered, when the expense receipt is marked as paid by the company. The description of the suspense line, as displayed on the invoice, consists of several elements: the external claim ID from Expense, the internal claim ID from Visma Net, and the claim description.

For example, a description might appear as follows: “3374700,000263: Travel to Stockholm.”

Paid by company subaccount A subaccount on which the suspense line is registered, when the expense receipt is marked as paid by the company. See also the description for the field above, Paid by company account.
### The Approval settings section
Element Description
Subaccount editing in Approval

You can select the method to be used for editing subaccounts in the document editor in Approval.

The options are:

Segment columns
– Displays a column for each segment of the subaccount. You can select a segment value for each segment by searching in the drop-down list.
Single column
– Displays a single column for a subaccount. You can select a segment value for each segment from the pop-up window.
Release document from Approval When this check box is selected and you send an invoice to Approval and approve it, the invoice comes back from Approval with the status Approved and released.
#### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Override payment date with current date When this check box is selected, the payment date of the invoices is replaced by the current date in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. So the payment is done immediately instead of a future date, regardless of the due date of the invoices.
Always take cash discount When this is activated, discount will be taken also for documents with the cash discount expired. The cash discount amount is calculated using the payment terms associated with the supplier.
Show open cash discount amounts When this is activated, invoices for which only the amount of cash discount is still open will be displayed.
Create one payment with invoices having the same payment date (when not using the Pay separately option)

With this option selected and when selecting several invoices in one payment for one supplier, the due date is considered for each invoice and the earliest due date will be the payment date in AutoPay.

Note

If the Pay separately option is selected, the system will create one payment for each invoice.

Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is 0 When a credit note is created with the intention to match the invoice amount, you have to apply the two documents to each other manually. When you activate this option, the system will match and process the invoices and credit notes where the amount to pay equals to zero.
## The Reporting settings tab The **Reporting settings** tab displays a list of predefined mailings for sending purchase orders and other documents to suppliers electronically via email. The mailing settings on this tab serve as the default values for supplier classes, which then become the default values for individual supplier mailings. The current version of Visma Net provides only one mailing for suppliers, the **PURCHASE ORDER** mailing. ### The Default sources table
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of the mailing.
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The supplier ledger report to be used by default as the body or attachment of the email, if a report is used rather than an email template.
Notification template

The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is used rather than a report.

CAUTION: For each mailing, you can use only one of the options as the means of communication: a report or a template.

Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no preferences have been specified for a particular recipient in the Suppliers (AP303000) window (for supplier contacts). Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, it indicates that this mailing is active. Emails will be generated only for active mailings.
### The Default recipients table You use the **Default recipients** table, described in the following table, to view and modify the list of default types of recipients for the selected mailing.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails:

Primary
A primary contact of the supplier.
Remittance
A remittance contact of the supplier.
Shipping
A shipping contact of the supplier.
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the documents of specific supplier classes or suppliers, or is otherwise associated with either of them.
Contact ID The specific contact. You can select a particular recipient only if you have selected Employee as the Contact type. The employee, if one is selected, will receive emails on behalf of all suppliers.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to the recipients of this type. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, it indicates that the contact of this type is active. Only active recipients receive the emails generated for this mailing.
Bcc When this check box is selected, it indicates that the contact of this type will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails.
## The Price/discount settings tab ### The Price maintenance section
Element Description
Supplier price update The method to be used to automatically update supplier prices based on supplier documents.
Load supplier prices by alternative item ID When this check box is selected, you can specify prices in supplier price worksheets by the alternative IDs of items, so that the system will find and populate appropriate item IDs automatically. The option is available if the Advanced Logistics group of features is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Price retention section
Element Description
Retention type

The way the history of prices will be retained. Select one of the following options:

Last price:
The last defined price is kept.
Fixed number of months:
The history of price changes is kept for the number of months specified in the Number of months field. The period is calculated back from the current system date.
Number of months The number of months the history of price changes should be kept. This field is available if the Fixed number of months option is selected in the Retention type field.
### The Discounts section
Element Description
Apply quantity discounts to

The way the system applies discounts defined by quantity.

Select one of the following options:

Document line UoM
The system applies the discounts to the quantity in the document line’s unit of measure (UoM).
Base UoM
The system converts the quantity in the document line’s UoM to the quantity in the base UoM and applies the discounts based on the calculated base quantity.
Approval document history (AP40104S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-history-ap40104s page In this window, you can view the details of any selected purchase document and its approval history. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approval document history (AP40104S) In this window, you can view the details of any selected purchase document and its approval history. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Pending approver The name of the pending approver of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Approver The name of the approver of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Type The type of the document.
Approval status The approval status of the document.
Document status The status of the document.
Supplier The supplier of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Terms The terms of payment of the document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Detail total The total amount of the document excluding VAT.
VAT taxable total The taxable amount of the document in total.
VAT exempt total The exempt amount of the document in total.
VAT total The total amount of VAT on the document.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax on the document.
Balance The total balance of the document.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference of the document.
Amount The total amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount selected for the document.
## The Document history table
Column Description
Approval status The approval status of the document.
Comment The comment entered when approving the document.
Pending approvers The approvers whose approval is still pending.
Approvers The approvers of the document.
Date The date of the approval transaction.
Approval document line history (AP40105S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-line-history-ap40105s page In this window, you can view the approval history of any selected purchase document by line. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approval document line history (AP40105S) In this window, you can view the approval history of any selected purchase document by line. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Ref. no. Select the reference number of the purchase document whose line approval history you want to view.
Line number Select the line of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Account The account on the document.
Subaccount The subaccount on the document.
Approval status The approval status of the document.
Only last item per line Select this check box to view the last status per line only.
Detail total The total amount of the document excluding VAT.
VAT taxable total The taxable amount of the document in total.
VAT exempt total The amount of the document that is exempt to VAT.
VAT total The total amount of VAT on the document.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax on the document.
Balance The total balance of the document.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the document.
Amount The total amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount selected for the document.
## The Document line history table
Column Description
Line number The number of the document line.
Approval status The approval status of the document line.
Pending approvers The approvers whose approval the document line is pending.
Approvers The approvers assigned to the document line.
Detail total The total amount of the document line excluding VAT.
Account The account on the document line.
Subaccount The subaccount on the document line.
Currency The currency of the document line.
Date The date of the document line.
Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s page You can use this window to approve Supplier ledger documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) You can use this window to approve Supplier ledger documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) for payment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to approve Supplier ledger documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) for payment. Only documents with the **Open** status are displayed on the list. You can select documents for approval using various criteria. If the **Require approval of invoices prior to payment** check box is not selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, supplier ledger documents are automatically approved for payment once they are released, and this window is not needed. ## What to do from this window + [Approve purchase invoices for payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment/) ## The window toolbar
Column Description
Send to Approval Click this button to send the selected lines to Approval.
Send all to Approval Click this button to send all displayed lines to Approval
Cancel Approval request Click this button to cancel the approval request for the selected lines.
Cancel all Approval requests Click this button to cancel the approval request for the all displayed lines.
## The top part
Element Description
Approval status

The status of the document in Approval.

The options are: New, Cancelled, Sent to Approval, Received in Approval, Pending, Rejected, Approved, Active workflow, and Error. View all displays all documents regardless of their status.

Document status

The status of the document itself.

The options are: Balanced, Printed, and Pre-released. View all displays all documents regardless of their status.

Due date less than or equal to The latest due date for the documents to be displayed.
Initial approver The initial approver of the documents to be displayed.
Supplier The supplier of the documents to be displayed.
Show only invoices missing attachments Select this check box to only show documents that are missing attachment (required for approval processing).
## The table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Button Description
Approval history This button redirects you to the Approval document history (AP40104S) window for the selected line.
Approval line history This button redirects you to the Approval document line history (AP40105S) window for the selected line.
Column Description
Type The type of the document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the document.
Approval status The status of the approval process.
Document status The status of the document.
Initial approver The initial approver of the document.
Supplier ref. The external number of the document (the number of the original purchase invoice) included for reference.
Supplier The identifier of the applicable supplier.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Pay date The pay date of the document, which the system assigns to the document on its approval. If the document is approved through this window, the pay date is the date when the document was approved.
Due date The due date of the supplier document.
Cash discount date The date when the cash discount from the supplier is available for the document.
Balance The document’s amount after the cash discount is taken.
Cash discount balance The amount of the cash discount taken.
Currency The currency of the document.
Approval Inbox (AP502010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-inbox-ap502010 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approval Inbox (AP502010) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process The green icon-confirmation icon is displayed in the window toolbar if the operation has completed successfully. The red icon-error icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met. Point to the red icon to view the error message.
Process all Click this to process all messages in the window table.
## The top part
Element Description
Inbox status

If you want to see messages that have a specific status, select one of the following values. The default status is New.

+

  • New - Displays all messages with the status New.
  • Handled - Displays all handled messages.
  • Error - Displays all messages with the status Error.
  • Skipped - Displays all messages that have been skipped.
Payload type
All
Displays messages with all payload types
Invoice
Displays invoice type messages
Time card
Displays time card type messages
Expense
Displays expense type messages
Employee/Supplier The number of the employee or supplier whose messages you want to see.
Ref. no. starts with To find messages with a certain reference number, type the first numbers of the reference.
New The number of new messages with the filter options.
Skipped The number of skipped messages with the filter options.
Error The number of erroneous messages with the filter options.
## The table
Button Description
Payload type The type of the payload, according to the selection in the top part.
Message type The type of the message.
Ref. no. The reference number of the message.
Employee/Supplier The employee or supplier connected with the message.
Created by The user who has created the message.
Inbox status The status of the message in Inbox.
Inbox status reason The reason for the status of the message in Inbox.
Message creation date The date when the message was created. Displayed after failed processing attempts.
Last modified date The date when the message was last modified.
Retry count The number of attempts the system tries to process the message.
Creation date The date when the message was created.
Created by The use who created the message.
Last modified by The user who last modified the message.
Message ID The ID of the message.
Message content The content of the message.
Document version The version of the document.
Document system ID The system ID of the document.

Related pages

Tasks

Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000 page You can use this window to approve supplier documents for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) You can use this window to approve supplier documents for payment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Only documents with the **Open** status appear on the list. + You can select the documents for approval using various criteria. If the **Require approval of purchase invoices prior to payment** check box is not selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, documents are automatically approved for payment once they are released, and this window is not needed. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display on the list.
Element Description
Selection date The date of approving invoices for payment.
Supplier class The supplier class for which documents should be displayed. If you select no supplier class, information for all suppliers that meet other selection criteria will be displayed.
Supplier The particular supplier for which documents should be displayed. If you select no supplier, information on all suppliers meeting other selection criteria will be displayed.
Currency The currency of the documents to be approved for payment.
Show approved for payment When this check box is selected, you will see documents that have been approved for payment.
Show not approved for payment When this check box is selected, you will see documents that are not currently approved for payment.
Pay date within x days When this check box is selected, documents will be displayed in the table if they should be paid during the number of days you specify in the unlabelled field.
Due date within x days When this check box is selected, documents will be displayed in the table if they are due in fewer than the number of days you specify in the unlabelled field.
Cash discount expires within x days When this check box is selected, documents will be displayed in the table if their discount expires in fewer than the number of days you specify in the unlabelled field.
Approved for payment A read-only field showing the total amount on documents approved for payment.
Documents total A read-only field showing the total on all documents listed in the window.
## The table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the Selection area.
Column Description
Type The type of the supplier document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the supplier document. Click the link to navigate to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window to display the document.
Description The description provided for the document.
Supplier no. The identifier of the applicable supplier.
Supplier name The supplier’s name.
Supplier bank account The bank account of the supplier.
Pay separately When this check box is selected, the document should be paid for separately.
Payment date The payment date of the document, which the system assigns to the document on its approval. If the document is approved through this window, the payment date is the date when the document was approved.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash discount date The date when the cash discount from the supplier is available for the document.
Balance The amount of the document amount after the cash discount is taken.
Cash discount balance The amount of the cash discount taken.
Currency The currency of the supplier document.
Payment location A supplier location associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method used. Payment methods can be created in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account The cash account selected for the document.
Supplier ref. The external number of the document (the number of the original supplier invoice) included for reference.

Related pages

Tasks

Batch payments (AP305000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000 page You can use this window to select a batch of payments for processing and to export the payments to a file by using the export scenario specified for the payment method in the window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch payments (AP305000) You can use this window to select a batch of payments for processing and to export the payments to a file by using the export scenario specified for the payment method in the window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction > [!NOTE] > You can view and modify outgoing payment batches only in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window on the **Payment status** tab - Details view. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Approve payments in AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay/) + [Send outgoing payments to AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay/) + [Send outgoing refunds to AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-refunds-to-autopay/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Send payments Sends the selected payments to the bank.
Re-sign payment Resigns the payments.
Approve in AutoPay Approves the payments in AutoPay and sends them to the bank.
## The top part By using the elements in the top part, you can select a batch of payments and view its details.
Element Description
Batch no. The batch number of the batch of payments. You can select a batch number to view (and act upon) a particular batch.
Status The status of the batch, which the system assigns automatically: On hold, Released, or Posted.
Hold When this check box is selected, the batch is on hold and cannot be exported.
Batch date The date when the batch was created.
Document ref. Any document that holds information about the batch as required by your company’s internal policies.
Cash account The cash account used for payment.
Payment method The payment method associated with the cash account. Only payment methods that allow batch creation appear on the list. Payment methods are defined in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Bank The bank that will process the batch of payments.
Batch serial no. The unique number automatically assigned to the batch.
Description A description of the batch, helping you to identify it.
Batch total The total amount for the batch, calculated as the sum of all payment amounts.
Upload time The time it took to upload the batch.
AutoPay status The status of the batch in AutoPay.
## The Supplier payments table This table contains a list of payment documents added to the batch.
Column Description
Type The type of payment document.
Ref. no. The payment’s reference number, which was automatically generated by the system. Click this number to open the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can view the details of the payment.
Supplier The ID of the supplier specified on the document.
Supplier name The name of the supplier specified on the document.
SWIFT/BIC The SWIFT/BIC number of the supplier.
Supplier bank account The bank account of the supplier specified on the document.
Location The supplier’s location.
Remittance contact The contact person connected with the document.
Payment date The date of payment.
Status The status of payment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Description The description provided for the payment.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment associated with the payment method.
Payment amount The payment amount.
Payment amount (currency) The amount of the payment in currency.
AutoPay status The status of the document in AutoPay.
Used creditor’s BIC/SWIFT The BIC/SWIFT account of the creditor used for payment.
Creditor account used The account of the creditor used for payment.
Change supplier details (AP50107S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/change-supplier-details-ap50107s page Through this window, you can change the details and VAT zone of any selected supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change supplier details (AP50107S) Through this window, you can change the details and VAT zone of any selected supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this to change the VAT zone of the supplier you have selected in the table.
Process all Click this to change the VAT zone of all suppliers that are displayed in the table, according to the selections you make in the top part of the window.
## The top part
Element Description
Supplier class The suppliers included in the supplier class you select here will be displayed in the table part.
Status The suppliers whose status is accordant with the status you select here will be displayed in the table.
VAT zone ID The ID of the VAT zone for the suppliers you want to list in the table.
Change VAT zone Select this check box when you want to change the VAT ID of a supplier/suppliers.
VAT zone The new VAT zone for the selected supplier/suppliers.
## The table
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier whose VAT zone you want to change.
Supplier name The name of the supplier whose VAT zone you want to change.
VAT zone The current VAT zone of the supplier.
Address The address of the supplier.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier.
City The city of the supplier.
Country The country of the supplier.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the supplier.
Location ID The location of the supplier.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person. Inherited from the supplier details in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Phone 1 The phone number of the supplier.
Email The email of the supplier.
Last purchase The date when the last purchase was made from the supplier.
Status The status of the supplier.
Supplier class The supplier class to which the supplier belongs.
Close financial periods (AP506000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ap506000 page You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Supplier ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (AP506000) You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Supplier ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can close a financial period in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. + When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well (if they have not already been closed). Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. To allow posting to closed periods, select the **Allow posting to closed periods** option in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Close a financial period in Supplier ledger](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/close-a-financial-period-in-supplier-ledger/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

The green OK icon appears in the window toolbar if the closing operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.

Unreleased documents Opens the All unreleased documents report to display open documents for the period (documents that have the On hold or Balanced status).
Prepare for closing

Opens the Prepare for closing (AP50700S) window.

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

The green OK icon appears in the window toolbar if the closing operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.

## The table The table displays all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. You can select one or more periods for closing and then click **Close periods**.
Column Description
Period The identifier of the financial period.
Description The description of the financial period.
Active When this check box is selected, the financial period is active.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Create batch payments (AP505000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000 page In this window, you select payments by their cash account and payment method in the top part, and view the list of payments that meet the criteria in the table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create batch payments (AP505000) In this window, you select payments by their cash account and payment method in the top part, and view the list of payments that meet the criteria in the table. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction In this window, you select payments by their cash account and payment method in the top part, and view the list of payments that meet the criteria in the table. You can then process all listed payments or only those you select. ## What to do from this window + [Create batch payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-batch-payments/) + [Create outgoing payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-outgoing-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Generates payments for the selected payment documents, and displays the payments to be printed one by one.
Process all Generates payments for all the listed documents and displays the payments to be printed one by one.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select payments to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Payment method The method of payment associated with the payments you want to process. Payment methods are created in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account The cash account to be used as a source account for payment.
Currency A read-only field that displays the currency of the cash account.
Next payment ref.

Shows the next available payment reference for the payment method.

The system generates the next reference number as the previous number incremented by 1, but you may type another number.

GL balance A read-only field that shows the balance of the cash account calculated based on the released general ledger transactions.
Available balance A read-only field displaying the balance of the cash account calculated in accordance with the options selected in the Receipts to add to available balances and Disbursements to deduct from available balances sections in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
Selection total A read-only field whose value is the total amount of the selected payment documents.
Number of payments A read-only field whose value is the total number of selected payment documents.
## The table This table displays a list of payment documents selected by the cash account and payment method specified in the top part.
Column Description
Payment ref. The payment ID, which was automatically generated by the system or manually entered as an external reference when the payment was saved.
Payment date The due date of the payment.
Type The type of the document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment automatically generated by the system, following the number series assigned to the particular document type.
Supplier no. The supplier specified on the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The supplier’s name.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Payment amount The amount after the cash discount was taken.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Payment terms (CS206500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500 page You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms (CS206500) You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Payment terms include the instalment option (one payment or multiple instalments), the payment schedule, and the terms for a cash discount (for only the single instalment option). Also, payment terms can be used as a schedule for overdue charges. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General information section You use the elements in this area to define a new set of payment terms and its settings, or to select an existing set of terms and view its settings.
Element Description
Terms ID The unique identifier for these payment terms. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 10 characters.
Description A detailed description of the payment terms. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Visible to

The target audience for which the terms are visible, which can be one of the following:

All
The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers.
Suppliers
The terms can be assigned to suppliers only.
Customers
The terms can be assigned to customers only.
Disabled
The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers.
## The Due day settings section
Element Description
Due date type

The method of due date calculation. The following options are available:

Fixed number of days
The payment is due a fixed number of days after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Day of next month
The payment is due on a particular day of the next month; you should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
End of the month
The payment is due at the end of the current month.
End of next month
The payment is due at the end of the next month.
Day of the month
The payment is due on a particular day of the current month. You should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
Fixed number of days starting next month
The payment is due a fixed number of days starting the next month after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Custom
With this option, you specify two due days that could be used; which due day is to be used depends on the time interval set for the document’s date. For example: You may specify one due day for documents issued in the first part of the month, and the second due day for documents issued in the second part of the month. You use the remaining elements in the Due date settings section to set the due days and their respective date ranges.
Move due date if on the weekend If the due date on the invoice falls onto a weekend (Saturday or Sunday), use the options in the drop-down to calculate it to the Friday before the due date or the Monday after it. With the option Keep the exact date the due date remains unchanged.
Due day 1 The first due day, which is used with certain Due date type options. Specify the number of days if the Fixed number of days option is selected, the day of the month if the Day of next month or Day of the month option is selected, and the first due day if the Custom option is selected.
Day from 1 The start day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 1 The end day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Due day 2 The second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day from 2 The start day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 2 The end day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
## The Cash discount settings section In this section, you provide the details of the cash discount included with this set of payment terms. You can specify a cash discount only if the **Single** instalment type is selected in the **Instalments settings** section.
Element Description
Discount type

The method of calculating the cash discount period, which can be one of the following options:

Fixed number of days
If this option is selected, the discount is available a set number of days after the document date. In the Discount day field, you should also specify the number of days.
Day of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available until a particular day in the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the next month.
End of month
When you select this option, the discount is available through the end of the month (that is, the month of the document date).
End of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available through the end of the next month (that is, the month after the document date).
Day of the month
If this option is selected, the discount is available until the particular day of the month when the document was issued. In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the month.
Fixed number of days starting next month
When you select this option, the discount is available a set number of days starting the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the number of days.
Discount day The number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the Discount type; this field is unavailable for some options.
Discount (%) The percent of the discount.
Delay days With the amount of days defined here, the cash discount will be considered when registering the payment on the invoice. For example, the cash discount date is set to the 1st of the month, the Delay days field has value 2. You register the payment on the 3rd of the month, and cash discount amount will be used.
## The Instalment settings section By using these elements, you can define how documents should be paid: in a single payment or in multiple instalments. If the amount is due in multiple instalments, you can also specify a percentage and a due date for each instalment; the due date for the first instalment is specified in the **Due day settings** section. Discounts are not available for multiple-instalment payment terms.
Element Description
Instalment type

The type of instalment, which can be one of the following options:

Single
If you select this option, other elements in this section become unavailable. You should also select the due date and other options for the single payment.
Multiple
If you select this option, payment is due in multiple instalments. You should also specify the method, frequency, and schedule of the instalments.
Number of instalments The specific number of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method.
Instalment frequency

The frequency of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method. The following options are available:

Weekly
The second instalment will be a week after the first one, and so on.
Monthly
The second instalment will be a month after the first one, and so on.
Semi-monthly
The second instalment will be a half of a month after the first one, and so on.
Instalment method

The method by which the amounts of instalments are calculated. Select one of the following options:

Equal parts
The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. The schedule of payments is defined by the due date, instalment frequency, and number of instalments specified.
VAT in the first instalment
The amount of the document (its total before taxes) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. The schedule of payments is defined by the instalment frequency and number of instalments specified.
Split by percent in table
The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages specified for each instalment in the Instalments schedule table below this section.
## The Instalments schedule table
Column Description
Days The number of days from the due date on which a particular instalment is due. You must use an integer between 0 (due date) and 31.
Percent The percent of a document total. As you add a new instalment, the percent is automatically adjusted to make all instalments total 100 percent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Export batch payments (AP50560S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/export-batch-payments-ap50560s page In this window, you can export the batch payments connected with any selected cash account or batch having not exported payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export batch payments (AP50560S) In this window, you can export the batch payments connected with any selected cash account or batch having not exported payments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Export batch payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/export-batch-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Export payment Click to export the batch payment selected in the table.
Export all payments Click to export all batch payments displayed in the table.
## The top part
Element Description
Cash account To view batch payments with a certain cash account, select the cash account here.
Batch no. To view the batch payments with a certain batch number, select the batch number here.
## The table
Column Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Cash account The cash account of the payment.
Payment method The payment method of the payment.
Batch date The date of the batch in which the payment is included.
Description The description of the payment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Batch total The total amount of the batch in which the payment is included.
AutoPay status

The status of the payment in AutoPay. The options are:

  • Exported
  • Not exported
  • Export error
  • Pending signing
  • New
  • Cancelled
  • Approved
  • Sending to bank
  • Error sending to bank
  • Accepted by bank
  • Cancelled in bank
  • Rejected by bank
  • Paid
  • Completed
  • Error
  • Unknown response
  • Handled manually
  • Manually created
Generate VAT purchase debit notes (AP504500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-vat-purchase-debit-notes-ap504500 page In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which the system has applied a value-added tax reduced based on cash discounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate VAT purchase debit notes (AP504500) In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which the system has applied a value-added tax reduced based on cash discounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction For these taxes, in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, VAT has been selected in the **VAT type** field and **Reduces taxable amount on early payment** has been selected in the **Cash discount** field. When you generate the VAT purchase credit notes, the system releases them, applies the cash discount amounts to the appropriate documents, and closes the documents. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this to generate a purchase debit note from the selected document.
Process all Click this to generate purchase debit notes from all the documents in the table.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, described in the following table, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display on the list.
Element Description
Date The date of the documents you want to process.
Branch The branch to which the document belongs. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches.
Supplier The supplier connected with the documents you want to process.
Consolidate purchase credit notes by supplier When this is selected, the system creates one consolidated purchase credit note per supplier.
Purchase credit note date When the Consolidate purchase credit notes by supplier check box is selected, you can select the date that the consolidated credit note gets.
Period When the Consolidate purchase credit notes by supplier check box is selected, the consolidated credit note will be created to the period selected here. It has to match the date selected above.
## The table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches.
Supplier The supplier of the VAT purchase debit note.
Document type The specific type of the document, Purchase invoice or Credit adjustment.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Doc. date The date when the document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The amount of the VAT purchase.
Cash discount The cash discount given for the document.
Payment terms The payment terms used on the document.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the specific payment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Generate recurring transactions (AP504000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000 page This window allows you to execute one or multiple schedules that automate the creation of supplier ledger documents based on predefined templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions (AP504000) This window allows you to execute one or multiple schedules that automate the creation of supplier ledger documents based on predefined templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + The schedules you want to run are filtered based on the date you specify in the **Execution date** field. + You also need to define the condition that will stop the schedules from running. When you run a schedule, the system uses the original scheduled documents as templates to create similar documents. + For each executed schedule, once the necessary documents have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed** date. + No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. ## What to do from this window + [Generate a recurring invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-a-recurring-invoice/) + [Generate recurring supplier transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-recurring-supplier-transactions/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run Runs the schedules you have selected (by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table) and generates documents with the Open status.
Run all Runs all schedules in the table.
New schedule Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window, from which you can create a new schedule.
## The top part In this area, you specify the criteria that the system uses for selecting the schedules to be loaded to the table and determining when the schedule executions should be stopped.
Element Description
Execution date The date that the system uses to filter the schedules to be loaded to the table. Schedules with a next execution date that is on or before the date you set here will be included. If you want to see all schedules, leave this field empty. By default, it displays the current business date.
Stop on execution date An option button indicating that the date you specify in the Execution date field will be used as the date when the system stops running the schedules.
Stop after number of executions An option button that allows you to set a limit on how many times the system runs schedules. Specify the desired number of schedule executions in the adjacent field. Once this limit is reached, the system will stop running the schedules automatically.
## The table This table contains the list of active schedules with due dates in the specified date range. Use the check boxes to select schedules for processing.
Column Description
Schedule ID

The schedule’s unique identifier.

Click the number to open the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window as a dialog window to view the details of the selected schedule.

Description The user-defined description of the schedule.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date The expiration date for the schedule.
Executed (times) The number of times the documents attached to the schedule were generated.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule may be executed.
Next execution The date when the documents should be generated next.
Last executed The date when the documents were last generated.
Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s section In this window, you can view your invoices by their status and, for example, view invoice details and update supplier information. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) In this window, you can view your invoices by their status and, for example, view invoice details and update supplier information. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## What to do from this window + [Correct invoices with errors](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/correct-invoices-with-errors/) + [Process new invoices from AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/process-new-invoices-from-autoinvoice/) + [Connect a supplier to a blocked invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/connect-a-supplier-to-a-blocked-invoice/) + [Create a new supplier for a blocked invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/create-a-new-supplier-for-a-blocked-invoice/) + [Update supplier details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/update-supplier-details/) + [Rematch invoices with unrecognised supplier details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/rematch-invoices-with-unrecognised-supplier-details/) + [View invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices/) + [View invoice details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process The green icon-confirmation icon in the window toolbar signifies a successful operation. Conversely, the red icon-error icon indicates that the operation was cancelled due to unmet required conditions. Hover over the red icon to view the error message. Note that this option is unavailable if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.
Process all

Click this to process all documents in the window table.

This option is not available if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.

Inquiries The inquiries connected with this window.
Fix attachments Click this to fix the attachments errors in the selected invoice or invoices. This option is available only if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.
Fix all attachments Click this to fix the attachments errors in all invoices. This option is available only if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.
## The top part
Element Description
Branch ID The ID of the branch you want to see supplier documents for.
Inbox status

To see documents having a specific status, select one of the following values. The default status is New.

+

  • New - Displays all documents with the status New.
  • Blocked - Displays documents that come from suppliers who are not registered in Visma Net.
  • Error - Displays all documents with the status Error.
  • Attachment errors - Displays all documents that have attachment errors.
Supplier The name of the supplier you want to see documents for.
Invoice date The invoice date of the document, which you can select from the calendar.
Show only excluded documents When this check box is selected, only excluded documents are displayed in the table.
Please KYC verify the company for receiving invoices from AutoInvoice in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window.

As of 1.7.2022, all new customers and branches wanting to use AutoInvoice for sending and receiving invoices, will need to sign the KYC verification agreement from AutoInvoice. You will see this message if you have not done the KYC verification yet.

In the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window, the The AutoInvoice setting section, you can verify your company by clicking on the Verify KYC button and filling in a company signatory’s email address. The signatory will receive an email which contains a link and password to access Visma Sign, where the signatory can view and sign the agreement. After completion of the process, your company will be able to use AutoInvoice.

## The table
Button Description
View details Click here to see further details about a specific document in the table. The document opens in the Invoice details window, where you can see its PDF version and also the document details and the approval information.
Create supplier Click here to create a new supplier for the document.
Update supplier Click here to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with changed details from the incoming document.
View rules Click here to view the Invoice inbox rules that are defined to the supplier of the selected invoice. The button opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window with the Inbox rules view.
Ignore supplier validation Click here if you do not want to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with the new information from the incoming document.
Validate manually Click here to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net manually with the new information from the incoming document.
Preview invoice Click here to see how the invoice would look, if it was created with these rules. The invoice will not be actually created.
Column Description
Branch The ID of the company branch.
Edited This check box is selected if the document has been edited.
Origin How the invoice has been imported to Visma Net. The options are Scanned and Electronic.You can change the document type of inbox documents whose origin is scanned.
Action

The processing action planned for the listed documents. The available actions are:

Hold - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Hold.

Release - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Open, if Automatically post on release is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) (this is the default action in Visma Net ).

Send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Balanced which is sent to Approval.

Pre-book - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released and requires an expense reclassification. This status is only used if the Expense reclassification functionality is activated in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Pre-book and send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released, which requires expense reclassification (this status is available if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), and which is then sent to Approval.

Exclude from processing - No purchase document is created or processed, it remains in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Note

You can set default action for every invoice in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window by selecting the desired action in the Default action for invoice inbox field.

Inbox status

The status of the document after arrival or last processing in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Statuses before processing/editing

New
– A new document that has been received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Blocked
A new document received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) from a supplier without a record in Visma Net

Statuses after processing/editing

Sent for approval
– The document was processed and sent to Approval. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) (AP301000).
Validated
The document was processed and validated. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Manually validated
The document was manually validated. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Deleted
– The document was deleted. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Error
– When the document was processed, the system returned an error.
Document status

The status of the document. The status of an existing document can be one of the following:

On hold
The document is On hold.
Balanced
The document has the status Balanced.
Voided
View only documents with the status Voided.
Scheduled
The document has the status Scheduled. You can schedule documents in the Purchase invoices (AP301000 window.
Open
The document has the status Open.
Closed
The document has the status Closed.
Printed
The document has the status Printed.
Pre-released
The document has the status Pre-released. Documents get this status if you have clicked Pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Pending approval
The document has the status Pending approval.
Rejected
The document has the status Rejected.
Reserved
The document has the status Reserved.
Supplier no. The supplier specified on the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The supplier’s name on the document processed from the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Imported supplier reference The supplier reference on the document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Invoice no. The invoice number on the document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Buyer’s order no. The order number of the buyer connected with the document.
Supplier contact The supplier contact (name), as imported with the document.
Ref. no. The number that identifies the document in the system, as generated by the system according to the number series assigned to documents of this type in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Currency ID The currency of the document on the line.
Terms ID The unique ID for the payment terms used for the document.
Invoice date The date of the original document from Supplier ledger. You can change the date before the releasing the document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the due date in the xml file or the supplier’s payment terms (check box Use due date from Terms settings in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000).
Supplier bank account The supplier’s bank account as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Supplier’s bankgiro The supplier’s bankgiro as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Supplier’s Plusgiro acct. The supplier’s Plusgiro account as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Supplier IBAN The supplier’s IBAN number as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Balance The balance of the document.
Actual balance The actual balance of the document.
Arrival date The arrival date of the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Processing date The processing date of the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Account ID The general ledger account assigned to the supplier or manually entered in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Comment The comment written to the document.
Currency rate The currency rate used for this document.
Description The description of the document.
Doc. type

The type of document on the line. The document types are displayed as three-letter codes in this field, and can be explained as follows:

INV - Invoice

ACR - Credit adjustment

ADR - Purchase credit note

HK - Payment

VCK - Void payment

PPM - Prepayment

PPR - Prepayment request

In edit mode When this check box is marked, the document is in the edit mode.
Initial approver The initial approver of the document as entered in the Invoice details window (the window that is displayed when you click View details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) ).
Credit note

A column that indicates whether the document is a credit note or not. Possible values are:

True - The document is a credit note.

False - the document is not a credit note.

Payment ref. no. The payment reference number as entered on the document in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Rounding diff. The difference between the original document amount (including the VAT amount calculated by the system) and the rounded document amount (including the VAT amount modified by a user for VAT-inclusive items).
Status reason The reason for the Inbox status Error for the document.
Supplier VAT registration ID The supplier’s VAT registration ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier VAT zone The supplier’s VAT zone, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier corporate ID The supplier’s corporate ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier differences status

The status for the update process of possible differences between imported supplier details from the document, and the existing supplier details as registered in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. The possible statuses are:

Supplier is updated
The supplier details have been updated.
Supplier update is required
Click Update supplier to update the supplier’s details.
Supplier update is ignored
The incoming supplier details have been ignored.
Supplier email address The supplier’s email address as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier location The supplier’s location as registered on the Locations tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier’s telephone The supplier’s telephone number as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier web address The address of the supplier’s website, as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Total VAT exempt The document total on the document that is exempt from VAT.
Total VAT taxable The document total on the document that is subject to VAT.
VAT total The total payable VAT amount to be paid for the document.
Attachment errors Here you see the names of the invoice attachments that cannot be imported. Invoices with attachment errors are automatically set to status On hold.
Retry attachment If attachments are missing when an invoice sent from AutoInvoice, you can re-download the attachments when this option is selected.
Attachment retry count The number of times the system tries to re-download the attachments.
Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s page In this window, you can view the status of purchase documents in Invoice inbox. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) In this window, you can view the status of purchase documents in Invoice inbox. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [View invoices in the Invoice inbox - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices-in-the-invoice-inbox-overview/) ## The top part
Element Description
Branch ID The ID of the branch you want to see purchase documents for.
Inbox status

If you want to see documents that have a specific status, select one of the following values. The default status is New.

View all
Displays documents with all statuses.
New
Displays all documents with the status New.
Blocked
Displays supplier documents that come from a supplier who is not registered in Visma Net.
Sent for Approval
Displays all documents that have been sent to Approval.
Validated
Displays all documents with the status Validated.
Manually validated
Displays all documents that have been manually validated.
Deleted
Displays all documents with the status Deleted.
Error
Displays all documents with the status Error.
Supplier The name of the supplier you want to see supplier documents for.
From date The period from which you want to see documents in this overview.
To date The period until which you want to see documents in this overview.
## The table The columns in the table display information about each of the documents in this window.
Element Description
View details (button) Click View details to see further details about a specific document in the table. The document is opened in the Invoice details window, where you can see its PDF version and also the document details and the approval information.
Update supplier (button) Click this button to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with changed details from the incoming document.
Ignore supplier validation (button) Click this button if you do not want to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with the new information from the incoming document.
Default column headings
Branch The ID of the company branch whose invoice status you want to view.
Action

The processing action planned for the listed documents. Available actions are:

Hold - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Hold.

Release - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Open, if Automatically post on release is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) (this is the default action in Visma Net ).

Send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Balanced which is sent to Approval.

Pre-book - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released and requires an expense reclassification. This status is only used if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated.

Pre-book and send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released, which requires expense reclassification (this status is available if Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), and which is then sent to Approval.

Exclude from processing - a purchase document is nor created or processed, it remains in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Origin How the invoice has been imported to Visma Net. The options are Scanned and Electronic.
Inbox status

The status of the document after arrival or last processing in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Statuses before processing/editing

New
– a new supplier document that has been received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Blocked
a new supplier document received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) from an supplier without a record in Visma Net

Statuses after processing/editing

Sent to Approval
– The supplier document has been processed and sent to Approval. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Rejected in Approval
The supplier document has been rejected in Approval.
Validated
The supplier document has been processed and validated. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Manually validated
The supplier document has been manually validated. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Deleted
– The supplier document has been deleted. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Error
– When the supplier document was processed, the system returned an error.
Approval status

The status of the document in the Approval workflow. The status of an existing document can be one of the following:

View all
View documents with all approval statuses.
New
View documents with the status New.
Cancelled
View documents with the status Cancelled in Approval. This is the status after you have clicked Cancel (the Send to Approval button changes to Cancel when you have sent a document to Approval ).
Sent to Approval
View documents with the status Sent to Approval.
Received in Approval
View documents with the status Received in Approval.
Pending
View documents with the status Pending. This status is displayed when documents are on a valid approval flow and are pending approval.
Rejected
View documents that have been rejected by Approval.
Approved
View documents with the status Approved. This status indicates that the document has been approved and you can now release documents that are ready to be paid. In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can set up automatic release of approved documents.
Active workflow
View documents with the status Active workflow. This status is displayed only during a brief system check, to find out whether the settings for sending documents to Approval are correct
Error
The document encountered an unspecified error. Please try again.
Invoice status

The status of the supplier document. The status of an existing document can be one of the following:

On hold
The document is On hold.
Balanced
The document has the status Balanced.
Voided
View only documents with the status Voided.
Scheduled
The document has the status Scheduled. You can schedule documents in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Open
The document has the status Open.
Closed
The document has the status Closed.
Printed
The document has the status Printed.
Pre-released
The document has the status Pre-released. Documents get this status if you have clicked Pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window
Pending approval
The document has the status Pending approval.
Rejected
The document has the status Rejected.
Reserved
The document has the status Reserved.
Pending printing
The document is pending printing.
Supplier no. The supplier specified on the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The supplier’s name on the purchase document.
Imported supplier reference The supplier reference on the purchase document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Invoice no. The document number on the purchase document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Supplier contact The supplier contact (name), as imported with the purchase document.
Ref. no. The number that identifies the purchase document in the system, as generated by the system according to the number series assigned to documents of this type in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Currency ID The currency of the document on the line.
Created date The date when the document was created.
Origin is scan When this is marked, the invoice has been scanned into the system.
Scanned invoices: Calculate net amount based on VAT amount When this is marked, the system calculates the net amount of the invoices based on their VAT amount in case the origin of the invoice is scan.
Import header amounts by VAT code When this is marked, the system imports the header amounts of the invoices by their VAT code.
Create invoices with one line for each VAT rate When this is marked, the system does not create an own line for each invoice, but one combined line for invoices with the same VAT rate.
Term ID The unique ID for the payment terms used for the purchase document.
Invoice date The date of the original document from Supplier ledger. You can change the date before releasing the document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due in accordance with the supplier’s payment terms.
Supplier bank account The supplier’s bank account as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the supplier document.
Supplier IBAN The supplier’s IBAN number as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window or imported with the purchase document.
Supplier BIC (Swift) The supplier’s BIC (Swift) number as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window or imported with the purchase document.
Balance The balance of the purchase document after VAT (if inclusive) and the discount.
Total VAT taxable The document total on the purchase document that is subject to VAT.
Total VAT exempt The document total on the purchase document that is exempt from VAT.
Rounding diff. The difference between the original document amount (including the VAT amount calculated by the system) and the rounded document amount (including the VAT amount modified by a user for VAT-inclusive items).
VAT total The total payable VAT amount to be paid for the document.
Initial approver The initial approver of the document as entered in the Invoice details window (the window that is displayed when you click View details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Comment Comment related to approval as entered for the document as entered in the Invoice details window (the window that is displayed when you click View details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Arrival date The arrival date of the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Processing date The processing date o f the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Additional column headings
Account The general ledger account assigned to the supplier or manually entered in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Currency rate The currency rate used for this document.
Description A description of the document, as imported with it.
Doc. type

The type of purchase document on the line. The document types are displayed as three-letter codes in this field, and can be explained as follows:

INV - invoice

ACR - Credit adjustment

ADR - Edit adjustment

CHK - Payment

VCK - Void payment

PPM - Prepayment

REF - Refund

PPR - Prepayment request

Credit note

A column that indicates whether the document is a credit note or not. Possible values are:

True - The document is a credit note.

False - The document is not a credit note.

Payment ref. no. The payment reference number as entered on the document in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Status reason The reason for the Inbox status Error for the document.
Supplier VAT registration ID The supplier’s VAT registration ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier corporate ID The supplier’s corporate ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier difference status

The status for the update process of possible differences between imported supplier details from the document, and the existing supplier details as registered in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. Possible statuses are:

  • Supplier is updated - the supplier details have been updated.
  • Supplier update is required - Click Update supplier to update the supplier’s details.
  • Supplier update is ignored - The incoming supplier details have been ignored.
Supplier email address The supplier’s email address as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier phone no. The supplier’s telephone number as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier web address The address of the supplier’s website, as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Attachment errors Here you see the names of the invoice attachments that cannot be imported. Invoices with attachment errors are automatically set to status On hold.
Retry attachment If attachments are missing when an invoice sent from AutoInvoice, you can re-download the attachments when this option is selected.
Attachment retry count The number of times the system tries to re-download the attachments.
Invoice Inbox rules (AP206000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-rules-ap206000 page In this window, you can to create invoice processing rules based on supplier and values from Visma XML. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice Inbox rules (AP206000) In this window, you can to create invoice processing rules based on supplier and values from Visma XML. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction The rules will be applied when processing invoices from Invoice inbox. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window fields
Field Description
Rule ID The ID of the Inbox rule. Define the number series for the rules in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Active When this check box is selected, the rule is active.
Description The description of the rule.
### The Conditions section
Field Description
Branch The branch to which the rule applies. If you leave the field blank, the rule applies to all branches. This field is visible only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier

The supplier to whom the rule applies.

When the supplier has the setting Create invoice with one line for each VAT rate or Import header amounts by VAT code selected, the line level Invoice Inbox rules will not apply and a warning message will be shown.

Source field in invoice The field on the invoice that is used as the source detail when searching for matching invoices for the rule.
Condition The condition that is used on the value of the source field.
Value The value that is searched from the source field of the invoice and interpreted according to the selected condition.
Priority The priority of the rule. If there are overlapping rules, the one with a higher priority will be used.
### The Values in Visma Net section
Field Description
Account The account to which the rule applies.
Subaccount The subaccount to which the rule applies.
Location The location to which the rule applies.
Deferral code The deferral code based on the value in the xml file.
Project The project to which the rule applies.
Project task The project task to which the rule applies.
Initial approver (document level) The initial approver of the invoice on the document level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Initial approver (line level) The initial approver of the invoice on the line level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Manual payments (AP30200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ap30200s page In this window, you can create outgoing payments for open documents in Supplier ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manual payments (AP30200S) In this window, you can create outgoing payments for open documents in Supplier ledger. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Process several payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-several-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create payments Click this to create payments from the invoices you have selected in the table part.
Get balance from bank Click this to get the balance of the payments from the bank.
View invoice Click this to view the invoice selected in the table part in the Purchase invoices pop-up window.
## The top part
Element Description
Payment method The payment method used to pay the payment.
Cash account The cash account connected with the payments to process.
Due date The due date of the payment.
Payment date The payment date of the payment.
Financial period The financial period to which the payment belongs.
Show open cash discount amounts Select this check box to show the open cash discount amounts of the payments.
Total eligible payments The total amount of the payments in the table.
Total selected payments The amount of the payments selected in the table.
## The table
Column Description
Payment ref. The payment reference of the payment.
Location The location of the supplier on the payment.
Document type The type of the payment document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the payment.
Description The description of the payment.
Amount paid The amount paid on the payment.
Cash discount taken The cash discount taken on the payment.
Balance The balance of the payment.
Due date The due date of the payment.
Supplier ref. The supplier’s reference on the payment.
Currency The currency in which the payment is paid.
Post period The period to which the payment is posted.
Supplier The number of the supplier on the payment.
Supplier name The name of the supplier on the payment.
Non-stock items (IN202000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000 page You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Non-stock items (IN202000) You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Non-stock items are not kept in a warehouse, so they are immediately available for purchase when they are ordered. For details on these items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

Update cost
To update the cost of the selected non-stock item
View restriction groups
To navigate to the Restriction groups by item (IN103020) window, so that you can view or change the restriction groups that have access to the non-stock item.
Change the item ID
To change the ID of the currently selected non-stock item
Inquiries

Provides quick access to inquiry forms as follows:

Sales prices
To open the Sales prices (AR202000) window and view or edit sales prices for the selected non-stock item.
Supplier prices
To open the Supplier prices (AP202000) window and view or edit supplier prices for the selected non-stock item.
## The top part In this area, you can select an item by its ID to view its information, or you can create a record for a new non-stock item.
Element Description
Item ID

The unique alphanumeric identifier of the non-stock item.

The structure of identifiers is defined by the INVENTORY segmented key in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.

Note

At a later time, you can change the non-stock item ID by selecting Change ID on the Actions menu in the toolbar.

Item status

The status of the non-stock item. You can select one of the following options:

Active
Indicates that the item can be used in inventory operations, such as issues and receipts.
No sales
Indicates that the item cannot be sold.
No purchases
Indicates that the item cannot be purchased.
No request
Indicates that the item cannot be used on requisition requests.
Inactive
Indicates that no inventory operations are allowed for the non-stock item.
Marked for deletion
Indicates that the item is marked for deletion. No inventory operations are allowed, but the record will be kept in the database if any inventory transactions were related to it.
Description A brief description of the non-stock item.
Work group The work group that is responsible for the non-stock item.
Product manager The product manager who is responsible for the non-stock item.
## The General information tab On this tab, you can define or change the default settings for a non-stock item. You can also specify its unit conversion rules. ### The Item defaults section By using the elements in the section, you can assign this item to an item class, a posting class, and a price class, and you can specify other default properties.
Element Description
Item class

The item class the item is associated with; only item classes for non-stock items appear on the list for selection.

Item classes, which are used to group stock items and provide default settings for new items of the class, are defined in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Type

The non-stock item type. You can select one of the following options:

Non-stock item
A general type of non-stock items
Labour
A type of non-stock items to be used as labour hour rates.
Service
A type of non-stock items to be used as service fees
Charge
A type of non-stock items that are used as charge rates
Expense
A type of non-stock items that are added to documents to designate specific expenses
Posting class

The posting class the item is associated with.

You can use posting classes to group non-stock items with similar properties and provide default settings used to post inventory transactions related to the items to the general ledger. The posting classes are defined in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

Is a kit

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a kit.

The components of the kit can be specified by using the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

Webhook notification

When this check box is selected and saved for an item, you will be notified regarding changes.

The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the item.

VAT category The VAT category of the non-stock item. By default, this is the VAT category specified for the item class to which this item has been assigned. If needed, another VAT category can be selected for the item.
Default warehouse

The warehouse whose settings can be used for this non-stock item on sales orders or purchase orders.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Require receipt

A check box that you select to require that the system create a purchase receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, the system will not generate any inventory transactions for the non-stock item.

Require shipment

A check box you select to require that the system create a sales order receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, you cannot have the system generate any inventory transactions for this non-stock item.

Complete purchase order line

Choose between:

  • By amount
  • By quantity
Reverse charge item

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a reverse charge item.

Note

This check box is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

External ID

This field is automatically populated if the non-stock item is linked to an external expense type in the Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S) window.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

### The Unit conversion section By using the unit conversion table, you can set up conversion rules between different units of measure used for this item. The unit conversion parameters are specified with respect to the UoM selected as the base unit for the non-stock item. This table is only available if the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Column Description
From unit The unit of measure for which the conversion parameters are specified.
Multiply/divide

The operation to be performed for unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform conversions from different units of measure to the UoM specified as the base unit.

Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation specified in the Multiply/divide column.
To unit The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
### The Unit of measurement section In this section, you can select the base unit of measure (UoM) for the non-stock item. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can also specify the UoMs to be used as sales and purchase units for the non-stock item, and the conversion rules for these units and other UoMs that can apply to the item (available from the item class). You can select UoMs from the list of UoMs available for the item class or type new UoMs.
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for the non-stock item.
Sales unit

The UoM used as the sales unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Purchase unit

The UoM used as the purchase unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

## The Price/cost information tab On this tab, you can view and set the default price and the pending standard cost for the non-stock item in the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. ### The Price management section Here you can specify settings related to the management of prices.
Element Description
Price class The item price class associated with the non-stock item. These classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar price calculation methods, are defined in the Item price classes (IN209000) window.
Price work group The work group responsible for product pricing. Select the pricing work group for the non-stock item.
Price manager The manager responsible for the product pricing.
Subject to commission

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission should be calculated on the sale of this non-stock item.

The check box is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Min. mark-up (%) The minimum mark-up percentage defined for this non-stock item.
Mark-up (%) The mark-up percentage to be used for setting the price for the item.
List price The manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP) of this non-stock item.
Default price

The price of the non-stock item.

This price is used as the default price if there are no other prices (from any price list) defined for this item in the Supplier ledger workspace.

### The Standard cost section
Element Description
Pending cost

The standard cost to be assigned to the non-stock item when the costs are updated.

You can type the cost directly into the field.

Pending cost date

The date when the pending cost becomes effective.

You can select the date for a pending cost.

Current cost The current standard cost of the non-stock item.
Effective date The date when the current standard cost became effective.
Last cost The standard cost assigned to the non-stock item before the current standard cost was set.
### The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section
Element Description
ROT or RUT deductible item Select this check box if the item should be used for ROT or RUT deduction.
ROT Select this option if the work is related to ROT deduction (repairs, conversion, extension).
RUT Select this option if the work is related to RUT deduction (cleaning, maintenance, laundry).
Type

Select one of the following types:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost
Type of work

The following work types are available for RUT:

  • Babysitting
  • Cleaning
  • Cloth maintenance
  • Furniture
  • Gardening
  • IT services
  • Kitchen appliance
  • Laundry
  • Personal care
  • Relocation service
  • Snow job
  • Supervision of housing
  • Transport to sales

The following work types are available for ROT:

  • Bricklaying
  • Construction
  • Drain work
  • Electricity work
  • Glass work
  • Painting
  • Plumbing
## The Supplier details tab This tab contains information about the supplier from which the item is purchased and the supplier's prices for the item.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is active.
Default

This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is the default supplier for this item.

Select this check box to mark the supplier that is the main supplier of the item.

When you create a purchase order to purchase an item, the default supplier is selected for this purchase.

Supplier no. The ID of the supplier. Supplier settings are specified in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item is purchased.
Location

The supplier location from which the item is purchased, which by default is the supplier’s default location. These locations are defined for the supplier in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Purchase unit

The unit of measure in which the item is purchased.

This UoM is specified on the General settings tab of this window.

Supplier item ID The item ID used by the supplier for this item.
Currency ID The currency used by the supplier to charge for the item.
Last supplier price

Read only.

This column shows the last supplier price defined for the item.

## The Cross-reference tab You use the **Cross-reference** tab to maintain cross-references between the item ID of the non-stock item used in your company and the identifiers used by your suppliers and customers for the item.
Column Description
Alt. item ID type

The type of alternate codification used for the item, You can select one of the following options:

Customer part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the customer part number.
Supplier part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the supplier part numbers.
Global
You use this type to maintain the cross-references between the item ID and the global codification.
Barcode
You use this type to specify (or enter it by using a barcode scanner) a bar code for the item ID.
Supplier/customer The supplier or customer (by its ID) that uses the alternative identification for this non-stock item.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the non-stock item as used by the supplier or customer.
Description Any comments applicable to the specified cross-reference.
## The Packaging tab This tab contains information about the measurements of the item.
Element Description
Weight The weight of the item.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight of the item.
Volume The volume of the item.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the item volume.
## The Deferral settings tab You use this tab to specify how deferrals should be performed for this non-stock item when it is sold or purchased. If no deferral code is assigned to the item, no deferrals will be performed, and the revenue or expense will be recognised immediately. If a code is assigned to the item, revenue from its sales will be recognised according to the deferral code. If this non-stock item is a package, also referred to as a multiple delivery arrangement (MDA), specify how the item price can be split into components (separate units of accounting) that use different methods of revenue recognition to comply with revenue recognition regulations in your country. For each component, you can assign an individual deferral code in the **Revenue components** table.
Element Description
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to this non-stock item.

The code specifies how the revenue from the sale of this item will be recognised. The deferral codes are defined in the Deferral codes (DR202000) window.

Default term

The date range defined for deferred revenue recognition (for example, 2 years for a two-year customer support subscription that you sell).

The field is available for editing only if the Flexible by period, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method is selected for the deferral code selected in the Deferral code field.

The maximum value is 10000. Possible time units are year(s), month(s), week(s), and day(s).

Use component subaccounts This check box indicates (if selected) that the component subaccount is used to account for deferred revenue.
Total percentage

The total percentage of the item price as split among components.

This value is calculated automatically as the sum of the percentages assigned to the components if the item is sold as a package and consists of components.

When the item is not a package, the total percentage is set to 100.

### The Revenue components table In this table, you can add detailed information about the item's components to be used for deferrals. Each component can be assigned a specific deferral code and a percentage or fixed amount of the item price that will be used for deferrals when the item is sold.
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the component of this non-stock item, which is sold as a package.
Sales account The sales account used for this component.
Sales sub. The sales subaccount used for this component.
UoM The unit of measure used for this component.
Quantity The quantity of the specified units for this component of the non-stock item.
Deferral code The deferral code that has been specified for this component.
Default term

The date range defined for the process of the deferred revenue or expense recognition (for example, 6 months for a six-month support license).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days, or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.

Default term UOM

The unit of measure for the default term: year(s), month(s), week(s), or day(s).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.

Allocation method

The method used to allocate the document amount between the components. The following options are available:

Percentage
The component price will be computed as the percentage of the total package price. If you select this option, the Percentage column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the percentage defined for this component.
Fixed amount
The component price will be defined as a fixed price. If you select this option, the Fixed amount column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the amount defined for this component.
Residual
This method applies to the non-deferral components. The price for such a component will be defined as the amount that will remain after the system deducts the deferred revenues of the other components from the total package amount.
Fixed amount The fixed amount of the item price assigned to the component if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Allocation method column.
Percentage The percentage of the item price for this component if the Percentage option is selected in the Allocation method column.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab contains information about the default general ledger accounts used to post transactions related to this non-stock item. The specified accounts and subaccounts are mostly used as the sources of options for the posting settings of the item defined by its posting class.
Element Description
Expense accrual account

For a non-stock item, that is a component of a stock kit, this account (of the Expense or Liability type) will be used to accrue the costs (standard costs) of non-stock components in the process of kit assembly, if the option Item is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the General ledger accounts tab in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

For a Labour type item, the expense accrual account is used to accrue the cost of labour on projects (the account is credited on release of time cards). The account will be used for time card related transactions if Labour item accrual is selected as the Expense accrual account source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Expense accrual sub.

The subaccount to be used as the default expense accrual subaccount for this non-stock item.

For kit assembly related transactions, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the posting class (the Combine inventory / accrual sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

For transactions with labour items, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the Expense accrual sub. source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Reason code sub The subaccount of the reason code for the item.
Expense account The default expense account to be used for this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this account will be used for transactions with this item as the default expense account if Item is selected in the Use COGS / expense account from field for the posting class of the item.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense EU account The EU expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense account, import The import expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense payroll taxable account

The expense payroll taxable account to be used for this non-stock item.

This field is visible only if Expense Integration is enabled and the non-stock item is of type Expense.

Expense sub. The subaccount to be used by default with the expense account for transactions related to this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default expense subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine COGS / expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase accrual account

The liability account to be used for this non-stock item to accrue purchase order item amounts for this item, if the option Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.

Purchase accrual sub.

Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class for this item (the Posting classes (IN206000) window), this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.

Sales account The account to be used as the sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - non-taxable account The account to be used as the non-taxable sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - EU account The account to be used as the EU sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - export account The account to be used as the export sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used by default for transactions recording a sale of this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default sales subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine sales sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase price variance account

The account (of the Expense type) to be used as the default purchase price variance account to record purchases of this non-stock item on receipts if Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field for the posting class of the item.

The purchase price account is used to record any differences between the extended price on the purchase receipt and the extended price on the purchase invoice (if this item is assigned any of the valuation methods except for the standard cost valuation method).

Purchase price variance sub.

The corresponding subaccount.

This subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default purchase price variance subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine purchase price variance sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

Deferral account

The account to be used to hold the deferred amount until it is fully recognised. The account type should be specified as follows:

  • A liability account for a deferral code of the revenue type
  • An asset account for a deferral code of the expense type
Deferral sub. The subaccount to be used with the deferral account.
## The Attributes tab You can use the **Attributes** tab to associate attributes with the non-stock item. You can select each attribute from the list of attributes defined in the system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. ### The Attributes section
Column Description
Attribute ID The name of the attribute.
Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for a non-stock item of the class.
Value The value of the attribute.
### The Sales categories section By using this table, you can select the values of the sales categories for the non-stock item. To define the sales categories or view their details, use the [Item sales categories (IN204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060/) window.
Column Description
Category The sales category identifier.
### The Image upload section
Element Description
Browse Click the button to locate the image you want to upload.
Upload Click the button to upload selected image.
## The Description tab On this tab, you can create stock item descriptions that includes tables, images, and web links. ## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for an item, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific item. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s page In this window, you can view payment details from AutoPay by cash account and upload bank statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S) In this window, you can view payment details from AutoPay by cash account and upload bank statements. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Upload status file Click this button to upload the account summary from the file.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display on the list.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account for which you want to view available transactions.
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the transaction.
Show handled error messages Select this check box to show handled error messages in the table.
## The upper table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Batch ref. no. The unique reference number of the batch of payments. You can select a reference number to view (and act upon) a particular batch.
Batch status The AutoPay status of the batch
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment associated with the payment method.
Cash account The cash account used for the payment.
Cash account description The detailed description of the cash account.
Payee The ID of the receiver of the payment.
Payee name The name of the receiver of the payment.
Payment amount The amount of the payment in payment currency.
Payment currency The currency of the payment.
Payment status The payment status for the batch from AutoPay.
Invoice ref. no. The reference number of the purchase document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period.
Payment date The date of the supplier ledger payment document.
Payment amount in base currency The amount of the payment in the base currency of your company at the valid currency rate for the transaction date.
Orig. workspace The workspace where the batch was generated.
## The lower table
Column Description
Handled Select this check box for payments that have been handled.
Workspace The workspace from which the payment originates.
Batch ref. no. The unique reference number of the batch of payments. You can select a reference number to view (and act upon) a particular batch.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Payment status The payment status for the batch from AutoPay.
Payment amount The payment amount in payment currency.
Payee ID The ID of the receiver of the payment.
Rejection message The message informing why the payment has been rejected.

Related pages

Tasks

Prepare for closing (AP50700S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/prepare-for-closing-ap50700s page If you want to close a period in the supplier ledger at a specific date in the following period, you can use this window to move documents to another period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare for closing (AP50700S) If you want to close a period in the supplier ledger at a specific date in the following period, you can use this window to move documents to another period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can also move invoices that are pending in Approval. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Move to period Moves the selected documents to the new period selected in the top part, while the invoice date is kept.
Move all to period Moves all documents to the new period selected in the top part, while the invoice date is kept.
## The top part
Element Description
Branch The ID of the branch whose documents are displayed in the table, the current branch by default.
Up to period Select the period up to which you want to move documents to another period.
Supplier class To narrow down the documents displayed in the table, select here a supplier class and the documents of the suppliers included in the class will be displayed.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval.
Move to period The period to which you want to move the selected documents.
Move all to period Move all documents to the specified period.
Include documents On hold If you select this check box, the system will include documents with the status On hold in its search.
## The table
Column Description
Type The type of the document.
Ref. no. The number of the document to which the payment is applied.
Supplier The supplier who received the payment.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Supplier ref. The original reference number of the document or the ID assigned to it by the supplier (for informational purposes).
Status The status of the document.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval.
Date

The date of the original document; by default, it is the current date, which you can change.

The date is used by the system to determine a posting period.

Post period The period to which the document should be posted.
Amount

The amount to be paid for the document. You enter this amount manually.

This amount should be equal to the amount (or to the sum of amounts) shown in the Amount column in the top part of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.

Currency

The currency of the payment; by default, it is the currency associated with the cash account.

It can be a currency other than the supplier’s default currency if currency overriding is allowed for the supplier account.

Description A description of the document.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process payments (AP50301S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s section Through this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents by using the payment method associated with the specific cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments (AP50301S) Through this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents by using the payment method associated with the specific cash account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + If the **Require approval of invoices before paying** check box in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window is selected, only approved invoices are visible in this window. If the check box is cleared, unapproved invoices will also be displayed. + A pay date is assigned to an invoice automatically according to the **Payment by** value for the supplier on the **Payment settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + The system groups the documents into a single payment for each supplier unless the **Pay separately** option is selected for a supplier; for such suppliers, a separate payment will be generated for each document. ## What to do from this window + [Create a new schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule/) + [Fix a payment request with an error](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/fix-a-payment-request-with-an-error/) + [Process payments with deviations](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-payments-with-deviations/) + [Update payment document with document preview](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/update-payment-document-with-document-preview/) + [Edit a supplier during payment processing](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/edit-a-supplier-during-payment-processing/) + [Update payment document with document preview](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/update-payment-document-with-document-preview/) + [Make a non-active AutoPay agreement active](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/make-a-non-active-autopay-agreement-active/) ## The Prepare payments tab On this tab, you can select the documents to be prepared using various filtering options. ### The Deselect suppliers where the credit notes total amount exceeds the invoices total amount button When you click this, the suppliers will be deselected, whose credit notes' total amount exceeds the invoices' total amount. ### The Filters button Click the **Filters** button to open the filtering view. You can filter the documents to be displayed in the **Prepare payments** table by using the following options:
Option Description
Pay up to date

The Prepare payments tab will automatically display the outstanding supplier documents according to their pay date.

The default is the date in the Payment date field on the Financials details tab of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.

Supplier Filter the documents to be displayed based on the supplier. Note that only the suppliers with the Active and One-time status are available in the selection window.
Supplier class Filter the documents to be displayed based on the supplier class to which the supplier of the document belongs.
Document currency Filter the documents to be displayed based on their currency.
Discount up to date Filter on the discount date of the documents until which documents will be displayed. If there is no cash discount on the invoice, then the cash discount date = due date.
Payment method Filter the documents to be displayed based on the method of payment associated with the cash account. Only the payment methods are visible, which have the setting Create batch payment selected on the Settings for supplier ledger tab in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account Filter the documents to be displayed based on the cash account to be used for payment.
Branch Filter the documents to be displayed based on the branch to which they belong.
Document type

Filter the documents to be displayed based on their document type. The available types are:

  • Purchase invoice:
  • Credit adjustment:
  • Purchase credit note:
  • Prepayment:
Reset filters Click this to reset all filters and to display all documents until the default due date in the table.
Apply filters Click this to apply your selected filters and to view the documents accordant with them in the table.
### The Pay up to date button By default, the date is the current date and the table displays the documents whose due date is this date or earlier. You can change the date by clicking the calendar icon. If you select another date in the **Filters** view, it will be displayed and used here. ### The Refresh button Click this to refresh the window after changes or selections you have made. ### Bulk actions button #### Change payment date To change the payment date for all the selected supplier documents, click this button to open the calendar and select a new payment date.
Button Description
Today Click this to select today’s date.
Change Click this to change the payment of all selected documents to the date you have selected in the calendar.
Cancel Cancel the change of payment date.
#### Change cash account On the **Prepare payments** tab, select the documents for which you want to change cash account. Note that you can only make the change for payments with the same payment method. Select the new cash account from the drop-down with the available cash accounts and click **Change**. ### The Table settings dialog box You can see the number of the documents selected for payment in parenthesis. #### The Display options section
Button Description
Document list Select this to see the documents of all suppliers as individual rows in the table.
Group by supplier

Select this to group the documents of the same supplier in one bundle in the table.

  • The view displays the total amount to pay per supplier next to the supplier name and number of documents.
  • The amounts are shown in the currency of the cash account selected on the document.
  • If the supplier has documents using different cash accounts with different currencies, amounts will be displayed accordingly to the currency of the cash account.
  • To view the details of a supplier with grouped documents, click the supplier name link to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier overview This functionality provides you with a clearer summary of the documents by supplier to track and pay and their overall summary amounts. Activate this view in the table settings options and select Supplier overview.
#### The Row density section
Button Description
AP50301SDensityTight Select this to view the table lines with a tighter line density.
AP50301SLooseDensity Select this to view the table lines with a looser line density.
### The Column setup Check the box before the columns you want to display in the table. You can change the order of the columns by dragging them to a desired position. The active columns are displayed on the top of the list and the inactive ones after them in alphabetical order. ### The More actions drop-down
Button Description
Open AutoPay Click this button to open the AutoPay service where you can approve selected payments.
Export to Excel Click this to export all records to an Excel sheet.
Notification settings Click this to open the notification settings. For more details, see Notifications in processing of payments.
Schedule payments See About the scheduler.
### The table If there are payments with deviations, you see the message "You have x deviations that need your attention." Click the **View deviations** link to see only the deviations in the table. To see all the payments, close the **View only deviations** view by clicking the x in the label.
Column Description
! (Exclamation mark) There is a red exclamation mark in front of the rows with deviations. Hover over it to see the reason(s) for the deviations and how to fix them.
new-select-checkbox Select or deselect all documents, all documents for a supplier, or individual documents.
Branch The branch to which the document is related. This column is available if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Doc. type

The type of the supplier document. The following types are available:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Credit adjustment
  • Purchase credit note
  • Prepayment
Ref. no The reference number of the document.
Supplier bank account The bank account of the supplier. Click the link to change the supplier’s bank account in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier ref. The original ID of the document as specified by the supplier.
Payment date

The payment date of the purchase invoice, which is either the due date or the cash discount date for the document, depending on the supplier settings.

Note

In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, there is an option named Override payment date with current date. By selecting this option, you can override the payment date with the current date for all invoices.

This functionality is mainly aimed for the Dutch market.

Currency A read-only field reflecting the currency of the cash account.
Amount to pay The amount to be paid on the document.
Balance The balance of the document.
Priority The priority of the document, normal or high.
Due date The due date of the document.
Notes You can add and edit notes in the pop-up window that opens when you click Add note on a row in this column. The field is integrated with the notes in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Description The description of the document.
Cash account The cash account from which the payment will be issued. When you click the link, the document opens in preview overlay window where you can update the details of the document. For more information, see: Update payment document with document preview.
Pay separately

When this is selected, the document will be paid separately and not with the batch.

Note

With the Create one payment with invoices having the same payment date (when not using the Pay separately option) option selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, and when selecting several invoices in one payment for one supplier, the due date is considered for each invoice and the earliest due date will be the payment date in AutoPay.

Invoice date The date of the invoice.
Supplier no. The supplier to whom the payment will be sent.
Cash discount taken The amount of the cash discount granted by the supplier.
Cash discount balance The total balance of the cash discount.
Invoice amount The amount to be paid on the document.
Cash discount date The day when a cash discount from the supplier is available.
Payment location The payment location of the document, required when sending data to AutoPay.
Payment message The message written to the document for payment.
Payment reporting code The payment reporting code of the document.
SWIFT/BIC The SWIFT/BIC account of the supplier.
Original payment date The payment date of the document based on the document date and term of payment.
Orig. invoice date The original creation date of the invoice.
Payment ref. no. The payment reference number of the document.
Remittance contact The contact person connected with the document.
Charge bearer Specifies which party will pay the charges due for processing of the payment transaction.
Cash discount amount (orig. currency) The cash discount amount available for this document in its original currency.
## The footer of the window
Button Description
x selected of x documents The number of selected documents included according to the selection criteria out of the total number of documents.
Documents per page The number of documents displayed per page.
To be paid The total amount of the documents to be paid in your default currency.
Schedule your payments and save time/Next scheduled payment runs in n hours If no scheduled payment is active, you will receive a reminder to create a schedule. Alternatively, if one or more scheduled payments are active, the message will show the time remaining until the next scheduled payment is due.
Confirm payout Click this to confirm the payment of the selected documents. After clicking this button, you will be are redirected to the Payment status tab. When you hover over the button, you will see a message on the deviations (if any) and their reasons.
## The Balance side panel Here you can see an overview of the balances of the payments to be made. If there are payments in different currencies, you can see their balances by opening the drop-down menu next to the balance amount. You can also see the total number of unpaid payments and their total amount to be paid. ## The Payment status tab On this tab, you can see the status of each payment request after it has been sent to AutoPay. For more details, see [The Payment status tab.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/the-payment-status-tab/)
Purchase invoices (AP301000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000 section In this window, you enter supplier documents, such as landed cost invoices, adjustments, and prepayments, and view existing document details. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices (AP301000) In this window, you enter supplier documents, such as landed cost invoices, adjustments, and prepayments, and view existing document details. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Each purchase invoice, adjustment, or prepayment request creates a supplier ledger document of the corresponding type, which includes information about the supplier and their original document, such as the reference number of the original purchase invoice or note. + In addition, you can link invoices to the purchase orders used for ordering goods and to the purchase receipts issued upon receiving the ordered goods. + You can edit invoices, adjustments, and prepayments until they are released. The default status of a new document is determined by the **Hold documents on entry** option in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Enter an invoice in the base currency](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-in-the-base-currency/) + [Correct a purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/correct-a-purchase-invoice/) + [Enter an invoice in the base currency](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-in-the-base-currency/) + [Enter an invoice based on purchase receipts or purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-based-on-purchase-receipts-or-purchase-orders/) + [Pay an individual purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/pay-an-individual-purchase-invoice/) + [Release purchase invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/release-purchase-invoices/) + [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Pre-book

Pre-books the invoice and records all the expenses specified in the document to the reclassification account specified for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. You can book the pre-booked invoices after the expenses have been reclassified or after selecting specific expense accounts for each detail line.

The button is available only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Release

Releases the document.

You can release pre-booked invoices as long as the financial period is open in Supplier ledger.

Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions related to the selected document:

AutoPay payment process
Opens the Process payments (AP50301S) window, where you can create payments from the selected documents.
Manual payments
Opens the Supplier payments (AP302000) window with the invoice displayed on the Documents to apply tab as a line for a new payment.
Reverse
If you reverse a purchase invoice, the system creates a purchase credit note with the same details as in the selected document to reverse it. If you reverse a purchase credit note, the system makes a copy of the document with the Credit adjustment type.
Add to schedule
Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window, where you can assign the selected document to a schedule.
Recalculate prices
Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, where you can specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the selected document. See the Recalculate prices dialog box section below.
Supplier refund
Opens the Supplier payments (AP302000) window, where you can create a refund for the adjustment.
Void prepayment
Voids the prepayment.
Reclassify general ledger batch
Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, where you can initiate the reclassification process.
Void
Voids the selected invoice if the invoice has the Pre-released status and no payments are applied to the invoice. The action is available only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Update retainage
Opens the Update retainage dialog box where you can update the retainage percent / amount. The action is available only if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Release retainage
Opens the Release retainage dialog box, where you specify the settings of the retainage to be released and then run the process of releasing the invoice. As a result, the retainage invoice is created in the system. The action is available only if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Write-off
Creates a write-off in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window when the remaining balance on the invoice is within the limit set in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Correct invoice
Automatically creates a copy of the original invoice that you can further edit. In the background, when releasing this new invoice, the system will automatically create a purchase credit note for the original invoice and match it against the selected invoice to be corrected. As a note, the original invoice will remain in status Open until the new corrected document is finally released, but will no further be included in the payment process.
Note

You can only correct invoices with the status Open, not connected to a payment, and not including retainage. Remember to save the correction invoice!

Inquiries

Provides the following menu command, which you can click for fast access to the inquiry window:

Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier details (AP402000) window.
Approval document history details
Navigates to the Approval document history (AP40104S) window. Shows you e.g. approvers’ comments on invoices.
Approval document line history details
Navigates to the Approval document line history (AP40105S) window.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) report.
Supplier register (detailed)
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) report.
Send to Approval Sends the selected document to Approval for approval. When the invoice is sent, you can view the workflow of approving the document on the Approval details tab.
Show files Shows the files connected with the selected document in an own window.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box In the **Actions** drop-down you use this dialog box to specify the options of updating supplier prices and discounts for the invoice.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are calculated. You can select one of the following options:

Current line:
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line.
All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines.
Set current unit prices When this check box is selected, the system will update the item prices with the current prices.
Override manual prices When this check box is selected, the system will update the prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit cost or Ext. cost columns) with the current prices. The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.
Recalculate discounts When this check box is selected, the system will recalculate the discounts for the current line or for the selected lines. This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Override manual line discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will cancel the manual discounts for the current line or all lines (depending in the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
## The top part Here you can enter a new supplier document or select an existing document for modification.
Element Description
Type

The type of the document. The following types are available:

Purchase invoice
For an invoice issued by the supplier (or service provider) for goods sold or services provided. For details, see: About supplier ledger payment processing.
Credit adjustment
For a document that adjusts the credit amount in a previous document (or multiple documents). For details, see: About credit adjustment processing.
Purchase credit note
For a document that adjusts the debit amount in a previous document (or multiple documents). For details, see: About purchase credit note processing.
Prepayment
For a supplier request for prepayment. For details, see: About prepayment processing. A prepayment also can be created for a purchase order if the order should be paid for in the delivery of goods.
Invoice no. The number that identifies the document in the system, as generated by the system according to the number series assigned to documents of this type in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. For a new document, this field contains an alphanumeric string that indicates that a new number will be generated.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval. Pressing the status opens the Approval document line history (AP40105S) window.
Document status

A read-only field that shows the status of the supplier ledger document:

  • On hold: Indicates that the document is a draft. You can edit it but not release.
  • Balanced: Indicates that the credit and debit totals are equal for the newly created document. The document is assigned with this status when it is taken off hold.
  • Pre-released: Indicates that the entered and released document requires expense reclassification. This status is assigned only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
  • Scheduled: Indicates that the document was attached to a schedule. Scheduled documents are used as templates for generating similar documents, with the dates calculated according to the schedule settings. You can schedule a document if its status is Balanced.
  • Voided: Indicates that the document is no longer used for generating recurring transactions. The system changes the document status from Scheduled to Voided, when you have removed the document from the table on the Document list tab of the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window.

Also, the system changes the document status from Pre-released to Voided, when you have voided a document.

  • Pending Approval: Indicates that the document needs to be approved by responsible approvers.
  • Open: Indicates that the document has been released and cannot be edited. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
  • Closed: Indicates that the balance of the document is equal to 0.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the status of the document is On hold. Clear the check box to enable the release of the document.

This option is selected by default if you have selected the Hold documents on entry option in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.

Date

The date of the original document; by default, it is the current date, which can be changed. The date is used by the system to determine a posting period.

Bookkeeping and VAT reporting are based on this date.

Post period

The period to which the document should be posted; by default, it is the current period. The default period can be changed. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the option in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.

For invoices created through the Process VAT report (TX502000) window, periods that are inactive or closed in Supplier ledger are ignored and the VAT invoice will be posted in the financial period corresponding to the VAT period. If you have checked the ability to post to closed periods, closing the General ledger will also be ignored.

Supplier ref.

The document’s original reference number as assigned by the supplier (for informational and payment purposes).

The reference to the document is required if the Require supplier reference option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. This reference should be unique if the Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number option is selected in the same window.

If the supplier is a tax agency, checking of unique reference is ignored since you should use the same reference for all documents created for the same VAT period / company.

Description Any user-provided description for the document.
Buyer’s order no. The buyer’s order number connected with the document.
Supplier

The supplier referred to in the document.

You are able to change supplier on a document with order lines if the document

  • has the status On hold and is not created from a purchase order.

  • has the status Balanced and is not on Approval flow.

  • has the status Balanced and is not created from a purchase order.

Location

The supplier location associated with the purchase.

This field appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Currency The currency of the document. You can change the default currency of the supplier if the Enable currency override option is selected in the Supplier classes (AP201000) window for the supplier class of the supplier. To change the currency rate, click the Rate selection button.
Exchange rate

The amount corresponding to the Currency field, and the name of the field is only visible if you hover over the field.

By clicking the field, the Rate selection dialog box opens. See description below.

View base/View currency (button) When you click View base in the Currency column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency, if the currency of the document is other than your base currency. Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Terms The payment terms associated with the supplier (unavailable for prepayments and purchase credit notes).
Payment ref. no The payment reference number of the document.
Orig. invoice date

The original invoice date or the date when the supplier created the invoice.

If the Use orig. invoice date on payment terms option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window:

  • If you change the date in the Date field, the date in the Orig. invoice date, Due date, Cash discount date, and Pay date fields will change accordingly.
  • If you change the date in the Orig. invoice date field, the date in the Due date, Cash discount date, and Pay date fields will change accordingly.

This date does not affect bookkeeping and VAT reporting.

Apply retainage

When this is selected, retainage will be applied on the invoices.

This functionality is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Due date The date when payment for the document is due in accordance with the supplier’s payment terms.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period, which the system calculates by using the supplier’s payment terms.
AutoPay status The status of the document in AutoPay.
Detail total The document total as specified on the Document details tab.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will be displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the tax with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The total amount of VAT paid in the document.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax calculated for the document, if applicable.
Balance The balance of the document after VAT (if inclusive) and the discount as specified on the tabs below.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original invoice amount (including the VAT amount calculated by the system) and rounded invoice amount (including the VAT amount modified by a user for VAT-inclusive items).

This field is available only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window or if the VAT amount was edited for the VAT-inclusive item or items.

If the Invoice rounding functionality is not enabled, this field shows only the VAT amount discrepancy (that is, the difference between the VAT amount calculated by the system and the tax amounts entered by a user manually for the VAT-inclusive items).

Amount

The amount to be paid for the document. You enter this amount manually.

This field is available only if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. If it is not selected, this amount is calculated by the system and displayed only for released documents.

VAT amount

The VAT amount to be paid for the document. You enter this amount manually according to the tax amount specified in the original document.

This field is available only if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.

Note

To use the validation function, the Net/gross entry mode functionality has to be enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Cash discount

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken in the document, which the system calculates based in the specified payment terms. If a document has the On hold or Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the window.

### The Rate selection dialog box
Element Description
Currency rate type ID The currency rate type specified for the selected currency pair.
Effective date The date on which the currency rate in this row becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents

View the currency conversion.

Note

It is possible to change the currency rate for an individual invoice here without changing the currency rate type, but the currency rate will restore back to original if this invoice is corrected. Therefore, it is recommended to create a new currency rate instead, which can then be applied to the individual invoice ( See also: Add a currency rate ).

OK (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Document details tab This tab provides all the details on the document. The original purchase invoice can be a multi-line document, including multiple types of goods sold, services provided, or multiple transactions. A document may contain line items or one summary line; follow your company's internal agreements on entering documents. If taxes are calculated per item, ensure that the document includes all the details available in the original document. To each document line, you can attach a file with a supporting document.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Add purchase order receipt Opens the Add purchase order receipt dialog box where you can associate this document with a purchase receipt.
Add purchase order receipt line Opens the Add receipt line dialog box where you can add a line of a purchase receipt.
Add purchase order By clicking this button you can add purchase order items that do not require receipts. These are often non-stock items. In most cases the stock items require receipts and therefore the Add purchase order button is not used to add those items.
Link line

Opens the Link linedialog box where you can link the line selected in the invoice to a same-item line in a released purchase receipt or in a purchase order in the Balanced status, depending on the item settings. The documents whose lines are being linked to the invoice should have the same currency, the same supplier, and the same supplier location. You can link a line to the invoice line which has the same item ID and UoM.

The button is enabled only if the VAT settings option is selected in the VAT calculation mode field on the Financial details tab for the invoice.

Split line

If you want to distribute the costs of a purchase invoice across several accounts or subaccounts in your supplier ledger, you can split the purchase invoice lines.

You can split a parent line and a child line. A parent line is always the first line in a split, and it is also a line that is above a child line in the split hierarchy. When you split a child line, it automatically becomes the parent of the new line. You cannot split a line that has a discount related to it.

Undo split line Press this to undo all actions done by pressing the Split line button. The child line that was created will be deleted and the external cost will be added to the original row.
### The Add purchase order receipt dialog box By using the **Add purchase order receipt** dialog box, you can select a receipt or multiple receipts to add to the invoice. The dialog box includes the following elements. You can narrow the selection of receipts by selecting a specific purchase order.
Element Description
Order no. The ID of a purchase order that you can select to narrow the selection of receipts associated with this order.
Receipt no. The reference number of a purchase receipt that has not yet invoiced items.
Type The type of the receipt.
Supplier The supplier that delivered the goods listed in the receipt.
Location The supplier location from which the goods were delivered. The field is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency The currency of the document on which the goods are invoiced.
Date The date of the receipt.
Total qty. The total quantity of the items received as listed in the receipt.
Total amt. The amount of the receipt.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the items received that has not been invoiced yet.
Balance not yet invoiced The amount of the receipt that has not been invoiced yet.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected receipts to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the invoice.
### The Add purchase order receipt line dialog box By using the **Add receipt line** dialog box, you can select a line or lines of available receipts that you want to add to the invoice. You can narrow the selection of lines by selecting a specific purchase order.
Element Description
Order no. The ID of the purchase order that you can select to narrow the selection of not yet invoiced lines of the receipts associated with this order.
Order type The type of the order.
Receipt no. The ID of the receipt associated with the selected purchase order.
Line no. The number of the purchase receipt line.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Warehouse The warehouse to which the item was received.
UoM

The unit of measure used for the item.

For items requiring serial or lot numbers, this is the base unit; for other items, it is the purchase unit.

Currency The currency in which the goods were invoiced.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the document on which this document is based.
Receipt qty. The quantity of the item received, in the specified unit of measure.
Amount The amount of the line, calculated as the unit cost multiplied by the receipt quantity.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the line that has not yet been invoiced.
Amount not yet invoiced The amount of the line that has not yet been invoiced.
Line descr. The description of the line as provided in the receipt.
Add purchase order receipt line (button) Adds the selected line to the invoice.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected line to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the invoice.
### The Add purchase order dialog box Use the **Add purchase order** dialog box to add invoice lines with non-stock items from an existing purchase order of the selected supplier to the current invoice. You can only select purchase orders that are not completed or cancelled and have uninvoiced lines with non-stock items. These items must have the **Require receipt** check box cleared in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window.
Element Description
Order no. The order number of the purchase order.
Type The type of the purchase order.
Supplier The supplier of non-stock goods or services.
Location

The supplier location.

The field is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Date The date when the purchase order was created.
Currency The currency of the purchase order.
Order total The total of the purchase order.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the items received that has not been invoiced yet.
Amount not yet invoiced The amount of the purchase order that has not been invoiced yet.
Add purchase order (button) Adds the selected purchase orders to the invoice/prepayment.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected purchase orders to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without making additions to the invoice.
### The Link line dialog box By using the **Link line** dialog box, you can link the line selected in the invoice to a line in a released purchase receipt or in a purchase order in the **Balanced** status. For an invoice line with a stock item or non-stock item requiring receipt (for which the **Require receipt** check box is selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window), you can select only the lines of released purchase receipts that include the same item with the same item ID and with the same or smaller quantity received in the same currency from the same location of the same supplier. For an invoice line with a non-stock item (for which the **Require receipt** check box is cleared in the window), the dialog box by default displays the lines of open purchase orders that include the same item with the same (or less) quantity of the item received from the same location of the same supplier.
Element Description
Purchase order no. The number of the purchase order or purchase receipt which includes a line with a specific item. Leave the field blank to view more documents.
Warehouse The warehouse to receive the item. Leave the field blank to view more documents.
Item ID The item ID of the item in the selected line of the invoice.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
#### The Selected mode section
Element Description
Purchase order This selection mode is enabled for non-stock items that do not require receipts.
Purchase receipt This selection mode is enabled for stock items and non-stock items that require receipts. Also, you can select this mode if the item is a non-stock item that does not require receipt.
#### The Link line table
Element Description
Order no. The order number of the purchase order.
Type The type of the order.
Receipt no. The receipt number of the purchase receipt.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the original supplier’s document.
Warehouse The warehouse to receive the item.
Currency The currency of the document.
Order qty. The ordered quantity of the item.
Cost The cost of the document line item.
Original cost The original cost of the line if it has been split.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the item from the purchase order or purchase receipt that has not yet been invoiced.
Amount not yet invoiced The amount of the purchase order line that has not yet been invoiced.
Transaction descr. The description of the document line.
Save (button) Links the selected document to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels all selections and closes the dialog box without making changes to the invoice.
### The Document details table
Column Description
Item ID The unique ID of the particular item or service delivered by the supplier.
External item ID This field is available if the Use external item ID option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. It allows you to use external item ID in matching of items during invoice import to the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Supplier item ID The supplier’s item ID, if it is different from the item ID.
Transaction descr. Any description relevant to the transaction. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of the items or services of a particular type delivered by the supplier.
UoM The unit of measure for the items.
Unit cost

The unit cost of the item or service received from the supplier.

If you have modified the unit cost once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. To update the unit cost automatically to the current supplier’s price, you can use the Recalculate prices action.

Cost

The extended cost of the item or service, which is the unit price multiplied by the quantity.

If you have modified the extended cost once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. T o recalculate the extended cost automatically (supplier’s price specified for the stock item and multiplied by the quantity), you can use the Recalculate prices action.

Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically. The column is available only if the Customer and suppler discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Manual discount

When this check box is selected, the discount has been applied manually.

With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, or you can select a discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application. The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount code

The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line automatically.

The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount series

The ID of a discount series that has been applied to this line.

The column is hidden by default and available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Amount Read-only. The total amount for the specified quantity of items or services of this type (after the discount has been taken).
Account The expense account to be updated by this transaction. By default, it is the account associated with the supplier class. When costs are added it takes account from supplier settings. If you use an item, an expense account from the item will be used.
Description Any description of the account that has been provided.
Expense account The expense account set for the stock item. This is available if the Use Expense accounts check box is selected in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Description Any description of the account that has been provided.
Subaccount

The corresponding subaccount to be used for invoices and adjustments.

By default, it is composed for a particular item in accordance with the rules defined by the posting class of the item.

If the item has not been assigned to any posting class, the subaccount on an invoice is generated in accordance with the rule defined in the Combine the expense sub. from field in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.

Project

The project with which the item is associated, or the non-project code if the item is not intended for any project. This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled in your system and integrated with this workspace.

If the account on the line has an account group, the default project (X) will not be suggested and you have to enter a project. Invoices created through the Process VAT report (TX502000) window are ignoring this and will leave project empty if the account has a account group.

Project task The particular task of the selected project. You can select only a task associated with the selected project. This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace.
Non-invoiceable When this check box is selected, this document line is non-invoiceable in the project. This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace.
Split hierarchy The order on which the lines have been split.
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the stock item or non-stock item specified in this document line. Upon release of the document, the system generates a deferral schedule (or schedules) based in the settings defined in this deferral code.

You can change the deferral code in this field manually, if needed.

If you change the MDA deferral code (the deferral code that indicates that an item is a package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider the item not to be a package and will ignore its components while generating a deferral schedule. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule for the item based in the settings of the specified non-MDA deferral code.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message.

Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the purchase credit note documents created by the reversing process. It shows the ID of the deferral schedule associated with the original document (such as a purchase invoice).

If a purchase credit note document is created manually, you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the original documents, this column remains empty.

VAT category

The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction.

Unless you specify otherwise, it is the default VAT category of the supplier location’s VAT zone. If you select an item from the inventory list, it changes to the VAT category of the item.

If you change the VAT category on a split purchase invoice line, you can only select a category connected with the same VAT % as the parent line.

Purchase type The type of the purchase order linked to the invoice line.
Purchase order number The order number of the purchase order linked to this line of the invoice.
Purchase order line The number of the purchase order line linked to the invoice line.
Purchase order receipt no. The number of the purchase receipt linked to the invoice line.
Purchase order receipt line The line number of the purchase receipt’s line that is linked to this invoice line.
PPV ref. no The reference number of the inventory adjustment document that has been generated for the line item upon the release of the invoice.
PPV doc. type The type of the adjustment document that has been generated for the line item upon the release of the invoice.
Sort order Select the sort order of the table lines.
Status message reply The reply status from an integrated service when sending the document to it (such as AutoPay ). The status can be Approved or Rejected.
Retainage % The percent that is applied to the amount in the Ext. cost column minus the amount in the Discount amount column to calculate the amount to be retained for the line. By default, the system fills in this column with the value specified in the Default retainage percent field on the Retainage tab of the window; you can override this value. This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.
Retainage amount The amount to be retained for the line. The system calculates the amount by applying the retainage percent to the amount in the Ext. cost column minus the amount in the Discount amount column. You can override this value if required; if you do, the system recalculates the retainage percent accordingly. This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the supplier ledger account and subaccount used in the document and the supplier VAT zone. For a released document, the tab also contains a reference to the batch that implements the transactions. If the **Expense reclassification** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the tab provides information about the reclassification account and subaccount that were used for the document (if it was subjected to expense reclassification). ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Pre-releasing batch

The reference number of the batch that adjusts the appropriate account balances for the document with the Pre-released status.

This field appears only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the document has or has had the Pre-released status. Batches of this type use the number series assigned to batches that originated in the Supplier ledger module.

Batch no. The number of the batch that adjusts the appropriate account balances for the released document.
Branch The branch associated with the document.
Supplier account The liability account specified in the document.
Supplier subaccount The subaccount used in the document.
Reclassification account

The expense account used to record the expenses pending reclassification.

This field appears only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the document has or has had the Pre-released status.

Reclassification subaccount

The subaccount used to record the expenses pending reclassification.

This field appears only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the document has or has had the Pre-released status.

Retainage payable account

The account used to record retained amounts on the invoice.

This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.

Retainage payable sub

The subaccount used to record retained amounts on the invoice.

This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.

### The Payment information section
Element Description
Pay separately

When this check box is selected, the document should be paid by a separate payment.

This option appears only if the Pay separately option is selected for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window and the Activate Pay separately from Purchase invoices and Suppliers check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.

Approved for payment When this check box is selected, the document has been approved for payment. You can enable option Require approval of invoice before paying in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. The purchase invoice will then not be available inthe Process payments (AP50301S) window, if Approved for payment is not checked for the invoice. You can enable manual approval of purchase invoices the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window to showcase the option Require approval of invoice before paying.
Charge bearer The party that will pay possible expenses connected with the payment.
Priority The priority of the payment.
Payment reporting code The code used to report the payment (Sweden).
Payment message The message connected with the payment.
Pay date

The date when the invoice should be paid.

The date is the difference between the document due date or discount date (depending in the option selected in the Payment by field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window) and the number of days specified in the Payment lead time field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. If the difference is greater than or equal to the document date, then the document date is set as the pay date.

Payment location The supplier location. This field appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in your system.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Cash account The cash account used for the payment.
### The VAT section
Element Description
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier, which is specified in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document. Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable tax or taxes.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

The default value is taken from the settings of the supplier selected in the Supplier field.

### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID A work group from which you can select the employee responsible for the document. By default, this field is empty.
Owner

The employee responsible for the document. By default, the employee linked to a currently logged in user is specified. You can override the default value.

This value defines the expense subaccount to be debited if the EE subaccount mask is specified in the Combine expense sub. from field in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000).

### The Payment details section
Element Description
Account used for payment The account that is used whey paying the document.
Payment instructions The details of the account that is used for payment.
## The VAT details tab This tab, whose elements are filled out automatically when you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), contains information about all VAT applied to the document. If automatic calculation of VAT is configured in your system, the system calculates the applicable VAT for each invoice and adjustment (based in the VAT codes of line items and the supplier VAT zone) and records the VAT amounts to the document.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the document.
Description The description of the VAT ID.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for a specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT.
Deductible VAT rate The percent of deduction that applies to the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.
Expense amount The amount that is deducted from the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.
Include in VAT exempt total If this check box is selected, the amount of the line is included in the VAT exempt total amount of the document.
Reverse VAT If this check box is selected, there is reverse VAT on the line.
Statistical VAT If this check box is selected, there is statistical VAT on the line.
VAT type The description of the VAT type on the line.
Pending VAT If this check box is selected, there is pending VAT on the line.
## The Retainage tab On this tab, you can view information related the retainage applied to the invoice and the list of the retainage invoices related to this invoice. This tab appears only if the **Apply retainage** check box is selected in the top part of the window.
Column Description
Default retainage (%) The default percent of the amount that is retained for each document line. By default, the system fills in this field with the value specified for the supplier in the Retainage (%) field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. You can override this value.
Total amount The total amount of the invoice, including the retainage amount.
Original retainage The amount to be retained in all lines of the invoice. The original retainage amount is posted by the invoice to the Retainage payable account.
Unreleased retainage The amount that has been retained from the invoice and has not yet been released.
Unpaid retainage The amount that has been retained from the invoice and has not yet been paid.
Paid retainage The total amount paid for the retainage documents related to the invoice.
VAT on retainage The total amount of retained VAT for all lines.
Discount on retainage The total amount for all lines in the Retained discount column on the Discounts tab.
### The table columns
Column Description
Type The type of the document related to the invoice with retainage.
Ref. no The reference number of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Date The date of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Post period The financial period to which the retainage invoice or purchase credit note has been posted.
Status The status of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Amount The amount of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Balance The balance of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note which calculates as the document amount minus payments (or adjustments) applied.
Payment method The default payment method selected in the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Supplier ref. The reference number that the supplier has assigned to the retainage invoice or purchase credit notet.
Description A description of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
## The Applications tab This tab, which appears for open documents, reflects the history of payment applications. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
View payment

The View payment button will open the application of the document connected with the active row in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window.

The button is available for the document types Purchase invoice and Credit adjustment.

Apply automatically Initiates the process of applying available payments to this document.
### Tab columns
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document that was applied to the document.
Invoice no. The number of the document.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid, which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the top part of the window.
Date The date when the payment was applied to the document.
Balance The current balance of the document.
Description A description provided for the payment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Post period The post period of the payment document.
Payment ref. The payment reference number, which can be a system-generated number or an external reference number (such as a wire transfer number) entered manually on payment creation.
Status The status of the payment document.
## The Landed costs tab This tab appears only if the supplier selected in the top part has the **Landed cost supplier** check box selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
View purchase order document Navigates to the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, which displays the details of the purchase receipt document (of the Receipt or Transfer type) for which these landed costs were added.
View inventory document Navigates to the Adjustments (IN303000) window, which displays the details of the Inventory adjustment document generated for this document. If such an adjustment was not generated for the document, process it by using the Close financial periods (AP506000) window.
Add postponed landed cost Opens the Add postponed landed cost dialog box, which lists landed costs with the Postpone purchase invoice creation check box selected on the Landed costs tab in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. In the dialog box, you can select a postponed landed cost (if any) and include it in the invoice.
Landed cost split Opens the Landed cost splits dialog box, where you can add purchase or transfer receipts among which the system should split the amount of the landed cost. Splitting of the amount of a landed cost is not available for the postponed landed costs.
### The table columns
Column Description
Landed cost code

The landed cost code used to describe the specific landed costs incurred for the purchase receipt document of the Receipt or Transfer type. This code is one of the codes associated with the landed cost supplier.

Landed costs can be added by using the Landed cost codes ( PO202000) window.

Description The description provided for the landed cost code.
Amount The amount of landed costs incurred for the goods specified in the purchase receipt. The amount must be greater than zero.
Purchase receipt type The type of the receipt this document is associated with.
Purchase order receipt no. The reference number of the receipt this document is associated with. You can add a purchase or transfer receipt or a receipt line by using the respective ( Add purchase order receipt or Add purchase order receipt line ) button on the Document details tab.
Item ID The item ID of the item in the receipt line for which the landed costs are specified.
Warehouse The warehouse into which the receipt was done.
Location The location into which the receipt was done.
## The Discount details tab This tab is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system. The **Discount details** tab has a table that shows the details of the **Group** and **Document** level discounts that were applied to the document.
Column Description
Skip discount When this check box is selected, a Group or Document level discount for the document is cancelled. Selecting the check box updates the total and the line amounts for the document, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Discount code The discount code of the supplier discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount applied to the document ( Group or Document ).
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the supplier discount shown in this row has been applied manually (from the Group or Document level discounts marked as manual in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window).
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined to be based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined to be based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Retained discount The retained discount if retainage is applied on the document.
Discount percent The discount percent if the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Purchase order no The order number of the purchase order.
Purchase order receipt no. The receipt number of the purchase order.
## The Approval details tab This tab is available only if the Approval license is in use. The tab holds information on approvals of the supplier ledger documents.
Column Description
Default document The default document to be shown in approval.
Initial approver The person to first approve the document when sent to approval, disregarding configured workflow.
Update lines Click to update the lines to be approved.
Comment The comment connected with the approval of the payments.
Add attachment Click to open the Upload dialog box. Click Choose file and select the file you want to upload.
## The Inbox details tab This tab is available for invoices that come from the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/).
Column Description
Detail total The total amount of the invoice excluding VAT.
Total VAT taxable The total taxable amount of the invoice.
Total VAT exempt The total amount of the invoice excluding VAT.
VAT total The total amount of VAT on the invoice.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax on the invoice.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the invoice.
Balance The total amount of the invoice including VAT.

View details

button

This button opens the Invoice details window where you can preview the invoice and its more specific details.

Note

Any comment you add to an invoice in the Invoice details window will appear on the invoice also in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. AP50604S-ref.htm

Purchase invoices pending payment (AP403000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-pending-payment-ap403000 page You use this window to get summary information about outstanding invoices that have been approved for payment but have not been paid yet. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices pending payment (AP403000) You use this window to get summary information about outstanding invoices that have been approved for payment but have not been paid yet. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process payment Navigates to the Create batch payments (AP505000) window where you can create a payment document.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to define the criteria of the pending invoices you want to view.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account used as a source account. You can select an account or make no selection.
Payment method The payment method of the pending invoices you want to view. You can select any payment method configured in the system or associated with the cash account, if you selected one.
Pay date The current date or any date you select. Documents with an earlier pay date or the same pay date will be displayed.
Currency A read-only field showing the currency of the pending invoices. This field appears only if all the invoices are in the same currency.
Total due A read-only field that displays the total amount of the selected invoices in the base currency if the invoices have different currencies, or in the common currency if all the invoices are in the same currency.
## The Totals table In this table, each listed item is a total on documents that have the same cash account, payment method, and currency, so that you can see how much you should pay from each cash account.
Column Description
Cash account The cash account as a potential source of cash for paying the invoices and other documents. It is the default cash account for the supplier.
Description The description of the cash account.
Payment method The payment method associated with the cash account.
Currency The currency of the group of outstanding payments.
Documents The number of outstanding documents with the same cash account, payment method, and currency.
Amount The total amount on the outstanding documents with this cash account, currency, and payment method.
Overdue documents The number of overdue documents with this cash account, currency, and payment method.
Overdue documents amount The balance of the overdue documents.
Valid discount documents The number of documents that have valid cash discounts on the pay date specified above.
Valid discount amount The total amount of cash discounts available on the pay date.
Lost discount documents The number of documents that have lost cash discounts on the pay date specified above.
Lost discount amount The total amount of discounts lost by the pay date for the group of outstanding documents.
Min. pay date The earliest pay date on the documents.
Max. pay date The latest pay date on the documents.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Purchase invoices - overview (AP40103S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-overview-ap40103s page In this window, you can filter and view the purchase invoices in the system and see more detailed information on the documents on the Details view tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices - overview (AP40103S) In this window, you can filter and view the purchase invoices in the system and see more detailed information on the documents on the Details view tab. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The top part
Element Description
Approval status

Select one the values in this field to filter the list on the documents’ status in Approval:

View all
View invoices with all approval statuses.
New
View invoices with the status New.
Cancelled
View invoices with the status Cancelled in Approval. This is the status after you have clicked Cancel (the Send to Approval button changes to Cancel when you have sent a document to Approval ).
Sent to Approval
View invoices with the status Sent to Approval.
Received in Approval
View invoices with the status Received in Approval.
Pending
View invoices with the status Pending. This status is displayed when invoices are on a valid approval flow and are pending approval.
Rejected
View invoices that have been rejected by Approval.
Approved
View invoices with the status Approved. This status indicates that the invoice has been approved and you can now release invoices that are ready to be paid. In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can set up automatic release of approved invoices.
Active workflow
View invoices with the status Active workflow. This status is displayed only during a brief system check, to find out whether the settings for sending invoices to Approval are correct.
Error
The invoice encountered an unspecified error. Please try again.
Document status

The status of the document in Visma Net

View all
View all documents, regardless of status.
On hold
View only documents with the status On hold.
Balanced
View only documents with the status Balanced.
Voided
View only documents with the status Voided.
Scheduled
View only documents with the status Scheduled. You can schedule invoices in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Open
View only documents with the status Open.
Closed
View only documents with the status Closed.
Printed
View only documents with the status Printed.
Pre-released
View only documents with the status Pre-released. Invoices get this status if you have clicked Pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Pending approval
View only documents with the status Pending approval.
Rejected
View only documents with the status Rejected.
Reserved
View only documents with the status Reserved.
Supplier class The supplier class to which the supplier belongs.
Supplier The supplier’s name.
Currency The currency of the supplier document.
Document type

The type of document. Available types are:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Credit adjustment
  • Purchase credit note
  • Prepayment
Approver The name of the approver of the document.
Initial approver The name of the first approver of the document.
Sender The name of the person who sent the document for approval.
Show details Select this check box to see more information about the documents on the Details view tab.
Overdue documents only Select this check box to see more information about documents that are overdue.
Show closed, scheduled, and voided Select this check box to include documents with these statuses on the Summary view tab.
Show only documents with comments entered in Approval Select this filter to see only the purchase invoices sent to Approval, which have comments.
From due date Select a due date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To due date Select a due date until which you want to see supplier documents.
From cash discount date Select a cash discount date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To cash discount date Select a cash discount date until which you want to see supplier documents.
From pay date Select a pay date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To pay date Select a pay date until which you want to see supplier documents.
From period Select a period from which you want to see supplier documents.
To period Select a period until which you want to see supplier documents.
From document date Select a document date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To document date Select a document date to which you want to see supplier documents.
Detail total Displays the detail total for all documents with the selected criteria.
VAT taxable total Displays the VAT taxable total for all documents with the selected criteria.
VAT exempt total Displays the VAT exempt total for all documents with the selected criteria.
VAT total Displays the VAT total for all documents with the selected criteria.
With. tax Displays the withheld tax (if any) for all documents with the selected criteria.
Balance Displays the balance for all documents with the selected criteria.
Rounding diff. Displays the rounding difference (if any) for the amounts displayed.
Amount Displays the total amount for all documents with the selected criteria.
Cash discount Displays the total cash discount that has been granted (if any) for the documents with the selected criteria.
## The Summary view table The **Summary view** tab lists the results of your selections in the top area and changes to reflect the criteria you select and deselect. For certain selection criteria, the tab changes to a **Detailed view**, to give you more information about the selected range of documents.
Column Description
Approval status

Displays the document’s status in Approval:

New
The document has the status New.
Cancelled
The document has the status Cancelled.
Sent to Approval
The document has the status Sent to Approval.
Received in Approval
The document has the status Received in Approval.
Pending
The document has the status Pending.
Rejected
The document has been rejected by Approval.
Approved
The document has the status Approved.
Active workflow
The document has the status Active workflow.
Error
The document has the status Error.
Document status

Displays the status of the document in Visma Net

On hold
The document has the status On hold.
Balanced
The document has the status Balanced.
Voided
The document has the status Voided.
Scheduled
The document has the status Scheduled.
Open
The document has the status Open.
Closed
The document has the status Closed.
Printed
The document has the status Printed.
Pre-released
The document has the status Pre-released. This status is given to invoices that you pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Pending approval
The document has the status Pending approval.
Rejected
The document has the status Rejected.
Reserved
The document has the status Reserved.
Documents The number of documents that match the Approval and document status values.
Detail total The total amount of the document excluding VAT.
VAT amount The amount of VAT that is included in the Total incl. VAT.
With. tax amount The amount of withheld tax (if any).
Total incl. VAT The sum of the Detail total and the VAT amount.
Balance The current balance for the document.
Last document date The latest document date of the documents of the respective line.
First due date The first due date set for the document.
Balance (currency) The balance in currency (if any).
Cash discount Any cash discount amount that has been granted.
Detail total (currency) The detail total in currency (if any).
Extended approval status Displays a more detailed status of the document.
First cash discount date The first cash discount date set for the document.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference, if any.
Total incl. VAT (currency) The sum of the Detail total and the VAT amount (if any).
VAT exempt total The total amount that is VAT exempt.
VAT taxable total The total amount that is VAT taxable.
Approval flow Approval flow gives you the picture of the flow and comments that you also see in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window on the Approval details tab.
Comment counter The comment counter shows how many comments there are on the invoice.
Recurring transactions (AP203500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500 page This window allows you to create and manage schedules for recurring supplier ledger documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (AP203500) This window allows you to create and manage schedules for recurring supplier ledger documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction To do this, create a schedule and add one or multiple documents of the following types: **Purchase invoice**, **Purchase credit note**, **Credit adjustment**, and **Prepayment**. Additionally, you can add documents to existing schedules. + You can only schedule documents with the **Balanced** status. Once you assign a document to a schedule, its status changes to **Scheduled**. + A schedule determines the frequency and number of times assigned documents should be generated. The system uses the original documents as templates to create similar documents with updated transaction dates and other details. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a schedule for recurring invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-schedule-for-recurring-invoices/) + [Schedule a recurring invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/schedule-a-recurring-invoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run now Initiates the process of running a schedule and generating documents according to the schedule.
## The top part In this area, you can create a new schedule and edit or delete any existing schedule.
Element Description
Schedule ID The ID of the schedule. A new schedule gets its unique ID in accordance with the number series assigned to schedules in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Active When this check box is selected, the schedule is active. When the check box is cleared, the schedule cannot be used.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date A date that, if set, indicates when the schedule expires. This field is unavailable if the Never expires check box is selected.
Never expires When this check box is selected, no expiration date is set.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. This field is unavailable when the No limit check box is selected.
No limit Selecting this check box will continue the schedule indefinitely into future financial periods. Upon selection, the Execution limit field will be unavailable.
Description A description for the schedule.
Last executed A read-only field that displays the date when the documents were last generated. If no documents were generated according to the schedule, the field is unavailable.
Next execution A read-only field that displays the date when the schedule should be executed next, based on the schedule parameters.
Executed (times) A read-only field whose value shows how many times the schedule was executed or how many times the documents were generated. A 0 here indicates that the schedule has not been executed yet and no documents have been generated.
### The Schedule type section The section you see to the right of this section depends on the schedule type you select here.
Element Description
Schedule type

The frequency at which documents should be generated. Click one of the following option buttons, which are described in detail in the next sections:

Daily
The documents will be generated daily or once every x days.
Weekly
The documents will be generated once a week or once every x weeks.
Monthly
The documents will be generated once per month or once every x months.
By financial period
The documents will be generated only once per financial period or once every x financial periods.

Select the schedule type, and then enter the settings specific to the type in the corresponding section.

### The Daily section
Element Description
Every x day(s) A number that specifies the time interval (in days) for document generation. For example: 1 would mean every day and 2 would mean every other day, starting on the start date.
### The Weekly section
Element Description
Every x week(s) A number that specifies the time interval (in weeks) for document generation, with the boxes indicating the day or days of the week when the documents should be generated: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, or Saturday.
### The Monthly section
Element Description
Every x month(s) A number that specifies a time interval (in months) for generating documents. For example: A 3 here would generate the documents every three months. For this schedule type, you should enter a number and select one of the option buttons below this field.
On day

An option button that you select if you want to select a particular day of the month.

If you select this button, you should select the day of the month for the invoice in the adjacent field.

On the nth day of the week

An option button that you can select if you want to select a particular day of the week within the month.

If you select this button, you should also select the ordinal number in the left field that specifies the week in the month, and the day of the week in the right field, for example, 2nd Thursday.

### The By financial period section
Element Description
Every x period(s)

A number that specifies a time interval for document generation, measured in financial periods.

In addition to selecting this number, you should select one of the following option buttons, which determine when documents should be generated.

Start of the financial period An option button that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
End of period An option button that sets the end date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
Fixed day of the period

An option button that you use if documents should be generated on a particular day of the financial period.

If you select this button, select the particular day in the field.

## The Document list tab On the **Document list** tab, you can assign one document or multiple documents to the schedule. You can select documents from the list of those with the status **Balanced**. Other columns in the row display the selected document's details.
Column Description
Type The type of the supplier ledger document. The following types of documents can be scheduled: Purchase invoice, Prepayment, Purchase credit note, or Credit adjustment.
Ref. no. The ID of the original document, which is used as a template. Other columns in the row are read-only and display the details of the original document.
Supplier The ID of the supplier whose document is being scheduled.
Supplier name The complete name of the supplier as it appears on the documents.
Status The status of the original document.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Currency An identifier of the currency used for the document.
Description A user-defined description for the document.
## The Generated documents tab This tab displays the list of documents generated from this schedule being run.
Column Description
Type The document type that can be one of the following: Purchase invoice, Prepayment, Purchase credit note, or Credit adjustment.
Ref. no. The reference number of the generated document.
Supplier The supplier whose document was generated.
Supplier name The complete name of the supplier as it appears on the documents.
Status The status of the generated document.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the generated transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the generated document.
Currency The ID of the currency used for the document.
Description The user-defined description of the document.
Release landed costs from purchase invoices (AP506500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-landed-costs-from-purchase-invoices-ap506500 section You can use this window to process landed costs associated with purchase invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release landed costs from purchase invoices (AP506500) You can use this window to process landed costs associated with purchase invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can use this window to process landed costs associated with purchase invoices. As a result of processing, the system generates inventory adjustments to update the costs of the stock items involved. This window shows only documents for which generation of the inventory adjustments failed on the document release. During processing, carefully note any error messages you get and fix the related problems, which generally result from missing accounts. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process

Initiates generation of the inventory adjustments for the selected purchase invoices that include landed cost codes.

The green icon-confirmation icon appears in the window toolbar if the operation has completed successfully. The red icon-erroricon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some required conditions were not met. Point to the red icon to view the error message.

Process all Initiates generation of the inventory adjustments for all listed purchase invoices that include landed cost codes.
## The Documents table This table contains the list of documents that have associated landed cost codes and for which generation of the adjustments failed.
Column Description
Type

The type of document. The available types are:

Purchase invoice
For this type, the initial supplier document will update the supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Credit adjustment
This supplier document will update the supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Payment
This document will update the balances of the cash account and the supplier ledger account by the amount paid to the supplier.
Purchase credit note
This type suggests that the document will update the supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balances.
Supplier refund
This document will update the balances of the cash account and the supplier ledger account by the amount received from the supplier.
Voided refund
This type refers to a voided refund.
Quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Voided quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Prepayment
This refers to a prepayment request or a prepayment itself, depending on the document’s status.
Supplier document no. The reference number of the document.
Date The date of the document.
Currency The document’s currency.
Supplier The ID of the landed cost supplier associated with the document.
Supplier name The landed cost supplier associated with the document, by its name
Location The location of the supplier associated with the document.
Receipt total amt. The total amount of the receipt associated with the purchase document.
Landed cost total The total of the landed costs in the purchase document.

Related pages

Concepts

Release supplier documents (AP501000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000 page By using this window, you can view all Supplier ledger documents (purchase invoices, purchase credit notes, credit notes, and prepayments) that are ready to be released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release supplier documents (AP501000) By using this window, you can view all Supplier ledger documents (purchase invoices, purchase credit notes, credit notes, and prepayments) that are ready to be released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can release all the documents or only selected ones. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the supplier documents and payments that you have selected. This action changes the status of the selected documents to Open, and either creates unposted batches or posts the batches directly to the General ledger workspace, depending on whether the Automatically post on release option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Release all Releases all the supplier documents available on the list. Here, too, whether transactions will be directly posted on release is defined by the Automatically post on release option in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
## The table This table includes the list of all the documents that are not yet released and that have the **Balanced** status.
Column Description
Branch The ID of the branch to which this document is related.
Branch name

The name of the branch to which this document is related.

The column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Type

The type of the document. The following types are available:

Purchase invoice
For this type, the initial supplier document will update the Supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Credit adjustment
This type of document will update the Supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Purchase credit note
This type suggests that the document will update the Supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balances.
Payment
This type of document will update the balances of the cash account and the Supplier ledger account by the amount paid to the supplier.
Voided payment
This type refers to a voided payment.
Prepayment
This type refers to a prepayment request or a prepayment itself, depending on the document’s status.
Supplier refund
This document will update the balances of the cash account and the Supplier ledger account by the amount received from the supplier.
Quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Voided refund
This type refers to a voided refund.
Void quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Prepayment request
This type refers to a prepayment request.
Ref. no. The ID of the document. Click the number to navigate to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) or Supplier payments (AP302000) window, depending on the type of the selected document.
Supplier The supplier associated with the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The name of this supplier.
Supplier bank account The bank account to which the purchase invoice will be paid.
Supplier ref. The external number of the document (the number of the original supplier invoice) for reference.
Status The status of the document. You can only release Balanced documents.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval, if it is in use.
Comment The comment written on the document.
Date The date when the document was created.
Due date The due date from the purchase invoice.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted.
Amount The amount of the document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Description A user-defined description of the document or payment.

Related pages

Tasks

Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-supplier-ap102010 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that include a particular supplier account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that include a particular supplier account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction In this window, you can view the restriction groups that include a particular supplier account. You can also change the visibility of the supplier account in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups in which it is currently included. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of supplier accounts by using the [Supplier access (AP102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-access-ap102000/) window. ## The top part In this area, you can select the supplier account for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected supplier account.
Element Description
Supplier no. The supplier (by its identifier) whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Status Read-only. The status of the selected supplier account, Active or Inactive.
Supplier name Read-only. The name of the selected supplier as it appears on the documents.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled **Included** column is selected for each group that contains the supplier account. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the supplier account in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that the restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.

Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse.
Supplier access (AP102000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-access-ap102000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of supplier accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or supplier accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier access (AP102000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of supplier accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or supplier accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can also use the [Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-supplier-ap102010/) window to manage the visibility of supplier accounts to users, but you cannot create restriction groups in this window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.

## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Suppliers tab On this tab, you can view the list of supplier accounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Supplier no.

The ID of the supplier account.

You can click the supplier number to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window and view the settings of this supplier.

Status Read-only. The status of the supplier account, which can be either Active or Inactive.
Supplier name Read-only. The name of the supplier as it appears on documents.
Supplier classes (AP201000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000 page You can use this window to create supplier classes, which are groups of suppliers with similar properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier classes (AP201000) You can use this window to create supplier classes, which are groups of suppliers with similar properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction Supplier classes make it easier to create supplier accounts in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window: once you assign a new supplier to a specific class, the default accounts and subaccounts from the class, as well as other settings defined for the class, will be inserted into the corresponding elements. To ease the creation of supplier classes, specify an existing supplier class as the default class in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. After you do this, when you create a new supplier class, the elements in this window will be populated with the values from the default supplier class. However, you can overwrite any of these values. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class/) + [Change the VAT zone for a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/change-the-vat-zone-for-a-supplier-class/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Apply restriction settings to all suppliers Updates the security settings for all suppliers of the class. If you change the default restriction group for the selected supplier class, clicking this button will include all suppliers of the class in the new default restriction group and exclude them from the group previously specified as the default one.
## The top part In this area, you can select a class and view its description, or you can specify this information for a class you are creating.
Element Description
Class ID The unique ID of the class, max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A detailed description of the supplier class.
## The General information tab On this tab, you can view or modify the settings of the selected class. You can specify as few or as many default settings as you like. Changes to the class settings will not affect the already existing records of the suppliers in the class; however, when you create a supplier and fill in the supplier class, the new supplier account gets the most up-to-date class settings. ### The Default general settings section
Element Description
Country The country of the suppliers in this class. By default, it is the country of your company.
VAT zone ID The default VAT zone for the suppliers of the class.
Require VAT zone When this check box is selected, a VAT zone is required for the suppliers in the class. If it is not selected, a VAT zone is optional.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode for the suppliers in the class, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document for a supplier in this class in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

You can override this mode at the supplier, location, or document level.

Default location ID from branch When this check box is selected, the ID of the branch to which the user is currently signed in, is used by default as the ID of the supplier’s main location instead of MAIN (default). This field is available only when the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default restriction group The restriction group to which newly created suppliers of the class will be assigned by default. To include all existing suppliers of the class in this restriction group, click Apply restriction settings to all suppliers.
Import type The type of import that defines which cost account should be used on purchase orders and invoice lines. The cost account used might differ for Domestic, Domestic exempt VAT, EU, and non-EU suppliers.
Document language The language used on documents (such as purchase orders).
Currency ID The default currency used in operations with the suppliers in this class. By default, your company’s base currency is used.
Enable currency override When this check box is selected, the currency may be overridden for transactions; a currency other than the default currency may be selected for individual documents.
Currency rate type The default currency rate type used in operations with suppliers of this class.
Enable rate override When this check box is selected, the currency rate type may be overridden for transactions and that a currency other than the default currency may be selected for individual documents.
### The Default purchase settings section
Element Description
Shipping terms The shipping terms to be used in relations with the suppliers in the class.
Receipt action

The default action for the suppliers in the class, which will be performed on receipt of purchased goods if the specified conditions are not met. Select one of the following options:

Reject
Receipt of the items will be rejected.
Accept but warn
Receipt of the items will be accepted, but the system will generate a warning for the applicable purchase order line.
Accept
Receipt of the items will be accepted.
Warning when missing VAT registration ID When this check box is selected, you get a warning if you enter a supplier without a VAT registration ID.
Warning when missing corporate ID When this check box is selected, you get a warning if you enter a supplier without a corporate ID.
Warning on duplicate org. and/or VAT number on different supplier When this check box is selected, you get a warning if one of the ID types above has already been used.
Do not allow duplicate supplier When this check box is selected, you get an error message if the number you entered is already in use. You cannot save the information in the window if you have entered duplicate supplier numbers.
### The Approval settings section
Element Description
Approval required before release When this check box is selected, approval of documents is required before you can release them.
### The Default financial and payment settings section
Element Description
Terms The default payment terms for the supplier class. You can create and view terms in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Payment method The default payment method for the class.
Cash account The cash account to be used by default for operations with the suppliers in this class.
Payment by The way the suppliers in this class should be paid: by Due date or Discount date.
### The Default supplier properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification When this check box is selected, you can get notified via a Webhook upon an action or a confirmation in Visma Net.
Account used for payment Select here the account that to be used by default for payment for this supplier class.
### The Default print and email settings section
Element Description
Print orders When this check box is selected, purchase orders for suppliers of the class will be printed on release.
Send orders by email When this check box is selected, purchase orders for the suppliers in the class will be emailed on release.
### The Invoice import settings section
Element Description
Match item during import of invoices When this check box is selected and when invoices arrive in Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), Visma Net has a functionality to match items during invoice import. You can set this option on the supplier. To make this work, you must first set the supplier item ID in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window (or, in the Stock items (IN202500) window) and then on the Supplier details tab.
Create invoices with one line for each VAT rate When this check box is selected, the purchase invoice that is created will have only one line per VAT rate. The expected VAT amount is calculated based on the net amount and the VAT code applied to the invoice.
Import header amounts by VAT code When this check box is selected for a supplier and you process an invoice from this supplier in Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), the lines will be disregarded and only the invoice header amounts will be used for creating lines on the purchase invoice. One line will still be created for each VAT category on the invoice.
## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you can specify the default general ledger accounts for the supplier class. The following table summarises the elements of this tab.
Element Description
Supplier account The liability account to be used to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the suppliers in this class.
Supplier subaccount The subaccount to be used with the account to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the suppliers in this class.
Expense account The expense account to be used to record transactions with the suppliers in this class.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used to record expenses made to the suppliers in this class.
Expense EU account The EU expense account to be used to record expenses made to the suppliers in this class.
Expense account, import The import expense account to be used to record expenses made to the suppliers in this class.
Expense subaccount The subaccount to be used with the expense account to record transactions with the suppliers in this class.
Discount account The general ledger account to be used to record the amounts of discounts received from the suppliers in this class. The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount subaccount The subaccount to be used to record the amounts of discounts received from the suppliers in this class. The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash discount account The discount account to be used to record cash discount amounts received from the suppliers in this class due to payment terms.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount to be used to record cash discount amounts received from the suppliers in this class.
Prepayment account The account to be used to record prepayments paid to the suppliers in this class.
Prepayment subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used to record prepayments paid to the suppliers in this class.
Reclassification account The account to be used to temporarily record expenses that require reclassification.
Reclassification subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used record expenses requiring reclassification.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used to record transactions that are the result of receipts invoicing.
Purchase accrual subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used to record transactions that are the result of receipts invoicing.
Unrealised gain account The account to be used to record unrealised gains on transactions with the suppliers in this class. If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window is used.
Unrealised gain sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used to record unrealised gains on transactions with the suppliers in this class. If no subaccount is selected in this column, a subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.
Unrealised loss account The account to be used to record unrealised loss on transactions with the suppliers in this class. If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window is used.
Unrealised loss sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used to record unrealised loss on transactions with the suppliers of this class. If no subaccount is selected in this column, a subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of supplier attributes associated with the class. You can select an attribute from the list of attributes defined in your system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window.
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, the attribute is active.
Attribute ID The name of the attribute, which serves as its ID. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A detailed description of the attribute. Max. 50 characters, both numbers and letters.
Sort order A number that represents the order of the attribute for sorting in reports.
Required When this check box is selected, the attribute value is required for all suppliers of the class.
Internal When this check box is selected, this attribute is intended to be used only as internal.
Control type The type of control for the attribute: Text, Combo box, Multi select combo, Lookup, Check box, or Date/time.
Default value The default value of the attribute.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for the suppliers in this class. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents (by email) to suppliers and company employees overseeing operations with suppliers of the class. Mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailings configured for particular suppliers. You can select mailings for the supplier class from the list of predefined mailings defined in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window and the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. The current version of Visma Net provides only the **PURCHASE ORDER** predefined mailing for suppliers. The **Mailing settings** tab provides default values for mailings to be configured for particular suppliers. Emails for active mailings will be generated and sent to supplier contacts and company employees when a user invokes the action specific to the mailing on an appropriate processing window. Such emails can contain purchase orders in any of the available formats or a personalised email text based on a template. The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, which has the list of recipients. In the **Recipients** table, you can specify default types of supplier contacts, not particular contacts. Only employees of your company can be specified as email recipients at the supplier class level. ### The Mailings table By using this table you can view and modify the list of mailings to be available by default for the suppliers in this class. The settings here are used as follows: + To provide default values for mailing settings for the suppliers in this class + To specify the mailings to be used to inform employees of your company, if needed, about changes in the documents of the suppliers in this class
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique ID of the mailing.
Branch The branch for which this mailing is used.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing to the suppliers of the class. If no account is specified, the system account specified in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window will be used.
Report The purchase order or supplier ledger report to be used by default as the email’s body, if a report is used for this mailing. For the mailing, either a report or a template can be specified.
Notification template The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing.
Format The format in which the document (formatted according to the selected report if applicable) will be sent by default if a recipient has no preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, this mailing is active (switched on). Emails will be sent only for active mailings.
### The Recipients table Use the **Recipients** table to view and modify the list of default recipients for mailings. This list is primarily used to provide default contact types for the supplier class; if necessary, you can also specify an employee of your company to receive electronic copies of documents of the suppliers in this class.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive mailings:

Primary
The contact specified as the supplier’s primary contact
Remittance
The contact specified as the supplier’s remittance contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the supplier’s shipping contact
Employee
The employee of your organisation who handles the documents of the suppliers in this class or is otherwise associated with the supplier class
Contact ID The mailing recipient. A particular recipient can be selected only if Employee is specified as the Contact type. This employee, if one has been selected, will receive emails with documents of all the suppliers in this class.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent for recipients of this type by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, this recipient is active. Only active recipients can receive emails.
Bcc When this check box is selected, the recipient will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails.
Supplier details (AP402000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000 page This window is intended for quick inquiries about a specific supplier's outstanding balance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier details (AP402000) This window is intended for quick inquiries about a specific supplier's outstanding balance. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can view the balance by financial period and by currency. + If no currency is selected, all amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Enter new purchase invoice
Navigates to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can enter a new invoice.
Enter new payment
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can enter a new payment.
Pay invoice
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can create a payment for the invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Balance by supplier
Navigates to the Balance by supplier (AP63250S) report.
Supplier history
Navigates to the Supplier history (AP652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AP631000) report.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AP631500) report.
Supplier register
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (AP621500) report.
## The top part You use these elements to narrow the information to be displayed.
Element Description
Company

The company of the transactions to be viewed.

By default, it is the current company.

Branch

The branch of the transactions to be viewed.

By default, it is the current branch.

Supplier The supplier of the transactions to be viewed, by its ID.
Period The financial period for which supplier documents will be displayed.
Supplier account The supplier ledger account used in operations with the supplier.
Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Currency The currency of the documents to be included in the list. Leave the field empty to display all documents that meet the other criteria you have selected.
From period The financial period from which closed/voided documents will be displayed.
To period The financial period to which closed/voided documents will be displayed.
Show more details When this check box is selected, there are more columns available in the table part.
Include unreleased documents When this check box is selected, unreleased documents (with the On hold and Balanced statuses) are included in the list.
By financial period When this check box is selected, balances are shown by the financial period of the document transactions. Clear the check box to show balances by documents’ dates. The check box is displayed if a financial period is selected in the Period field.
Balance by documents A read-only field showing the balance calculated for all documents that match the selected criteria, except the closed ones.
Current balance A read-only field indicating the balance for the documents, as retrieved from the supplier ledger account history records stored in the database.
Prepayment balance A read-only field showing the current balance of prepayments made to the supplier or the balance at the end of the selected period.
Balance discrepancy

This read-only field displays any discrepancies in the balance. It shows the difference between the balance calculated by documents and the customer’s current balance. If Unreleased documents are included, the value may be non-zero.

If the value is non-zero in other cases, there may be errors in the database.

Retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage withheld from the supplier documents in the selected branch at the end of the period (if specified) or at the end of the last activity period (if the period is not specified). This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The table This table displays the documents that match the criteria you specified in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the transactions displayed.
Type The type of the document or payment.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Date The date of the document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Post period The financial period for posting the document transactions.
Status The status of the document.
Currency The currency used in relations with the supplier.
Original amount (currency) The original amount of the document, before cash discount, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
Balance (currency) The amount of the document after the cash discount is taken, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
Cash discount taken (currency) The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
VAT withheld (currency) The amount on VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
Orig. amount The original amount of the document, before cash discount, in the base currency.
Balance The balance of the document before the cash discount is taken, in the base currency.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment, in the base currency.
VAT withheld The amount of VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier, in the base currency.
RGOL amount The total amount of realised gain or loss (RGOL) incurred as the result of currency conversions.
Payment method The payment method used if the document is a payment.
Supplier invoice no./payment no. The reference number of the supplier’s original invoice or the payment issued.
Description The description of the document.
Pre-booked This shows if the document has been pre-booked.
Pre-book period The period to which the document is pre-booked.
Pre-releasing batch no. The number of the pre-releasing batch to which the document belongs.
Last batch payment The number of the last batch payment document with a link to it.
Last payment date The date for the last entered payment.
Last payment The number of the last payment document with a link to it.
Currency original retainage The retained amount in the currency of the document. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Unreleased retainage currency The amount of unreleased retainage in the currency of the document. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Original retainage The reference number of the invoice with retainage to which this retainage invoice is related. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retainage invoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a retainage invoice. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Windows

Supplier list (AP40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-list-ap40101s page This window lists suppliers by their supplier class and status. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier list (AP40101S) This window lists suppliers by their supplier class and status. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description

View supplier

(button)

Click View supplier to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window and to take a closer look at the selected supplier.
## The top part
Element Description
Supplier class Select a supplier class if you want to list suppliers of a specific class.
Status

In the Status field, you can filter suppliers according to the status they have in Visma Net:

Active - Lists all active suppliers.

On hold - Lists all suppliers that have the status On hold.

Hold payments - Lists all suppliers that have the status Hold payments.

Inactive - Lists all suppliers that have the status Inactive.

One time - Lists all suppliers that are one-time suppliers.

Credit hold - Lists all suppliers that have the status Credit hold.

## The table columns
Column Description
Supplier The supplier’s ID in the system. To view the details of the supplier, click the referenced ID to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The supplier’s name.
Address The address of the supplier.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier’s address.
City The city that the supplier’s address belongs to.
Country The country that the supplier’s address belongs to.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the supplier.
Attention The person in the supplier’s company that you should address correspondence or deliveries to.
Phone 1 The supplier’s telephone number.
Email The supplier’s email address.
Last purchase The last purchase date from this supplier.
Status The supplier’s status. For a description of possible statuses, see the Status field description in the top part.
Supplier class The supplier class that the supplier belongs to (if any).
Suppliers (AP303000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000 page This window enables you to add new suppliers and view the existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Suppliers (AP303000) This window enables you to add new suppliers and view the existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + To create a new supplier, start by selecting a supplier class. This selection automatically applies the default values from the chosen class to various elements. However, you can modify these default settings as required. + If a supplier has only one location, that location will automatically be set as the default. However, if the supplier has multiple locations, you must manually set one as the default location. The settings of the default location will then be used as default values in data entry windows. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/) + [Create a customer from a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-customer-from-a-supplier/) + [Add general information for a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier/) + [Add payment settings for a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier/) + [Override Send to Approval as the default action for one supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action-for-one-supplier/) + [Enable supplementary VAT reports](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/enable-supplementary-vat-reports/) + [Set the financial period end date for the VAT period](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-the-financial-period-end-date-for-the-vat-period/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Includes the following menu commands you can click to invoke actions:

View customer
Navigates to the Customers (AR303000) window where you can view the customer account of the supplier if the supplier is a customer too.
Enter purchase invoice
Navigates to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can create a new invoice for the supplier.
Create payment
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can create a new payment for the supplier.
Extend to customer
Navigates to the Customers (AR303000) window with appropriate elements filled in, where you can also define this supplier as a customer.
View restriction groups
Navigates to the Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010) window.
Change ID
Displays the Specify new ID dialog box where you can change the ID of the currently selected supplier.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry windows:

Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier details (AP402000) window.
Approve purchase invoices for payment
Navigates to the Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) window.
Pay invoices
Navigates to the Process payments (AP50301S) window, depending on which version of the payment processing functionality you are using.
Supplier prices
Navigates to the Supplier prices (AP202100) window, where you can view or edit prices for the selected supplier.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

Balance by supplier
Navigates to the Balance by supplier (AP63250S) report.
Supplier history
Navigates to the Supplier history (AP652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AP631000) report.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AP631500) report.
Document register
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (AP621500) report.
Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier profile (AP655500) report.
## The top part By using the elements in this part, you can create a new supplier account or select an existing account for editing.
Element Description
Supplier no.

The ID of the supplier is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key (or by the SUPPLIER segmented key, which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key).

At a later time, you can change the supplier number by clicking Change ID in the Actions menu in the window toolbar.

Status

The status of the supplier. Select one of the following options:

Active
The supplier is in use and appears on all selection lists.
On hold
The supplier is temporarily on hold and cannot be used.
Hold payments
Payments cannot be issued for this supplier.
Inactive
The supplier is not available for selection.
One time
This is a one-time supplier, and the supplier becomes inactive when the payments are issued.
Balance A read-only field, which appears if you select an existing supplier, that displays the total balance of all open documents of the supplier excluding the total balance of prepayments.
Supplier name The name of the supplier to appear in the system.
Prepayment balance A read-only field showing the balance of prepayments in the base currency. This field is available if you select an existing supplier.
Retained balance A read-only field showing the balance of retainages in the base currency. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Locale

The locale that defines the language in which this supplier prefers to receive documents.

This field is available if there are multiple active locales in the system.

## The General information tab This tab contains the supplier's main address, contact information, and account settings, such as currency and rates used in relations with the supplier. If you are creating a new supplier, first select its supplier class on this tab; once you do, many of the elements are populated with the class settings. ### The Main address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line of the supplier address.
Address 2 The second line of the supplier address.
Address 3 The third line of the supplier address.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier. You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the supplier.
Country The country of the supplier.
County The county or province of the supplier.
View on map A button you can click to view the supplier’s location on the map.
### The Main contact section
Element Description
Company name The legal company name of the supplier.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The default email address of the supplier.
Web The website address of the supplier (if any).
Phone 1 The preferred phone number of the supplier organisation.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the supplier organisation.
Fax The fax number of the supplier.
Account ref. An optional text field that can contain a reference to your company’s account number in the supplier’s system.
Parent account The parent supplier’s account, which you can select from the list of existing suppliers. For an independent supplier, make no selection. The value is used solely for informational purposes.
### The Approval settings section
Check box Description
Approval required before release When this check box is selected, purchase orders from this supplier have to be approved before they can be released.
### The Financial settings section This section contains finance-related settings and the **Supplier class** field. When you select a supplier class, many of the window elements are filled in with the default values of the class.
Element Description
Supplier class

The class of the supplier.

When you select a supplier class (which is required), the system fills in various values in this window automatically in accordance with the specified class. You can overwrite these values if needed.

Terms The terms of payment used with the supplier.
Document language The language of the documents to be printed to the suppliers of the class.
Currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier.
Currency rate type The currency rate type used for the supplier.
Enable currency override If you select this check box, you can override the standard currency for the supplier when you register an invoice. If this is not selected, you cannot change the currency on the invoice.
Enable rate override When this check box is selected for the supplier, you can override the standard currency rate type when you register an invoice for the supplier. If it is not selected, you cannot change the currency rate type on the invoice.
Auto load documents

To override the setting for the automatic loading of documents that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, you can select here how they will be loaded for this supplier in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window. You can also decide to use the setting that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.

Use Cash management settings
To use the setting for automatic loading of documents that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window on the Bank statement settings tab.
First exact doc. amount, then all documents
All documents will be automatically loaded after the ones with exact matching document amount have been loaded.
Document with exact amount
The system searches the documents that have the exact matching amount with the transactions and loads only them.
Disabled
Automatic loading is not in use.
### The Supplier properties section The elements in this section cover special supplier properties, such as whether the supplier is a landed cost supplier or a tax agency.
Element Description
Landed cost supplier When this check box is selected, the supplier is a landed cost supplier, which is a supplier, such as a freight company or a customs duties office, who provides the services associated with a landed cost.
Supplier is tax agency

When this check box is selected, the supplier is a tax agency.

The settings for a tax agency are configured on the Tax agency settings tab, which appears once the check box is selected.

For details, see: About tax agency account setup.

Webhook notification When this check box is selected, you will be notified on changes connected with the supplier. The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the supplier.
### The Invoice import settings section
Element Description
Ignore validation during import of invoices When this check box is selected, the system will not validate invoices during import.
Match item during import of invoices

When this check box is selected and invoices arrive in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), Visma Net you can match items during invoice import.

To make this work, you also have to first set the supplier item ID in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window (or, in the Stock items (IN202500) window) and then on the Supplier details tab.

Create invoices with one line for each VAT rate

When this check box is selected, the purchase invoice that is created will have only one line per VAT rate. The expected VAT amount is calculated based on the net amount and the VAT code applied to the invoice.

When this setting is selected, the line level Invoice Inbox rules will not apply.

Import header amounts by VAT code

When this check box is selected and you process an invoice from this supplier in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), the lines will be disregarded and only the invoice header amounts will be used for creating lines on the purchase invoice. One line will still be created for each VAT category on the invoice.

When this setting is selected, the line level Invoice Inbox rules will not apply.

Default action for Inbox invoice

When you get invoices to the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), you can select here the default action that will be performed for the invoices in the inbox:

  • Hold
  • Release
  • Send to Approval
  • Pre-book
  • Pre-book and send to Approval
  • Exclude from processing
### The Rounding rule settings section
Element Description
Enter rounding amount manually When this check box is selected, you can enter rounding amounts manually.
Rounding rule for invoices

Select the rounding rule you want to use for the purchase invoices of the supplier. Values:

Use currency precision: This is the default value if you have selected Enter rounding amount manually.

Nearest: Rounds to the nearest value defined in the Rounding precision field.

Up: Rounds up to the nearest value defined in the Rounding precision field.

Down: Rounds down to the nearest value defined in the Rounding precision field.

Rounding precision The value you want sums to be rounded closest to, if you are using rounding.
## The Payment settings tab This tab contains the default information for creating payments to the supplier. If the supplier has multiple locations, the information displayed is for the default location. Any modifications made in this tab will update the settings for the default location. > [!NOTE] > When the **Four eyes principle bank details** option is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, new and changed bank details must be approved by another user. ### The Remittance address section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the remittance address is the same as the main address and the elements below are populated with the main address information, specified on the General settings tab.
Address 1 The first line of the remittance address.
Address 2 The second line of the remittance address.
Address 3 The third line of the remittance address.
Postcode

The location’s postcode.

You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.

City The city of the remittance address.
Country The country of the remittance address.
County The county or province of the remittance address.
View on map Click this to view the remittance location on the map.
### The Remittance contact section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the remittance contact information is the same as the main contact information and the elements below display the main contact information.
Company name The name of the supplier’s department (to receive the payments), if it is different from the supplier name.
Attention The attention line, if one is used in your company’s business letters.
Web The remittance contact person’s website address (if any).
Email The remittance contact person’s email address.
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s primary phone number.
Phone 2 The remittance contact person’s additional phone number.
Fax The remittance contact person’s fax number.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Payment method

The default payment method to be used for the supplier. The payment methods available for selection are those associated with the cash account and marked for use in Supplier ledger.

The Payment instructions table (with user-defined columns) appears below if these details were specified for the payment method.

An example on the use of payment methods: To pay an invoice issued in EUR using SEK, use the payment method 04. Utlandsbetalningar.

Cash account The cash account to be used for operations with the supplier.
Charge bearer

The party that will pay possible expenses connected with the payment:

  • Payer
  • Beneficiary:
  • Shared
  • Service level
Account used for payment

The bank account to be used for payments to the supplier:

  • IBAN
  • Bank account
  • Plusgiro
  • Giro
  • FIK
Payment by

An option that defines how to calculate the date by which the supplier should get their payments. You can select one of the following options:

Due date
Select this option to pay a purchase invoice so that its payment can reach the supplier before the invoice due date. The payment’s pay date is defined as the difference between the document due date and the number of days specified in the Payment lead time field.
Discount date
Select this option to pay a purchase invoice so that its payment can reach the supplier when a cash discount is still available. The payment’s pay date is defined as the difference between the document discount date and the number of days specified in the Payment lead time field.
Payment lead time (days)

The number of days required for the payment to be delivered to the supplier.

The specified number is used in calculation of pay date for the supplier ledger documents in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.

Payment ref. display mask

This is a rule (mask) for how the payment reference number will be displayed.

The rule makes sure that the required format is used in data entry windows.

Default payment ref. no. Allows you to register a default payment reference number to be used on all purchase invoices from this supplier (for example, for recurring invoices).
Pay separately

When this check box is selected, each document should be paid by a separate payment.

If this check box is not selected, documents for this supplier may be paid jointly.

This option appears only if the Activate Pay separately from Purchase invoices and Suppliers check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.

The **Payment instructions** table provides the instruction details for the payment method used by the supplier, if these details have been configured in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. ## The Purchase settings tab This tab provides the default information required for the processing of purchases, such as the shipping terms, the FOB point, the expense account (to record shipping expenses), and the address and contact information. If the supplier has more than one location, this information is the same as that specified for the default location, and changes on this tab update the appropriate settings of the default location. ### The Shipping address section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the shipper’s address is the same as the main address and the elements below are populated with the main address information specified on the General info tab.
Address 1 The first line of the shipper’s address.
Address 2 The second line of the shipper’s address.
Address 3 The third line of the shipper’s address.
Postcode

The location’s postcode.

You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.

City The shipper’s city.
Country The shipper’s country (by ID).
County The county or province of the shipper’s address.
View on map Click this view the shipper’s location on a map.
### The Shipping contact information section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the shipper’s information is the same as the main company information, and the elements below display the main company information.
Company name The supplier’s shipping department name, if it is different from the supplier’s business name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Web The contact person’s website address (if any).
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the shipper’s contact person.
Phone 2 An additional phone number for the contact person.
Fax The fax number for the contact person.
### The Default location settings section
Element Description
Location name The location selected (on the Locations tab) as the default one for the supplier.
Receiving branch The branch of your company that receives goods from this supplier.
VAT zone

The VAT zone of the supplier’s default location.

If the supplier has been converted from a prospect account or extended from a customer account, the supplier’s VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone of the original account.

You can override the default value.

If you change the VAT zone for the supplier, the VAT zone of the corresponding business account with the supplier type is automatically set to the VAT zone of the supplier.

Corporate ID

The supplier’s VAT registration ID associated with the location.

You can set a rule for this ID in the VAT zones (TX206000) window.

National insurance no. The supplier’s national insurance number associated with the location.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document for a selected supplier in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window: Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

You can override this mode at the supplier location, or on document level.

VAT registration ID

The supplier’s VAT registration ID associated with the location.

You can set a rule for this ID in the VAT zones (TX206000) window.

Print orders When this check box is selected, an order from the supplier should be printed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved.
Send orders by email

When this check box is selected, an order from the supplier should be emailed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved.

Emailing the order can be required along with printing it; in this case, printing is done first.

### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to store the goods from the supplier.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Shipping terms The shipping terms used by the supplier.
Ship via The carrier used by the supplier.
FOB point The location where respective obligations, costs, and risk involved in the delivery of goods shift from the seller to the buyer.
Lead time (days) The number of days needed for the shipment to reach the specified receiving branch when sent from the supplier.
### The Receipt actions section
Element Description
Min. receipt (%)

The minimum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a smaller quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Larger quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is less than the percentage specified as the Max. receipt (%).

Max. receipt (%)

The maximum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a larger quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Smaller quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is greater than the percentage specified as the Min. receipt (%).

Receipt threshold (%)

The minimum percentage of the total purchased items that should be received to complete the purchase order.

This setting is used if maximum or minimum percentages are not specified.

Receipt action

The action to be performed on receipt of the purchased goods if the minimum, maximum, or threshold receipt conditions are not satisfied. Select one of the following options:

Reject
Receipt of the applicable items will be rejected.
Accept but warn
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted, but the system will generate a warning for the line.
Accept
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Mode of transportation

0 - Unknown

1 - Transport by sea

2 - Transport by rail

3 - Transport by road

4 - Transport by aeroplane

5 - Consignments by posts

7 - Fixed transport installations

8 - Transport by inland waterway

## The Locations tab This tab is available only if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The **MAIN** location is always automatically created for the supplier when you enter the supplier's main address. You can set a location as inactive or add a new location. Also, you can set a particular location as the supplier's default location. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
Add location Navigates to the Supplier locations (AP303010) window where you can add a new location.
Set as default Sets the selected location as the supplier’s default location. You can select only one location as the default one.
### Tab columns
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, the location is active. If the check box is cleared, the location will not be available for selection when users create supplier ledger documents.
Default When this check box is selected, this has been set as the supplier’s default location. You cannot directly select or clear this check box; when you change the default by selecting a location and using the Set as default action, the appropriate locations’ check boxes are selected or cleared.
Location ID The ID of the location.
Location name A detailed description of the location.
City The city of the supplier location.
Country The country of the supplier location.
County The county or province of the supplier location.
VAT zone The VAT zone associated with the shipping location.
Expense account The expense account to be used to record expenses incurred by the supplier.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used to record expenses incurred by the supplier.
Expense EU account The EU expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense account, import The import expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense account, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used to record expenses incurred by the supplier.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice
GLN

The global location number.

This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice

## The Contacts tab This tab displays a table showing the supplier's contact persons and their information. To add a new contact, click **Add contact**. To change any of the details of a particular contact, double-click in its row, which opens the [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) window. ### The table columns
Button Description
Add contact Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window as a pop-up where you can enter a new contact.
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, this person is an active business contact.
Position The position the contact person has in his or her company.
Name The name of the contact person.
City The city of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
## The Invoice Inbox rules tab
Column Description
Priority The priority of the rule among the rules of the supplier.
Rule ID The ID of the rule.
Description The description of the rule.
Active When this check box is selected, the rule is active.
Source field on invoice The field on the invoice that is used as the source detail when searching for matching invoices for the rule.
Condition The condition that is used on the value of the source field.
Value The value that is searched from the source field of the invoice and interpreted according to the selected condition.
Account The account to which the rule applies.
Subaccount The subaccount to which the rule applies.
Project The project to which the rule applies.
Project task The project task to which the rule applies.
Initial approver (document level) The initial approver of the invoice on the document level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Initial approver (line level) The initial approver of the invoice on the line level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Deferral code The deferral code based on value in the xml file.
Location The location to which the rule applies.
Branch The branch to which the rule applies.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of supplier attributes defined in the associated supplier class. You specify the value of the attributes from the list, if required.
Column Description
Attribute The description of the attribute.
Required When this check box is selected, specifying the attribute value is required.
Value The value of the attribute.
## The Activities tab This tab has a table with the list of activities associated with the supplier. You use this tab to associate particular tasks, events, and other activities with the supplier. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window where you can create a new task.
Add event Opens the Task (CR306020) window where you can create a new event.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window where you can send an email to the supplier.
Add activity

Contains a menu with options that correspond to the list of available activity types.

By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window where you can create an activity of the corresponding type.

### Tab columns
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Mail status The status of the associated email message (if applicable).
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Work group The work group the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The user name of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Related entity description The entity that this activity is associated with.
Project The project code connected with the activity.
Project task The project task connected with the activity.
Released When check box is selected, the activity has been released.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab shows the default general ledger accounts for this supplier. For a new supplier, the accounts and subaccounts displayed on this tab are by default those specified for the supplier class that you have selected on the **General settings** tab; however, you can select other accounts and subaccounts. If the supplier has more than one location, some of these accounts are associated with the default location, and changes on this tab update the appropriate settings of the default location.
Column Description
Supplier account The liability account used to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the supplier.
Supplier ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used with the account to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the supplier.
Expense account The expense account used to record expenses incurred for the supplier.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense EU account The EU expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense account, import The import expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record expenses incurred for the supplier.
Discount account

The account used to record the discount amounts for discounts received from the supplier.

The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount sub.

The corresponding subaccount used to record the discount amounts for discounts received from the supplier.

The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Cash discount account The account used to record the cash discount amounts received from the supplier due to payment terms.
Cash discount sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record the cash discount amounts received from the supplier due to payment terms.
Prepayment account The account used to record the prepayments paid to the supplier.
Prepayment sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record the prepayments paid to the supplier.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used to accrue purchase order item amounts for items received from this supplier, if the option Supplier is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items.
Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the purchase order items received from this supplier, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Reclassification account The account to temporarily record expenses that require reclassification.
Reclassification sub. The corresponding subaccount to temporarily record expenses that require reclassification.
## The Tax agency settings tab This tab only appears if a tax agency is selected as a **Supplier no.** You use this tab to provide tax agency settings. ### The VAT report settings
Element Description
Default VAT period type

The type of VAT period that defines the frequency of reporting VAT to a tax agency.

The following options are available:

Half-months
A VAT report is filed twice a month, on the 15th calendar day and the last day of the month (regardless of the number of days in the month).
Month
A VAT report is filed once a month.
2 months
A VAT report is filed once in two months.
Quarter
A VAT report is filed once a quarter (that is, every three calendar months).
6 months
A VAT report is filed twice a year (that is, every six calendar months).
Year
A VAT report is filed once in a calendar year.
Financial period
A VAT report is filed once a financial period.
Use the financial period’s end date as VAT period, not the document date

If this check box is not selected, it is the document date that is used for calculation of VAT. Note that the VAT periods and the financial periods configured in the system can differ.

If you select the check box, it is the end date of the period on the document that is used for calculation of VAT. Then the VAT will always follow the posted period end date, and the document date will not affect the VAT reporting period.

Example

The periods:

04-2022 - starts on 01 April and ends 30 April 2022

05-2022 - starts on 01 May and ends 31 May 2022

If the document date is 30 April 2022, but the period is set to May. Then the VAT will use the last date in period 5 for the document, which is 31 May.

The date used for the VAT calculation will then be 31.05.2022 - and not 30.04.2021. For the monthly-based VAT report, the system will report it for the VAT period 05-2021.

Select the check box if you want the VAT to always follow the posted period end date.

Update closed VAT periods When this check box is selected, closed VAT periods will be updated with data from new documents associated with the VAT period.
Generate the VAT invoice automatically When this check box is selected, VAT invoiced will be created automatically.
VAT report rounding

The rounding rules to be used to calculate the VAT amount on VAT reports to this tax agency.

You can select one of the following options:

  • Mathematical
  • Ceiling
  • Floor
VAT report precision The decimal precision to be used to calculate the amounts on VAT reports for this tax agency.
Use currency precision When this check box is selected, the decimal precision of the currency selected as this tax agencies’ default currency, will be used for reports.
Supplementary VAT amount The limit when a supplementary report should be sent to the government.
### The EC sales list settings
Element Description
Reporting period EC sales list

The default EC sales list reporting period that will be suggested on the first VAT periods created.

None
No EC sales list is filed.
Monthly
The EC sales list is filed once a month.
Quarterly
The EC sales list is filed once a quarter (that is, every three calendar months).
Monthly and quarterly
The EC sales list is filed both monthly and quarterly.
Yearly
The EC sales list is filed once in a calendar year.
Enable correction for previous months

When this check box is selected, transactions will be split from the previous report periods into separate lines in the report.

If a customer has lines from another report period, they will be reported as correction lines.

EC sales list rounding

The rounding rules to be used to calculate the tax amount on EC sales list reports to this tax agency.

You can select one of the following options:

  • Mathematical
  • Ceiling
  • Floor
EC sales list precision The decimal to be used to calculate the sales amounts on EC sales list reports for this tax agency.
Use currency precision

When this check box is selected, the decimal precision of the currency selected as the basis currency will be used for the EC sales report.

The check box will automatically be selected when the precision is equal to the company precision. A message appears to notify you when this happens.

### The Default VAT accounts
Element Description
VAT payable account

The account to be used as the default VAT payable account for a new VAT created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.

You can overwrite this account on the General ledger accounts tab of the VAT (TX205000) window, if needed.

VAT payable sub. The subaccount to be used as the default VAT payable subaccount when a new VAT is created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT claimable account

The account to be used as the default VAT claimable account for a new VAT created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.

You can overwrite this account on the General ledger accounts tab of the VAT (TX205000) window, if needed.

VAT claimable sub. The subaccount to be used as the default VAT claimable subaccount when a new VAT is created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT expense account

The account to be used as the default tax expense account for a new VAT created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.

You can overwrite this account on the General ledger accounts tab of the VAT (TX205000) window, if needed.

VAT expense sub. The subaccount to be used as the default tax expense subaccount when you create a VAT for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.
### The Pending VAT settings This section is available only if the **VAT reporting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
VAT recognition method

The method that determines the way the pending VAT associated with the agency are recognised.

The following options are available:

On payments
When this option is selected, VAT is recognised based on payments applied to documents.
On documents
(default): When this option is selected, VAT is recognised based on taxable documents. Payments are not considered in this case.
Input VAT entry ref. no.

An option that determines how the system assigns reference numbers to pending VAT entries generated by the VAT recognition process in the Recognise input VAT (TX503500) window.

The following options are available:

Document ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the original document as the reference number of the VAT entry.
Payment ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the payment as the reference number of the VAT entry.
Manually entered
(default): You enter a number manually.
Output VAT entry ref. no.

An option that determines how the system assigns reference numbers to pending VAT entries generated by the VAT recognition process in the Recognise output VAT window.

The following options are available:

Document ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the original document as the reference number of the VAT entry.
Payment ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the payment as the reference number of the VAT entry.
VAT invoice no.
The system generates a new number for an entry once the VAT recognition process has completed. The system uses the number series specified in the VAT invoice numbering field in this window.
Manually entered
(default): You enter a number manually.
VAT invoice numbering

The number series that the system uses for reference numbers of the VAT recognition entries. These numbers are shown in the VAT doc. no. column in the Recognise output VAT window.

This field is available only if the VAT invoice no. option is selected in the Output VAT entry ref. no. field.

## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab displays the mailings that are set up for the supplier. Mailings are used to set up sending electronic versions of specific documents to supplier contacts and company employees specified as recipients for the suppliers. By default, mailings selected for the supplier class are listed, but you can select other mailings from the list of mailings defined in the [Purchase order preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) and [Supplier ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) windows. For details on setting up mailings for suppliers, see: [Set up mailings for suppliers.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-up-mailings-for-suppliers/) The tab includes the **Mailings** table, which has the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, with the list of recipients. ### The Mailings table
Column Description
Mailing ID The ID of this mailing.
Branch The branch of the organisation on behalf of which the emails will be sent for this mailing.
Email account

The system email account to be used by default for sending this mailing’s emails to the supplier.

If no account is specified, the system account specified for the supplier class will be used.

Report The Purchase order or Supplier ledger report to be used as the email’s body for this mailing, if the mailing uses a report rather than an email template (notification template).
Notification template

The notification template to be used to generate personalised emails for the mailing.

For each mailing, either a report or a template can be specified.

Format

The format in which the document based on the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no other preferences have been specified for recipients.

Select one of the following options: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.

Active A check box that, if selected, indicates that this mailing is active for this supplier.
Overridden When this check box is not selected, the supplier class mailing will be used as it is.
### The Recipients table
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails for the selected mailing.

Specify one of the following options:

Primary
The contact specified as the supplier’s primary contact
Remittance
The contact specified as the supplier’s remittance contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the supplier’s shipping contact
Employee
The employee of your company who handles the supplier’s documents or is otherwise associated with the supplier
Contact
Any additional contact of the supplier
Contact ID The recipient of the selected type.
Email The email address of this recipient.
Format

The format in which the document (if applicable) will be sent to this recipient.

Select one of the following options: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.

Active

When this check box is selected, this contact is active.

Only active recipients receive the emails.

Bcc When this check box is selected, this contact will receive blind carbon copies (Bcc) of the emails.
### The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for a supplier, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific supplier. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Supplier discount codes (AP204000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000 page You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete supplier discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discount codes (AP204000) You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete supplier discount codes defined in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete supplier discount codes defined in your company. To complete the configuration of supplier discounts, specify discount series for each discount code in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Define supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes/) + [Apply discounts to extended cost or unit cost](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/apply-discounts-to-extended-cost-or-unit-cost/) ## The top part In the top part, you can select a supplier whose discounts you want to configure.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier associated with the discount codes displayed in the window.
## The Discount codes tab This table lists all the discount codes defined in the system for supplier discounts and you can use them to create new discount code series.
Column Description
Discount code The unique code for the supplier discount. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the supplier discount. Max. 50 characters, both numbers and letters.
Discount type

The type of the supplier discount, which can be one of the following options:

Line
The discount applies to a document line.
Group
The discount applies to multiple lines in the same document.
Document
The discount applies to the document amount.
Applicable to

The entity to which the discount may be applied. For a Line or Group discount, you can select one of the following options:

Item
The discount is applied if the document includes specific items.
Item price class
The discount is applied if the document includes items from a specific item price class.
Location
The discount is applied if the document is associated with specific supplier location.
Item and location
The discount is applied if the document includes specific items purchased from specific supplier location.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally.

For a document-level discount, only one option is available:

Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally.
Manual When this check box is selected, this supplier discount is excluded from automatic searches for the best available discount. You can, however, add manual discounts to a document line or to a document.
Exclude from discountable amount When this check box is selected, the line amount is excluded from the amount that is the base for any applicable Group or Document discount. This option is available for only line-level discounts.
Skip document discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that after this supplier discount has been applied, no other applicable discounts should be applied. This option is available to only Group discounts.
Auto numbering When this check box is selected, automatic numbering is used for generating IDs for series based on this discount code. By default, the discount code will be used as a prefix for generating series IDs, but in the Last number column you can instead specify a string to be used as a template for automatic numbering.
Last number

The last series ID used for a series, if series IDs are auto-numbered.

If you enter a string here before any series is created, the string will be used as a template for automatic numbering. The string may contain up to 10 characters with numbers at the end. The last letter used divides the string into a prefix and the integer to be auto-incremented.

If no value is specified, the discount code will be used as a prefix.

## The Calculation tab This tab provides settings that are used for all discounts of this supplier.
Element Description
Apply line discount to

The way the line discount will be applied. Select one of the following options:

Extended cost
The discount will be applied to the line amount (that is, to the item’s extended cost).
Unit cost
The discount will be applied to the item’s unit cost.
Supplier discounts (AP205000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000 page You use this window to define the series for supplier discount codes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discounts (AP205000) You use this window to define the series for supplier discount codes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + A discount series specifies exactly how the supplier discount is calculated, based on the amount or quantity of the line item or on the amount of the document. + A series for a discount includes a list of break points, with each break point specifying the range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts that are qualified for the specific discount amount or percentage. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The tabs and options in the window depend on the type of the discount code. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create discount series (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series/create-discount-series-ap205000/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Update discounts Opens the Update discounts dialog box, where you can select pending discount series to update them by their start date (pending date). As a result of update, the current discount amount (or percent) becomes the last discount amount (or percent) and the pending discount amount (or percent) becomes the current discount.
### The Update discounts dialog box You use this dialog box to select discounts by pending date and to process them.
Element Description
Filter date The latest pending date to select discount series for updating.
OK (button) Updates the selected (by date) discounts.
Cancel (button) Cancels your selection and closes the dialog box.
## The top part In the top part, you can select the supplier whose discount you want to configure and the supplier discount code, and then create series for this discount.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose discounts are displayed in the window.
Discount code The code of the supplier discount for which you want to create a new series or view an existing one.
Series The ID of the series defined for the supplier discount code. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters. An ID will be generated by the system if automatic numbering is selected for the discount in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window.
Active When this check box is selected, the series is active. The active series for the same discount should not have overlapping time intervals or, if they do, they should apply to different entities.
Promotional When this check box is selected, the series is the supplier’s promotional discount. For promotional discount series, specify the effective date and the expiration date ( End date ).
Effective date The date when the series becomes effective; this field appears for promotional discount series only (that is, those for which the Promotional check box is selected).
Expiration date The date when the promotional discount expires. Expiration date is visible for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Description A brief description of the series. Max. 30 characters, both numbers and letters.
Discount by

The way the discount is specified for this discount series. You can select one of the following options:

Percent
The supplier discount is specified by a percentage.
Amount
The supplier discount is specified by a fixed amount.
Free item
The supplier discount is defined by a specific quantity of certain free item added to an order. This option is available only for group-level discounts (selected discount code is of the Group type).
Break by

The way the break points for this discount series are specified. Select one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified amounts.
Prorate discount When this check box is selected, the discount can be prorated. With prorated discounts, the amount of the discount is calculated as if the order is split into multiple orders, so that you can get the largest possible discount. To determine the amount of the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, using the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount amount according to the break points used.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when the discount series was last updated. Last update date is visible for only a non-promotional discount series; the system inserts a value if the series has been updated at least once.
## The Discount breakpoints tab You use the **Discount breakpoints** tab to define for a new series the discount tiers according to the options selected in the top part, or to view the details of an existing series. The columns in this table generally depend on the options selected in the **Discount by** and **Break by** fields. ### With Quantity as the break by option If **Quantity** is selected as the **Break by** option, the table has the following columns.
Column Description
Break quantity The quantity of items (break quantity) that starts a new range for a discount level for the currently effective series. Any break quantity should be specified in the base units.
Discount percent The discount percent to be currently used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Discount amount The discount amount to be used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending break quantity The quantity of items (break point) that starts a new range for the pending (not yet effective) series.
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used with the pending break point for the pending series if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending discount amount The amount to be used as the discount for the pending series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break quantity The quantity of item (break point) that started the range for the discount series used before the effective date.
Last discount percent The discount percent used for the break point for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last discount amount The amount used as the discount for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Effective date The date when the current series became effective.
### With Amount as break by option If **Amount** is selected as the **Break by** option, the table has the following columns.
Column Description
Break amount The line or document amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Discount amount The discount percent to be used for the amounts that exceed this break amount for the currently effective series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Discount percent The discount percent to be currently used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (one that is not yet in effect).
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used for amounts in this range of the pending series if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending discount amount The discount amount to be used for the amounts in this range of the pending series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last discount percent The percentage used for the break point in the previously effective series. This column appears if the Percent option is selected in the Discount by field.
Last discount amount The amount used as the discount for the amounts in this range in the previously effective series. This column appears if the Amount option is selected in the Discount by field.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
### With the Promotional check box selected
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new amount range for the promotional series if Amount is selected as the Break by option.
Break quantity The quantity (break point) that starts the new quantity range for the promotional series if Quantity is selected as the Break by option.
Discount amount The amount of the discount for this range for the promotional series. This column appears if Amount is selected in the Discount by field.
Discount percent The percent of the discount for this range for the promotional series. This column appears if Percent is selected in the Discount by field.
Free item qty. The quantity of free items to be used as the discount in this amount (quantity) range for this promotional series. This column appears if Free item is selected in the Discount by field.
## The Free items tab The **Free items** tab of the window has a table showing the free items to be added as the discount. This tab appears only if **Free item** is selected in the **Discount by** field.
Element Description
Free item The free item (by its item ID) that is added to orders as the discount for this series.
Pending free item The free item (by its item ID) that will be added to orders as the discount for this series, starting on the date specified in the Pending date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last free item The free item (by its item ID) that had been added to orders as the discount for this series before the date shown in the Last date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last update A read-only field that shows the date when this discount series has been updated last.
## The Items tab The **Items** tab of the window has a table showing the items to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item** (**Item** or **Location and item**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Item ID The item to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the item.
## The Locations tab The **Locations** tab of the window has a table showing the locations to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Location** (**Location** or **Location and item**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Location The location to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the location.
Supplier history summary (AP406000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-history-summary-ap406000 page You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier history summary (AP406000) You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can view current balances or balances by a past period. ## The top part You use these elements to select suppliers that meet particular criteria, such as supplier class or currency of supplier transactions.
Element Description
Company The company whose details you want to view. The default is the current company.
Branch

The branch whose details you want to view.

By default, it is the current branch.

From period The first financial period for inquiry.
To period The last financial period for inquiry.
Include prepayments into YTD balance When this check box is selected, the balance of prepayments will be included in a supplier’s year-to-date balance.
Show suppliers with no changes When this check box is selected, supplier accounts with no changes will be included in the balance history for the selected period.
Company beg. balance The beginning balance of the selected company.
Company purchases total The purchases total of the selected company.
Company payments total The payments total of the selected company.
Company adjustments and discounts total The adjustments and discounts total of the selected company.
Company YTD balance The year-to-date balance of the selected company.
## The table This table lists all the suppliers whose details match the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier.
Supplier account name The supplier name as it appears on the documents.
Branch The branch of the supplier.
Beg. balance The beginning balance of the supplier.
Purchases The balance of the supplier’s purchases.
Payments + prepayments The balance of the supplier’s payments and prepayments.
Adj. and discounts The balance of the supplier’s adjustments and discounts.
Year to date balance The year-to-date balance of the supplier.
Supplier locations (AP303010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010 page In this window, you can add a new location for a particular supplier or view the details of an existing location. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier locations (AP303010) In this window, you can add a new location for a particular supplier or view the details of an existing location. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can open this window directly by navigating to it, or as a pop-up window from the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + This window is available if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select a supplier and create a new location for it, or select an existing location for editing.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose locations you want to view or add new ones.
Location ID The supplier’s location ID, which you can type. Max. 6 characters, both numbers and letters.
Active When this check box is selected, the location is active and in use. For auditing purposes, locations cannot be removed; if a location is not used, clear the check box to mark the location as inactive.
Location name A name that describes the supplier location. Max. 30 characters, both numbers and letters.
## The General information tab By using the elements on this tab, you can specify the location's contact and address information. ### The Location address section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the location address is the same as the company’s main address, and the elements below are populated with the company’s address.
Address 1 The first line of the address.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Address 3 The third line of the address.
Postcode

The supplier location’s postcode.

If an input mask has been set for postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window, type the code to fit this mask.

City The city of the location.
Country The country of the location.
County The county or province of the location.
View on map Click this to view the supplier location on the map.
### The Location contact section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the information for this group of elements is the same as the supplier’s main information, and the elements below it are populated with this information.
Company name The legal business name of the supplier at this location.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The default email address of the contact at this location.
Web The website address (if any) of the supplier at this location.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the location.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the location.
Fax The default fax number of the location.
### The Location details section
Element Description
VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier location.
Corporate ID The corporate ID connected with the supplier location.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document for a selected supplier location in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount on the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount on the document detail line does not include VAT.

You can override this mode at the document level.

VAT registration ID

The supplier’s VAT registration ID associated with the location.

You can set an input mask for this ID in the VAT zones (TX206000) window.

Receiving branch The branch of your company that receives goods from this supplier location.
EDI code An ID for the electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data exchange, used by AutoInvoice.
Print order When this check box is selected, orders from the supplier at this location will be printed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved.
Email order When this check box is selected, orders from the supplier at this location will be emailed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved. Emailing the order can be required along with printing it; in this case, printing is performed first.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to store the goods from the supplier at this location.

This field appears if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Shipping terms The shipping terms used by the supplier at this location.
Ship via The carrier used by the supplier at this location.
FOB point The location where title for the shipment passes from the supplier to your company.
Lead time (days) The number of days needed for the shipment to reach the specified receiving branch when sent from the supplier.
### The Receipt actions section
Element Description
Min. receipt (%)

The minimum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a smaller quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Larger quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is less than the percentage specified as the Max. receipt (%).

Max. receipt (%)

The maximum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a larger quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Smaller quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is greater than the percentage specified as the Min. receipt (%).

Receipt threshold (%)

The minimum percentage of the total purchased items that should be received to complete the purchase order.

This setting is used if maximum or minimum percentages are not specified.

Receipt action

The action to be performed on receipt of the purchased goods if the minimum, maximum, or threshold receipt conditions are not satisfied. Select one of the following options:

Reject
Receipt of the applicable items will be rejected.
Accept but warn
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted, but the system will generate a warning for the line.
Accept
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted.
## The Payment settings tab On this tab, you specify the payment settings to be used by default for this supplier location.
Element Description
Same as default location

When this check box is selected, the payment settings to be used for this location are the same as the payment settings used for the default location of this supplier.

If it is not selected, you can specify other payment settings.

### The Remittance address section
Element Description
Same as main

When this check box is selected, the remittance address is the same as the main address.

If this check box is selected, the elements below are populated with the main address information, specified on the General settings tab.

Address 1 The first line of the remittance address.
Address 2 The second line of the remittance address.
Address 3 The third line of the remittance address.
Postcode The location’s postcode. If a rule for postcodes has been set, provide a valid postcode that matches the rule.
City The city of the remittance address.
Country The country of the remittance address.
County The county or province of the remittance address.
View on map Click this to view the supplier’s remittance location on the map.
### The Remittance information section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the remittance information for this location is the same as the supplier’s main business information (specified on the General settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window). If this check box is not selected, you can specify different remittance information.
Company name The name of the supplier’s department (which would receive the payments on behalf of this location), if it is different from the supplier name.
Attention The attention line, if used in your company’s business letters.
Email The remittance contact person’s email address.
Web The remittance contact person’s website address (if any).
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s primary phone number.
Phone 2 An additional phone number for the remittance contact person.
Fax Another phone number for the remittance contact person.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Payment method The default payment method to be used for the supplier at this location. Payment methods available for selection are marked as Use for suppliers. The Payment instructions area (with user-defined columns) appears below if such details were specified for the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method to be used for operations with the supplier at this location.
Charge bearer

“Charge bearer” is a term used by the banks, to determine who will bear the cost of the bank charges. The available values are also determined by the bank. This is used only if you use AutoPay. If you leave this field blank, the system selects Shared as default. The options are:

  • Payer
  • Beneficiary
  • Shared
  • Service level
Account used for payment The bank account to be used for payments to the supplier.
Payment by

An option that defines when this supplier at this location should get their payments. You can select one of the following options:

Due day
Select this option to pay a supplier invoice so that the payment can reach the supplier before the due date of the invoice. The payment proper date is defined based on the number of days specified as the payment lead time.
Discount day
Select this option to pay a supplier invoice so that the payment can reach the supplier when a cash discount is still available.
Payment lead time (days)

The number of days required for the payment to be delivered to the supplier location.

If the value is non zero, the payment will be issued the specified number of days earlier than the due date or the cash discount date.

Pay separately

When this check box is selected, each supplier document should be paid by a separate payment.

If this check box is not selected, documents for this supplier may be paid jointly.

The Payment instructions area provides the details for the payment method used by the supplier, if these details have been configured in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. ## The General ledger accounts tab By using this tab, you can specify the General ledger accounts to be used by default for this location. By selecting the **Same as default location** check box, you can choose to use for this location the same accounts as were specified for the default supplier location.
Element Description
Same as default location When this check box is selected, the general ledger accounts to be used for this location are the same as the accounts used for the default location of this supplier. If it is not selected, you can select other accounts and subaccounts.
Supplier account The liability account used to record the supplier balance associated with the location.
Supplier ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record supplier balance associated with the location.
Expense account The expense account used to record expenses incurred for the supplier at this location.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account used to record expenses.
Expense EU account The EU expense account used to record expenses.
Expense account, import The import expense account used to record expenses.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record expenses incurred for the supplier.
Discount account The account used to record discounts.
Discount sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record discounts.
Retainage payable account The account used to record the retained amounts on invoices for the supplier location. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window
Retainage payable sub.

The subaccount used to record the retained amounts on invoices for the supplier location.

This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window

Supplier payments (AP302000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000 page In this window, you can create various payment documents, view and edit the details of existing payment documents, and add finance charges applied by the bank for payment processing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier payments (AP302000) In this window, you can create various payment documents, view and edit the details of existing payment documents, and add finance charges applied by the bank for payment processing. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction Furthermore, you can apply a payment document to purchase invoices and adjustments, as well as release the payment document. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier ledger payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-supplier-ledger-payment/) + [Process one payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-one-payment/) + [Void a payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/void-a-payment/) + [Match a credit note before payment with AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/match-a-credit-note-before-payment-with-autopay/) + [Apply a prepayment to invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/apply-a-prepayment-to-invoices/) + [Unapply a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/unapply-a-prepayment/) + [Enter a refund for a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/enter-a-refund-for-a-prepayment/) + [Void a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/void-a-prepayment/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the payment.
Void Voids or cancels the payment.
Fix general ledger link

This button appears when a link between the payment and the general ledger transaction is missing, and the payment with an incorrect status cannot be modified or deleted. Use this button to fix the missing connection between the payment and the general ledger transaction.

Note: If the payment has an unapplied balance, additional steps are necessary to ensure accurate data:

Get balance from bank Gets the balance of the payments from the bank.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu option:

Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier details (AP402000) window with the details of the supplier selected for the payment.
Reports

Provides the following menu options:

Unreleased transactions (detailed
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) report.
Document register (detailed)
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) report.
Payment register
Navigates to the Payment register (AP622500) report.
## The top part You use this area to specify summary information on a new payment or other document, or to select an existing document.
Element Description
Type

The type of supplier ledger payment document. The following types are available:

Payment
This type designates payments for purchase invoices with the Open status. One payment may be applied to one or multiple invoices.
Purchase credit note
A document of this type may be applied as a payment for purchase invoices and credit notes.
Prepayment
A document of this type represents amounts paid in advance for future purchases or services.
Supplier refund
A payment of this type can directly adjust the cash account, and may be applied to purchase credit notes.
Voided refund:
This type represents a cancelled refund.
Voided payment
This type represents a cancelled payment.
Supplier write-off
A document of this type represents a supplier write-off.
Ref. no. The unique identifier of the supplier ledger document, which is assigned by the system in accordance with the number series specified in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

On hold
This status typically applies to draft documents. It is the default status for new documents when the Hold documents on entry option is enabled in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. A payment with the On hold status cannot have any applied invoices or adjustments. If the payment method requires printing and the payment has not been printed, you cannot remove the hold status from the payment.
Printed
After editing is completed and the payment, if required, has been printed, the status of the payment is changed to Printed. A document with this status can be released.
Open
Indicates that the document is released, but the application amount is less than the payment amount.
Reserved
Indicates that the document was released and then put on hold. A user selected the Hold status for the document with the Open status and the system changed the document status from Open to Reserved. Reserved documents could not be applied to outstanding documents. Clear the Hold check box to release the document from hold.
Closed
Indicates that the document is released and closed (application amount is equal to the payment amount).
Voided
The document has been voided.
Write-off
The document originates from a write-off.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the status of the document is On hold.

This check box is disabled for purchase credit notes.

Date The date when the payment is applied. The default value is the current business date, but you can change the date. This field is disabled for purchase credit notes.
Financial period The financial period of the payment application.
Payment ref.

A payment reference number, which can be a system-generated number or an external reference number entered manually.

The system requires and validates the uniqueness of the entered payment reference number, if all the following conditions are met:

  • The Hold check box of the document is cleared. Otherwise, entering a payment reference number is not required.
  • The Require unique payment ref. check box is selected for the supplier’s payment method in the Payment methods (CA204000) window. Otherwise, the system does not validate the uniqueness of the entered payment reference number.

This field is not available for purchase credit notes.

Supplier The supplier to receive the payment.
Location

The supplier’s location.

Once the supplier is selected, the supplier’s main location is specified here by default.

Payment method

The payment method associated with the supplier.

This field is not available for purchase credit notes.

Cash account

The cash account associated with the payment method.

The value may be changed, but the currency of the cash account should be the same as the one specified in the Currency field.

This field is not available for purchase credit notes.

Currency

The currency of the payment; by default, it is the currency associated with the cash account.

It can be a currency other than the supplier’s default currency if currency overriding is allowed for the supplier account.

Description

A description for the payment. You may use up to 50 alphanumeric characters.

For write-off documents, the description is taken from the reason code.

Payment amount The total payment amount that should be applied to the documents.
Unapplied bal. The balance that has not been applied. This will be a non-zero value if the payment amount is not equal to a document’s total amount.
Application amt. The amount to be applied on the application date.
Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Bank balance The balance of the payment in the bank.
## The Documents to apply tab By using this tab, you can create a list of documents to which the payment should be applied. If you click **Load documents** in the table toolbar, the system adds open purchase credit notes (if any) at the top of the list in addition to invoices and credit adjustments. Documents can also be applied first at a later stage. After the release of the payment document, the details are updated and moved to the **Application history** tab.
Button Description
Load documents

Loads appropriate invoices and adjustments of the supplier.

Any open purchase credit notes will be loaded too and will appear at the top of the list.

Column Description
Document type The type of the document to which the payment should be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the supplier ledger document to which the payment should be applied.
Amount paid The amount to be paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The actual amount of cash discount taken.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if withholding taxes are applicable).
Date Either the date when the supplier ledger document was created or the date of the supplier’s original document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash discount date The date when a cash discount from the supplier is available.
Cross rate A cross rate that you can optionally specify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.
Balance The amount before the discount is taken.
Cash discount balance The difference between the cash discount that was available and the actual amount of cash discount taken.
With. tax balance The difference between the amount of the tax to be withheld and the actual withheld amount (if any withholding taxes are applicable).
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted.
Supplier ref. The original reference number of the document or the ID assigned to it by a supplier (for informational purposes).
Reason code A reason code that defines an account, subaccount and description to be used for writing off balances for supplier invoices.
## The Application history tab On this tab, you can view the history of the payment application. The table on the tab is blank until the document is released.
Button Description
Reverse application Reverses the application of payments to invoices or credit adjustments. If the original application involved transactions and changes of statuses and balances of documents, then the reversing generates a reversing batch and changes the statuses and balances of the involved documents.
Column Description
Batch number The ID of the batch that has adjusted the appropriate account balances. When you click this number, the Journal transactions (GL301000) window open, in which you can view the details of the batch.
Doc. type The type of the document to which the payment was applied.
Invoice no. The number of the supplier ledger document to which the payment was applied. By clicking this number, the document details window opens.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected on the window.
Cash discount taken The discount taken during the application on the specified date.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if applicable).
Financial period The financial period of payment application.
Date The date when the supplier ledger document was created.
Due date The due date of the purchase invoice.
Cash discount date The day when a discount from the supplier was available.
Balance The amount after the discount was taken.
Cash discount balance The amount of the discount taken.
Description A description of the payment.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document was posted.
Supplier ref. The original reference number of the document or the ID assigned by the supplier (for informational purposes).
VAT adjustment This check box is selected if there is a VAT adjustment connected with the payment.
VAT doc. no Opens the window from which the VAT document connected with the payment originates.
VAT purchase credit note Opens the window from which the VAT purchase credit note connected with the payment originates.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the supplier ledger account and subaccount used in the payment. For a released supplier ledger payment document, the tab also contains a reference to the batch that implements transactions.
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that adjusts the appropriate account balances when the document is released.
Branch The branch of origin for this payment.
Supplier account/Write-off account

Supplier account: The liability account specified as the default account for the supplier.

Write-off account: The general ledger account to be updated by the transaction amount for transactions marked by the reason code.

If the write-off reason code set in the Supplier ledger preferences has a cash account assigned, you will get an error message when posting write-off transactions. You need to change the account for this reason code to another account.

Supplier ledger sub./Write-off sub.

Supplier ledger subaccount: The default subaccount for the supplier.

Write-off subaccount: The corresponding subaccount to be used with the reason code.

Payment date The date of the supplier ledger payment document.
Period The financial period corresponding to the payment date.
Cleared

When this check box is selected, the payment was cleared in the process of reconciliation.

If a cash account does not require reconciliation (the Requires reconciliation check box is cleared for the account in the Cash accounts (CA202000) window), this check box is selected by default.

Clear date The date when the payment was cleared.
Batch deposit When this check box is selected, the supplier refund should be added to a deposit.
Deposited When this check box is selected, the supplier refund is deposited.
Batch deposit date The date when the batch is deposited.
Batch deposit no. The number of deposited batch.
## The Remittance information tab This tab holds the remittance information used for the payment to the supplier. By default, the elements are populated with location-related information, but they can be overridden if needed. ### The Remittance contact section
Element Description
Override contact When this check box is not selected, the remittance contact information is the same as the contact information specified on the Payment settings tab of the supplier location. If the check box is selected, you can enter other contact information.
Business name The name of the supplier’s department to receive the payment.
Attention The attention line, if used in your company’s business letters
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s primary phone number.
Email The remittance contact person’s email address.
### Remittance address section
Element Description
Override address When this check box is selected, the remittance address is the same as the location’s remittance address. If it is selected, the elements may be used to enter another address.
Address 1 The first line of the remittance address.
Address 2 The second line of the remittance address.
City The supplier’s city.
Country The supplier’s country.
County The county of the remittance address.
Postcode The location’s postal code.
## The Finance charges tab This tab displays a list of finance charges applied by the bank for payment processing. Finance charges cannot be specified for refunds and purchase credit notes. To add finance charges to a prepayment, specify them on the payment that pays the prepayment request. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Entry type The charge, selected by its entry type ID. You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.
Description A detailed description of the entry type to be used as a finance charge.
Offset account The account that is used for this finance charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this finance charge.
Amount The amount of the finance charge.
Supplier prices (AP202000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000 page This window allows you to add, view, and edit the prices of stock and non-stock items for each supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier prices (AP202000) This window allows you to add, view, and edit the prices of stock and non-stock items for each supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Any changes made will take effect immediately. + Different suppliers may offer different prices for the same item. + You can create a price worksheet that includes all prices for items matching the selected criteria. ## What to do from this window + [Maintain and review supplier prices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/maintain-and-review-supplier-prices/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create price worksheet

Navigate to the Supplier price worksheets (AP202010) window to create a price worksheet with all prices that match the selected criteria in the current window. A new worksheet is created by default, with the On hold status and the current business date.

If there are multiple records for the same item with different effective dates in the selection, you must enter a specific date in the Effective as of field to remove duplicates. All records in the worksheet will have the same effective date.

## The top part In the top part, you can choose purchase prices to view and potentially modify based on their supplier, specific item, effective date, and item class. You have the option to display prices for items assigned to your work group (or another specific work group), or only display prices for items assigned to you.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier for which you want to review purchase price information.
Item ID The ID of the item for which you want to review purchase price information.
Item class The item class of the prices of items for which you want to review purchase price information. You can leave the field blank to view information on item prices in all item classes.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price of the item is valid.
Effective as of A date that you select to view or edit prices effective on or after this date.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use to select the product manager as follows:

  • Select the Me check box to view the prices of items assigned to you. The field will contain your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another user name to view the prices of items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the check boxes blank to view the prices of the items assigned to all users of the selected product work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the product work group of the product manager of the prices of the items you want to view:

  • Select the My check box to view the prices of the items assigned to your product work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Clear the My check box and select a work group to display the prices of items assigned to the product work group (or to a particular product manager).
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the prices of items assigned to all product work groups.
## The table This table shows the prices of items based on your specified criteria. You can view and edit existing items, and add new records.
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier for which you want to review prices.
Supplier name The name of the supplier for which you want to review prices.
Item ID The stock or non-stock item, by its item ID, for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the prices apply.
Promotional When this check box is selected, the item’s price is considered promotional. Promotional prices should have expiration dates, after which they are no longer valid, and may overlap with regular prices.
Break quantity

The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with a specific price.

This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Price The price for the item. You can set any price here and it becomes effective immediately after you have saved.
Currency The currency in which this supplier’s price is specified.
Effective date The date when the price became effective.
Expiration date The date when the price expires.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the item.
Supplier price worksheets (AP202010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010 page You can use this window to create supplier-specific price worksheets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier price worksheets (AP202010) You can use this window to create supplier-specific price worksheets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + By using a worksheet, you can make changes to prices in bulk. + Prices defined in a worksheet become effective when you release the worksheet; before you release it, you can make edits and save your changes. + You can create a worksheet with promotional prices and set an expiration date for the promotion. You can use also a worksheet to calculate the pending prices for multiple items by using the price basis you specify. + You can populate a worksheet by manually adding new rows, uploading prices from an Excel file, using Visma Net import scenarios, and clicking the **Add item** and **Copy prices** buttons. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier price worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/create-a-supplier-price-worksheet/) + [Calculate pending supplier prices for items](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/calculate-pending-supplier-prices-for-items/) ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
Release

Makes the prices defined in the worksheet effective.

The release process validates records, ensuring that the following criteria are met:

  • Pending prices should be set for all records.

If you do not want to update a price, delete the row from the table.

  • Regular prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure (UoM), and currency may not overlap in time.
  • Promotional prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time.

Promotional and regular prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure, and currency may overlap each other in time.

## The top part In this part, you can select a price worksheet by its reference number to view its information, or you can create a worksheet.
Element Description
Ref. no.

The reference number of the worksheet in the system; for a new document, the NEW string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated when you save the document.

The number series to be used is defined in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.

Status

The status of the worksheet, which is one of the following:

On hold
Indicates that a user can edit the worksheet but cannot release it. The Hold check box is selected, and you should clear the check box when you are ready to release the worksheet.
Open
Indicates that the worksheet is ready to be released and cannot be edited. The Hold check box is cleared.
Released
Indicates that the prices defined in the worksheet have become effective.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the worksheet is a draft.

A worksheet with the Hold status may be edited and cannot be released.

Description A brief description of the worksheet.
Effective date The date when the prices defined in the worksheet become effective.
Promotional A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices defined in the worksheet are promotional and an expiration date must be specified.
Expiration date

The date when the promotional prices expire.

This field becomes available if the Promotional check box is selected.

Overwrite overlapping prices When this check box is selected, the prices whose effective dates overlap with the effective date of the worksheet will be overwritten by the prices defined in the worksheet.
## The table This table displays the prices for items in the selected worksheet. You can view the existing items, upload the listed items with their pricing information, add items from inventory, or copy the existing list to another currency. For all the listed items, you can manually define new pending prices for all units used for the item, or you can direct the system to perform calculation of new pending prices. ### The table buttons
Button Description
Add item Opens the Add item to worksheet dialog box so that you can load the list of items from the Inventory workspace.
Copy prices Opens the Copy prices dialog box so that you can copy prices from the selection you specify to a new price worksheet for another supplier.
Calculate pending prices Opens the Calculate pending prices dialog box so that you can calculate new pending prices or recalculate (update) pending prices by using the selected price basis.
### The table columns
Column Description
Supplier The supplier, by its ID, for which you want to review the price.
Item ID The ID of the item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price is applied for the item.
Break qty. The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with a specific price. This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Source price The currently effective price. When you add a new record, the value corresponds to the price effective on the date set in the Effective date field of the worksheet. However, when you are adding records by using the Copy prices dialog box, the value depends on the selected source. If there are no prices defined, the base price of the item is displayed.
Pending price The pending price for the item. You can set any price here and it becomes effective immediately after you release the worksheet.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT The VAT whose amount is included in the price.
## The Add item to worksheet dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Add item** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can upload the list of items that match the criteria you have selected, with their current price information from the Inventory workspace. To each added item is assigned the supplier and currency you specify in the dialog box. ### The top part
Column Description
Item The ID of the item.
Item class ID The ID of the class of the items.
Price class ID The ID of the item price class.
Product manager The product manager assigned to this item.
Me When this check box is selected, you use only your own products.
Work group The ID of the product work group.
My When this check box is selected, you use only your own work groups.
Supplier The supplier for whom the item is used.
Currency The currency to be used on the item.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price is applied for the item.
### The table buttons
Button Description
Add

Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet.

The dialog box stays open so that you can change selection criteria and add more items. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.

Add and close

Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet and closes the dialog box.

The Pending sales price column is blank for all added items.

Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
### The table columns
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the item.
Item class ID The ID of the class of the items.
Description The description of the item.
Price class ID The ID of the item price class.
Price manager The price manager responsible for the pricing policy.
Work group The ID of the product work group.
Item ID The ID of the item.
Item class description The description of the item class of the item.
Price class description The description of the price class of the item.
## The Copy prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Copy prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can add records to the currently selected worksheet by copying items that match the selection criteria and assigning the specified supplier and currency to the copied records. If the source and destination currencies are different, you specify the type and date of the rate to be used for currency conversion. ### The dialog box elements
Element Description
Source supplier The supplier whose items you want to copy.
Source currency The currency of the items you want to copy.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the item prices will be copied.
Effective as of The date that the effective date of the item prices should match.
Promotional price When this check box is selected, the items with promotional prices will be copied.
Destination supplier The supplier to which you want to copy items.
Destination currency

The currency to which you want to copy prices.

If the source and destination currencies are different, you should specify the conversion details in the Currency conversion section.

Warehouse The warehouse to which the item prices will be copied.
Rate type The rate type to be used for currency conversion.
Currency effective date The date when the exchange rate for the destination currency becomes effective.
### The dialog box buttons
Button Description
Copy Copies the selected items, adds the copied items to the currently selected worksheet, and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Calculate pending prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Calculate pending prices** button. There you can calculate the new pending prices in the worksheet by using the selected price basis. ### The Price adjustment section In this area, you specify an increase or decrease as a percentage of the basis.
Element Description
% of original price The percentage at which the new pending prices will be calculated by using the selected price basis. By default, this is 100%, which reflects no change. If you specified 98%, the new prices would be 98% of the price selected as basis.
Decimal places The number of places after the decimal point to be shown for prices expressed in the destination currency.
Update with zero price when basis is zero When this check box is selected, the pending price parameter of the price record will be updated with the zero value if the selected price basis for this record is zero.
### The Price basis section
Column Description
Last cost An option that you select to calculate prices based on the items’ last costs.
Average/standard cost An option that you select to calculate prices based on the items’ average/standard costs.
MSRP An option that you select to calculate prices based on the manufacturer’s suggested retail price.
Source price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the values specified in the Source price column.
Pending price An option that you select to recalculate pending prices based on currently pending prices.
Update (button) Updates all pending prices in the currently selected worksheet with the new values.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without updating prices.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Supplier summary (AP401000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000 page You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier summary (AP401000) You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can view current balances or balances by a past period. + If no currency is selected, the system displays information on all documents in the base currency. ## What to do from this window + [Track prepayments to suppliers](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/track-prepayments-to-suppliers/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Reports

Provides the following options for fast access to reports:

Balance by supplier
Navigates to the Balance by supplier (AP63250S) report.
Supplier history
Navigates to the Supplier history (AP652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AP631000) window.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AP631500) window.
## The top part You use these elements to select suppliers that meet particular criteria, such as supplier class or currency of supplier transactions.
Element Description
Company The company whose information you want to view. The default is the current company.
Branch

The branch whose information you want to view.

By default, it is the current branch.

Period

The financial period for inquiry.

If you make no selection, information about all open periods will be displayed.

Supplier class

The supplier class for inquiry.

If you make no selection, information on all suppliers will be displayed.

Supplier account

The supplier account for inquiry.

If you make no selection, information on all accounts will be displayed.

Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Currency

The currency of transactions for inquiry.

If you make no selection, all data will be displayed in the base currency.

Split by currency When this check box is selected, the supplier totals will be displayed by currency.
Suppliers with balance only

When this check box is selected, information is displayed only for suppliers with non-zero balances.

Clear the check box to display all the suppliers.

By financial period

When this check box is selected, balances are shown by the financial period of the document transactions.

Clear the check box to show balances by documents’ dates.

Total balance A read-only field showing the total balance of outstanding invoices.
Total prepayments A read-only field showing the total amount of prepayments released to suppliers.
Total retained balance A read-only field showing the total retained balance. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The table This table lists all the suppliers whose details match the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Supplier no. The ID of the supplier.
Supplier name The supplier name as it appears on the documents.
Last activity period The most recent period with operations connected with the supplier.
Currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier, by its ID.
Beginning balance (currency)

The outstanding balance at the start of the selected period, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the beginning balance at the start of the last activity period.

Ending balance

The outstanding balance at the end of the selected period, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the ending balance of the last activity period or the currency balance.

Prepayments balance (currency)

The balance of prepayments at the end of the specified period, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the current prepayments balance.

Purchases PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of purchases, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the purchase amount during the last activity period.

Payments PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of payments to the supplier, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the payment amount during the last activity period.

Cash discount taken PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of cash discounts taken, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total amount of cash discount taken during the last activity period.

VAT withheld PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of withholding VAT, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier during the last activity period.

Credit adjustments PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of credit adjustments, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total on credit adjustments during the last activity period.

Purchase credit notes PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of purchase credit notes, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total on purchase credit notes during the last activity period.

Prepayments PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of prepayments released to the supplier, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total on prepayments during the last activity period.

Beginning balance The beginning balance of the supplier (all currencies).
Ending balance The ending balance of the supplier (all currencies).
Prepayments balance The balance on prepayments.
Purchases PTD

The period-to-date amount of purchases, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the purchase amount during the last activity period.

Payments PTD

The period-to-date amount of payments to the supplier, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the payment amount during the last activity period.

Cash discount taken PTD

The period-to-date amount of cash discounts taken, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total amount of cash discount taken during the last activity period.

VAT withheld PTD

The period-to-date amount of withholding VAT, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier during the last activity period.

Realised gain/loss PTD

The period-to-date amount of realised gains or losses on foreign currency transactions with suppliers, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the realised gain or loss (RGOL) total during the last activity period.

Credit adjustments PTD

The period-to-date amount of credit adjustments, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total on credit adjustments during the last activity period.

Debit adjustments PTD

The period-to-date amount of debit adjustments, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total on purchase credit notes during the last activity period.

Prepayments PTD

The period-to-date amount of prepayments released to the supplier, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total on prepayments during the last activity period.

Currency beginning retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage in the currency that is used in the operation with the vendor at the start of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the start of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency ending retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage in the currency that is used in the operation with the vendor at the end of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the end of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency retainage withheld PTD The period-to-date retainage withheld on the documents in the selected currency. If no period is selected, it is the retainage withheld during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency retainage released PTD The period-to-date retainage amount released on the documents in the selected currency. If no period is selected, it is the retainage released during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Beginning retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage (in the base currency) at the start of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the start of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ending retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage (in the base currency) at the end of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the end of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retainage withheld PTD The retainage amount (in the base currency) withheld in the specified period. If no period is selected, it is the retainage withheld during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retainage released PTD The retainage amount (in the base currency) released in the specified period. If no period is selected, it is the retainage released during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier VAT zone deviation (AP40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-vat-zone-deviation-ap40102s page Use this window to track purchase invoices where the VAT zone assigned to the supplier differs from the VAT zone assigned to the supplier's invoices and other purchase documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier VAT zone deviation (AP40102S) Use this window to track purchase invoices where the VAT zone assigned to the supplier differs from the VAT zone assigned to the supplier's invoices and other purchase documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View batch Opens the Journal transactions (GL301000) window where you can view the batch on the invoice with possible deviations.
View document Opens the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can view the purchase document with possible deviations.
View supplier Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window where you can view the details of the supplier with possible deviations.
## The top part
Element Description
From period The from financial period for the inquiry. If you leave the field blank, information related to all periods will be displayed, depending on the period selected in the To period field.
To period The to financial period for the inquiry. If you leave the field blank, information related to all periods will be displayed depending on the period selected in From period field.
Document type

The document type. The following types are available:

Purchase invoice
For an invoice issued by the supplier (or service provider) for goods sold or services provided
Credit adjustment
For a supplier document that adjusts the credit amount in one or several previous documents.
Purchase credit note
For a supplier document that adjusts the debit amount in one or several previous documents
Prepayment
For a supplier request for prepayment.
Ref. no. The unique identifier of the document.
Include unreleased Select this check box to also show unreleased documents.
## The table
Column Description
Batch no. The number of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions on posting. Only released documents have a batch number.
Ref. no The unique identifier of the document.
Type

The type of the document:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Credit adjustment
  • Purchase credit note
  • Prepayment
Supplier The supplier associated with the document.
Supplier name The name of the supplier as it appears on the documents.
Supplier account The liability account specified as the default account for the supplier.
Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount used for the supplier.
Description The description of the batch.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The amount to be paid on the document.
Document VAT zone The description of the document VAT zone.
Supplier VAT zone The description of the supplier’s VAT zone.
VAT total The total VAT amount of the document
Validate supplier balances (AP509900) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/validate-supplier-balances-ap509900 page This window allows you to verify the accuracy of the balances for specific suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate supplier balances (AP509900) This window allows you to verify the accuracy of the balances for specific suppliers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This validation process involves recalculating the balances using historical records and comparing them with the balances stored in the database. You should run this process only if there has been a system error resulting in incorrect supplier account balances. You can use the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) window to see if there is any discrepancy between the supplier balance and the total amount of all the released supplier documents. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Recalculates balances for the suppliers you have selected in the list.
Process all Recalculates balances for all the suppliers in the list.
## The top part You use the elements in this part to select the financial period (and, optionally, the supplier class) for which you want to validate supplier balances.
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to start validating supplier balances. By default, it is the earliest financial period that is open in Supplier ledger.
Supplier class The supplier class for which you want to validate balances. If you select no supplier class, suppliers of all classes will be displayed.
## The table This table contains the list of suppliers of the selected class (if selected) or of all classes for the selected financial period.
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier. Click the ID to navigate to the Suppliers (AP303000) window to see the details of the selected supplier.
Supplier class The class to which the supplier belongs.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.

Related pages

Windows

Approve supplier payment details (AP50950S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-supplier-payment-details-ap50950s page You can use this window to approve the supplier payment details or bank accounts, BIC/Swift accounts, and G-accounts of the suppliers on payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve supplier payment details (AP50950S) You can use this window to approve the supplier payment details or bank accounts, BIC/Swift accounts, and G-accounts of the suppliers on payments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction > [!NOTE] > There is a yellow exclamation mark sign next to the accounts that need approval. This window is available only when the **Four eyes principle bank details** option is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Approve Click this to approve the selected bank account(s) in the table.
Approve all Click this to approve all bank accounts in the table.
## The table This table displays all bank accounts on payments, which are not approved and payments that have no bank account information at all.
Column Description
Files You can view and access attachments available in the Suppliers (AP303000) window for each supplier. By clicking the View link next to the supplier’s name, the attachment will open in a new tab.
Supplier no./Employee no. The identifier of the supplier/employee on the payment.
Supplier name The name of the supplier (employee).
Location ID The location of the supplier.
Country The country of the supplier.
Account used for payment The account that is used on this payment.
IBAN The IBAN account that needs approval.
Bank account The bank account that needs approval.
Giro The giro account that needs approval.
Plusgiro The Plusgiro account that needs approval.
Bankgiro The Bankgiro account that needs approval.
FIK The FIK account that needs approval.
Swift/BIC The Swift/BIC account that needs approval.
G-account The G-account that needs approval.
Comments Any comments regarding the change in the details.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the supplier bank details.
Supplier ledger reports /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger reports Aged outstanding (AP631500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ap631500 section This report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (AP631500) This report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. + Balances are arranged by days outstanding. + The report can be shown in summary format or in detail format with the documents that created the balance. + The amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Supplier class The supplier class whose suppliers will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business date is selected.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ap631600 section This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600) This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This multi-currency report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. Balances are arranged by days outstanding. The report can be shown in summary format or in detail format with documents that created the balance. The amounts are shown in the currency of the document and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.
Supplier class The supplier class whose suppliers will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Aged past due (AP631000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ap631000 section This report lists the suppliers with past due balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due (AP631000) This report lists the suppliers with past due balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists the suppliers with past due balances. + Balances are broken down by days past due, based on the ageing periods defined for your company. + All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Supplier class The supplier class whose past due balances will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business date is selected.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Aged past due MC (AP631100) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-mc-ap631100 section This multi-currency report lists the suppliers with past due balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due MC (AP631100) This multi-currency report lists the suppliers with past due balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Balances are broken down by days past due, based on the ageing periods defined for your company. + The amounts are shown in the currencies of the documents and in the base currency. This window is available only if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Supplier class The supplier class whose balances will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business date is selected.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Aged period sensitive (AP630500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ap630500 section This report displays the list of suppliers with past due balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged period sensitive (AP630500) This report displays the list of suppliers with past due balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the list of suppliers with past due balances. + The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. + All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period

The financial period the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business period is selected.

Supplier class

The supplier class for which you want to view information.

Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Balance by GL account (AP63200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s section This report displays the balances of the supplier ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by GL account (AP63200S) This report displays the balances of the supplier ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the balances of the supplier ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the selected period. Documents are grouped by account, subaccount, and supplier. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

An indicator of the documents to be reported on. Select one of the following options:

  • Account summary

To view the supplier balance sorted by account.

  • Supplier summary:

To view the supplier balance sorted by supplier.

Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by supplier ledger account, subaccount, and supplier account.
Open + current period
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period grouped by supplier ledger account, subaccount, and supplier account.
Company The company for which you want to view information. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period The financial period for which information will be displayed. Select a financial period from the list of periods, which contains all the periods (including the closed ones). By default, the current financial period is used.
Include applications A check box that you select to include payment applications to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Balance by supplier (AP63250S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-ap63250s section This report displays the supplier balances for each account related to the supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by supplier (AP63250S) This report displays the supplier balances for each account related to the supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the supplier balances for each account related to the supplier. You can control which documents you view and whether they are matched against payments. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## What to do from this window + [View supplier balances](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/view-supplier-balances/) ### Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

An indicator of the documents to be reported on. Select one of the following options:

  • Account summary

To display the balance by supplier by account.

  • Open documents: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
  • Open + current period: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
  • All documents (supplier required): To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a supplier if you select this option.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period

The financial period for which information will be displayed.

You must select a financial period from the list of periods, which contains all the periods (including the closed ones). By default, the current financial period is used.

Supplier

The supplier to be reported on.

Either select a supplier from the list of active suppliers or make no selection to view information about all suppliers.

Include applications A check box that you select to include payment applications to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-currency-ap63300s section This multi-currency report displays the supplier balances in each of the currencies used. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S) This multi-currency report displays the supplier balances in each of the currencies used. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This multi-currency report displays the supplier balances in each of the currencies used. You can control which documents you view and whether they are matched against payments. Total amounts are also shown in the base currency. This window is available only if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

An indicator of the documents to be reported on. Select one of the following options:

  • Account summary

To display the balance by supplier account.

  • Open documents: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
  • Open + current period: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
  • All documents (supplier required): To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a supplier if you select this option.
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current company is selected.

Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period

The financial period for which information will be displayed.

You must select a financial period from the list of periods, which contains all the periods (including the closed ones). By default, the current financial period is used.

Supplier

The supplier to be reported on.

Either select a supplier from the list of active suppliers or make no selection to view information about all suppliers.

Include applications A check box that you select to include payment applications to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Batch register suppliers (AP62050S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/batch-register-suppliers-ap62050s section This report lists all the batches released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register suppliers (AP62050S) This report lists all the batches released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists all the batches released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. Transactions are listed by their date and shown with batch control totals in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Batch register suppliers (detailed) (AP621000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/batch-register-suppliers-detailed-ap621000 section This report displays all the supplier ledger batches, listed by date, posted during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register suppliers (detailed) (AP621000) This report displays all the supplier ledger batches, listed by date, posted during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays all the supplier ledger batches, listed by date, posted during the specified financial period. + Batch details include accounts, subaccounts, document reference numbers, and debit and credit amounts. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ledger The ledger to be reported on.
From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.

To period The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information. By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
Include unposted transactions If you check this box, the report will include transactions that have not been posted.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Cash requirements (AP61200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/cash-requirements-ap61200s section This report shows the cash requirements grouped by pay date and by supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash requirements (AP61200S) This report shows the cash requirements grouped by pay date and by supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows the cash requirements grouped by pay date and by supplier. The amounts due are calculated for released documents and for documents approved for payment. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the list of documents itemised by reference numbers, pay date, due date, supplier, and other details.
Summary
To view the account balances divided by the pay date.
Branch

The branch whose cash requirements you want to view.

You can select a branch, or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Cash account

The cash account whose cash requirements you want to view.

Select a cash account, or make no selection to display the cash requirements for all cash accounts.

Payment method The payment method whose cash requirements you want to view.
Supplier

The supplier whose cash requirements you want to view.

Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information about all suppliers.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Payment register (AP622500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/payment-register-ap622500 section This report shows the details of the payments (of all types or the selected type) released in the Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment register (AP622500) This report shows the details of the payments (of all types or the selected type) released in the Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows the details of the payments (of all types or the selected type) released in the Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. + Payment documents are arranged by type, date, and supplier, to make it easier for you to comprehend larger amounts of data. + Document amounts are shown in the original currencies. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Document type

The document type to be viewed.

Select one of the available types, or make no selection to view payments of all types.

Ref. no.

The reference number of the payment.

Select a specific payment by its reference number, or make no selection to view all payments of the chosen type.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Purchase invoices pending payment (AP611500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/purchase-invoices-pending-payment-ap611500 section This report shows documents that have been approved for payment but not paid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices pending payment (AP611500) This report shows documents that have been approved for payment but not paid. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows documents that have been approved for payment but not paid. + Documents are listed by cash account, document date, and supplier. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Cash account

The cash account for which you want to view information.

Select an account, or make no selection to view information for all cash accounts.

Payment method

The payment method whose documents you want to view.

Select a payment method, or make no selection to view documents of all payment methods.

Supplier

The supplier whose documents you want to view.

You can select a supplier or make no selection to view information for all suppliers.

Report date The date used for this report. By default, the current business date is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Supplier documents register (AP621500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-documents-register-ap621500 section This report lists all the documents released in supplier ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected supplier (or all suppliers). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier documents register (AP621500) This report lists all the documents released in supplier ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected supplier (or all suppliers). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists all the documents released in supplier ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected supplier (or all suppliers). + Documents are arranged by type, date, and supplier. + Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Document type

The document type to be viewed.

Select one of the available types, or make no selection to view payments of all types.

Supplier

The supplier the report will cover.

Select a supplier, or make no selection to view documents of all suppliers.

Created by The user who created the documents.
Last modified by The user who last modified the documents.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-documents-register-detailed-ap622000 section This report shows the details of the documents released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) This report shows the details of the documents released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows the details of the documents released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. + Documents are arranged by type, date, and supplier. + The details include the batch number and batch transactions. + Document amounts are shown in the original currencies. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information.

By default, the current financial period is used.

Document type

The document type to be viewed.

Select one of the available types, or make no selection to view payments of all types.

Ref. no.

The reference number of the payment.

Select a specific payment by its reference number, or make no selection to view all payments of the chosen type.

Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Sent payments (AP61300S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/sent-payments-ap61300s section This report displays the payments for which payment documents need to be printed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sent payments (AP61300S) This report displays the payments for which payment documents need to be printed. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can narrow the information by cash account, from and to batch number, and date range. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Cash account The cash account you want to view sent payments for.
From batch number The first batch number of the batch number range that the report will cover.
To batch number The last batch number of the batch number range that the report will cover.
From date The beginning date of the information you want to view.
To date The end date of the information you want to view.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Supplier profile (AP655500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-profile-ap655500 section This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected supplier or all suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier profile (AP655500) This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected supplier or all suppliers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameter to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose details will be reported, by its ID. Select a supplier, or make no selection to view details of all the suppliers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Supplier history (AP652000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-history-ap652000 section This report displays the supplier's balance history during the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier history (AP652000) This report displays the supplier's balance history during the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to view information. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches. The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period The first financial period for the date range the report will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the report will cover.
Supplier

The supplier the report will cover.

Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view historical information about all suppliers.

Include prepayments into YTD balance When this check box is selected, the balance of prepayments will be included in a supplier’s YTD balance.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Supplier summary (AP65500S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-summary-ap65500s section This report displays the supplier summary of all suppliers in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier summary (AP65500S) This report displays the supplier summary of all suppliers in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier history summary (AP652100) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-history-summary-ap652100 section This report displays a summary of balance history for suppliers whose balance has changed during the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier history summary (AP652100) This report displays a summary of balance history for suppliers whose balance has changed during the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which you want to view information.

The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch for which you want to view information. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branchsupport functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period The first financial period for the date range the report will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the report will cover.
Include prepayments into YTD balance When this check box is selected, the balance of prepayments will be included in a supplier’s YTD balance.
Show supplier with no changes When this check box is selected, supplier accounts with no changes will be included in the balance history for the selected period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Supplier specification (AP65200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-specification-ap65200s section This report displays the supplier's balance specification during the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier specification (AP65200S) This report displays the supplier's balance specification during the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period The first financial period for the date range the report will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the report will cover.
Supplier no. The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view historical information about all suppliers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Unreleased supplier documents (AP656000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/unreleased-supplier-documents-ap656000 section By using this report, you can view and print the list of supplier ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased supplier documents (AP656000) By using this report, you can view and print the list of supplier ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The financial period from which you want to view information.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Unreleased transactions (AP610700) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ap610700 section This report lists the supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (AP610700) This report lists the supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists the supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. + You can narrow the information by supplier, branch, or both criteria. + Documents are listed by document type, financial period, and document date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to view information. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches. The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. The default selection is the financial period.
Supplier The supplier whose documents you want to view. You can select a supplier or make no selection to view information for all suppliers.
Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
Include transactions on hold If you check this box, the report will include transactions that have the Hold status.
Include pre-booked transactions If you check this box, the report will include pre-booked transactions.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ap610500 section This report displays the list of supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) This report displays the list of supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the list of supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. + Documents are listed by the financial period, the document date, and the supplier on the document. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which you want to view information.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information about all companies. The default selection is the current company.

Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.

To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

The default selection is the financial period.

Document type

The document type the report should cover.

Select a document type to view only a certain type of documents.

Make no selection to view information on documents of all types.

Ref. no.

The reference number of a particular document.

Select a document by its reference number, or make no selection to view all documents.

Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
Include transactions on hold When this check box is selected, transactions that have the Hold status will be included into the report.
Include pre-booked transactions When this check box is selected, transactions that have the Pre-booked status will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}